Juniper Networks J Series Services Router J2350 Users Manual

J2350 to the manual a3e66ee0-736d-4a72-8ccd-8b7a6979ae24

2015-02-09

: Juniper-Networks Juniper-Networks-J-Series-Services-Router-J2350-Users-Manual-567097 juniper-networks-j-series-services-router-j2350-users-manual-567097 juniper-networks pdf

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 280

Download
Open PDF In Browser	View PDF

JUNOS® Software with Enhanced Services

Hardware Guide
for J-series Services Routers

Release 9.2

Juniper Networks, Inc.
1194 North Mathilda Avenue
Sunnyvale, California 94089
USA
408-745-2000

www.juniper.net
Part Number: 530-025664-01, Revision 1

This product includes the Envoy SNMP Engine, developed by Epilogue Technology, an Integrated Systems Company. Copyright © 1986-1997, Epilogue
Technology Corporation. All rights reserved. This program and its documentation were developed at private expense, and no part of them is in the public
domain.
This product includes memory allocation software developed by Mark Moraes, copyright © 1988, 1989, 1993, University of Toronto.
This product includes FreeBSD software developed by the University of California, Berkeley, and its contributors. All of the documentation and software
included in the 4.4BSD and 4.4BSD-Lite Releases is copyrighted by the Regents of the University of California. Copyright © 1979, 1980, 1983, 1986, 1988,
1989, 1991, 1992, 1993, 1994. The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved.
GateD software copyright © 1995, the Regents of the University. All rights reserved. Gate Daemon was originated and developed through release 3.0 by
Cornell University and its collaborators. Gated is based on Kirton’s EGP, UC Berkeley’s routing daemon (routed), and DCN’s HELLO routing protocol.
Development of Gated has been supported in part by the National Science Foundation. Portions of the GateD software copyright © 1988, Regents of the
University of California. All rights reserved. Portions of the GateD software copyright © 1991, D. L. S. Associates.
This product includes software developed by Maker Communications, Inc., copyright © 1996, 1997, Maker Communications, Inc.
Juniper Networks, the Juniper Networks logo, NetScreen, and ScreenOS are registered trademarks of Juniper Networks, Inc. in the United States and other
countries. JUNOS and JUNOSe are trademarks of Juniper Networks, Inc. All other trademarks, service marks, registered trademarks, or registered service
marks are the property of their respective owners.
Juniper Networks assumes no responsibility for any inaccuracies in this document. Juniper Networks reserves the right to change, modify, transfer, or
otherwise revise this publication without notice.
Products made or sold by Juniper Networks or components thereof might be covered by one or more of the following patents that are owned by or licensed
to Juniper Networks: U.S. Patent Nos. 5,473,599, 5,905,725, 5,909,440, 6,192,051, 6,333,650, 6,359,479, 6,406,312, 6,429,706, 6,459,579, 6,493,347,
6,538,518, 6,538,899, 6,552,918, 6,567,902, 6,578,186, and 6,590,785.
JUNOS Software with Enhanced Services Hardware Guide
Release 9.2
Copyright © 2008, Juniper Networks, Inc.
All rights reserved. Printed in USA.
Revision History
August 2008—Revision 1
The information in this document is current as of the date listed in the revision history.
YEAR 2000 NOTICE
Juniper Networks hardware and software products are Year 2000 compliant. The JUNOS software has no known time-related limitations through the year
2038. However, the NTP application is known to have some difficulty in the year 2036.
SOFTWARE LICENSE
The terms and conditions for using this software are described in the software license contained in the acknowledgment to your purchase order or, to the
extent applicable, to any reseller agreement or end-user purchase agreement executed between you and Juniper Networks. By using this software, you
indicate that you understand and agree to be bound by those terms and conditions. Generally speaking, the software license restricts the manner in which
you are permitted to use the software and may contain prohibitions against certain uses. The software license may state conditions under which the license
is automatically terminated. You should consult the license for further details. For complete product documentation, please see the Juniper Networks Web
site at www.juniper.net/techpubs.

■

End User License Agreement
READ THIS END USER LICENSE AGREEMENT (“AGREEMENT”) BEFORE DOWNLOADING, INSTALLING, OR USING THE SOFTWARE. BY DOWNLOADING,
INSTALLING, OR USING THE SOFTWARE OR OTHERWISE EXPRESSING YOUR AGREEMENT TO THE TERMS CONTAINED HEREIN, YOU (AS CUSTOMER
OR IF YOU ARE NOT THE CUSTOMER, AS A REPRESENTATIVE/AGENT AUTHORIZED TO BIND THE CUSTOMER) CONSENT TO BE BOUND BY THIS
AGREEMENT. IF YOU DO NOT OR CANNOT AGREE TO THE TERMS CONTAINED HEREIN, THEN (A) DO NOT DOWNLOAD, INSTALL, OR USE THE SOFTWARE,
AND (B) YOU MAY CONTACT JUNIPER NETWORKS REGARDING LICENSE TERMS.
1. The Parties. The parties to this Agreement are Juniper Networks, Inc. and its subsidiaries (collectively “Juniper”), and the person or organization that
originally purchased from Juniper or an authorized Juniper reseller the applicable license(s) for use of the Software (“Customer”) (collectively, the “Parties”).
2. The Software. In this Agreement, “Software” means the program modules and features of the Juniper or Juniper-supplied software, and updates and
releases of such software, for which Customer has paid the applicable license or support fees to Juniper or an authorized Juniper reseller. “Embedded
Software” means Software which Juniper has embedded in the Juniper equipment.
3. License Grant. Subject to payment of the applicable fees and the limitations and restrictions set forth herein, Juniper grants to Customer a non-exclusive
and non-transferable license, without right to sublicense, to use the Software, in executable form only, subject to the following use restrictions:
a. Customer shall use the Embedded Software solely as embedded in, and for execution on, Juniper equipment originally purchased by Customer from
Juniper or an authorized Juniper reseller.
b. Customer shall use the Software on a single hardware chassis having a single processing unit, or as many chassis or processing units for which Customer
has paid the applicable license fees; provided, however, with respect to the Steel-Belted Radius or Odyssey Access Client software only, Customer shall use
such Software on a single computer containing a single physical random access memory space and containing any number of processors. Use of the
Steel-Belted Radius software on multiple computers requires multiple licenses, regardless of whether such computers are physically contained on a single
chassis.
c. Product purchase documents, paper or electronic user documentation, and/or the particular licenses purchased by Customer may specify limits to
Customer’s use of the Software. Such limits may restrict use to a maximum number of seats, registered endpoints, concurrent users, sessions, calls,
connections, subscribers, clusters, nodes, realms, devices, links, ports or transactions, or require the purchase of separate licenses to use particular features,
functionalities, services, applications, operations, or capabilities, or provide throughput, performance, configuration, bandwidth, interface, processing,
temporal, or geographical limits. In addition, such limits may restrict the use of the Software to managing certain kinds of networks or require the Software
to be used only in conjunction with other specific Software. Customer’s use of the Software shall be subject to all such limitations and purchase of all applicable
licenses.
d. For any trial copy of the Software, Customer’s right to use the Software expires 30 days after download, installation or use of the Software. Customer
may operate the Software after the 30-day trial period only if Customer pays for a license to do so. Customer may not extend or create an additional trial
period by re-installing the Software after the 30-day trial period.
e. The Global Enterprise Edition of the Steel-Belted Radius software may be used by Customer only to manage access to Customer’s enterprise network.
Specifically, service provider customers are expressly prohibited from using the Global Enterprise Edition of the Steel-Belted Radius software to support any
commercial network access services.
The foregoing license is not transferable or assignable by Customer. No license is granted herein to any user who did not originally purchase the applicable
license(s) for the Software from Juniper or an authorized Juniper reseller.
4. Use Prohibitions. Notwithstanding the foregoing, the license provided herein does not permit the Customer to, and Customer agrees not to and shall
not: (a) modify, unbundle, reverse engineer, or create derivative works based on the Software; (b) make unauthorized copies of the Software (except as
necessary for backup purposes); (c) rent, sell, transfer, or grant any rights in and to any copy of the Software, in any form, to any third party; (d) remove
any proprietary notices, labels, or marks on or in any copy of the Software or any product in which the Software is embedded; (e) distribute any copy of
the Software to any third party, including as may be embedded in Juniper equipment sold in the secondhand market; (f) use any ‘locked’ or key-restricted
feature, function, service, application, operation, or capability without first purchasing the applicable license(s) and obtaining a valid key from Juniper, even
if such feature, function, service, application, operation, or capability is enabled without a key; (g) distribute any key for the Software provided by Juniper
to any third party; (h) use the Software in any manner that extends or is broader than the uses purchased by Customer from Juniper or an authorized Juniper
reseller; (i) use the Embedded Software on non-Juniper equipment; (j) use the Software (or make it available for use) on Juniper equipment that the Customer
did not originally purchase from Juniper or an authorized Juniper reseller; (k) disclose the results of testing or benchmarking of the Software to any third
party without the prior written consent of Juniper; or (l) use the Software in any manner other than as expressly provided herein.
5. Audit. Customer shall maintain accurate records as necessary to verify compliance with this Agreement. Upon request by Juniper, Customer shall furnish
such records to Juniper and certify its compliance with this Agreement.
6. Confidentiality. The Parties agree that aspects of the Software and associated documentation are the confidential property of Juniper. As such, Customer
shall exercise all reasonable commercial efforts to maintain the Software and associated documentation in confidence, which at a minimum includes
restricting access to the Software to Customer employees and contractors having a need to use the Software for Customer’s internal business purposes.

■

iii

7. Ownership. Juniper and Juniper's licensors, respectively, retain ownership of all right, title, and interest (including copyright) in and to the Software,
associated documentation, and all copies of the Software. Nothing in this Agreement constitutes a transfer or conveyance of any right, title, or interest in
the Software or associated documentation, or a sale of the Software, associated documentation, or copies of the Software.
8. Warranty, Limitation of Liability, Disclaimer of Warranty. The warranty applicable to the Software shall be as set forth in the warranty statement that
accompanies the Software (the “Warranty Statement”). Nothing in this Agreement shall give rise to any obligation to support the Software. Support services
may be purchased separately. Any such support shall be governed by a separate, written support services agreement. TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED
BY LAW, JUNIPER SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY LOST PROFITS, LOSS OF DATA, OR COSTS OR PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES,
OR FOR ANY SPECIAL, INDIRECT, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THIS AGREEMENT, THE SOFTWARE, OR ANY JUNIPER OR
JUNIPER-SUPPLIED SOFTWARE. IN NO EVENT SHALL JUNIPER BE LIABLE FOR DAMAGES ARISING FROM UNAUTHORIZED OR IMPROPER USE OF ANY
JUNIPER OR JUNIPER-SUPPLIED SOFTWARE. EXCEPT AS EXPRESSLY PROVIDED IN THE WARRANTY STATEMENT TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY LAW,
JUNIPER DISCLAIMS ANY AND ALL WARRANTIES IN AND TO THE SOFTWARE (WHETHER EXPRESS, IMPLIED, STATUTORY, OR OTHERWISE), INCLUDING
ANY IMPLIED WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, OR NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT DOES JUNIPER
WARRANT THAT THE SOFTWARE, OR ANY EQUIPMENT OR NETWORK RUNNING THE SOFTWARE, WILL OPERATE WITHOUT ERROR OR INTERRUPTION,
OR WILL BE FREE OF VULNERABILITY TO INTRUSION OR ATTACK. In no event shall Juniper’s or its suppliers’ or licensors’ liability to Customer, whether
in contract, tort (including negligence), breach of warranty, or otherwise, exceed the price paid by Customer for the Software that gave rise to the claim, or
if the Software is embedded in another Juniper product, the price paid by Customer for such other product. Customer acknowledges and agrees that Juniper
has set its prices and entered into this Agreement in reliance upon the disclaimers of warranty and the limitations of liability set forth herein, that the same
reflect an allocation of risk between the Parties (including the risk that a contract remedy may fail of its essential purpose and cause consequential loss),
and that the same form an essential basis of the bargain between the Parties.
9. Termination. Any breach of this Agreement or failure by Customer to pay any applicable fees due shall result in automatic termination of the license
granted herein. Upon such termination, Customer shall destroy or return to Juniper all copies of the Software and related documentation in Customer’s
possession or control.
10. Taxes. All license fees for the Software are exclusive of taxes, withholdings, duties, or levies (collectively “Taxes”). Customer shall be responsible for
paying Taxes arising from the purchase of the license, or importation or use of the Software.
11. Export. Customer agrees to comply with all applicable export laws and restrictions and regulations of any United States and any applicable foreign
agency or authority, and not to export or re-export the Software or any direct product thereof in violation of any such restrictions, laws or regulations, or
without all necessary approvals. Customer shall be liable for any such violations. The version of the Software supplied to Customer may contain encryption
or other capabilities restricting Customer’s ability to export the Software without an export license.
12. Commercial Computer Software. The Software is “commercial computer software” and is provided with restricted rights. Use, duplication, or disclosure
by the United States government is subject to restrictions set forth in this Agreement and as provided in DFARS 227.7201 through 227.7202-4, FAR 12.212,
FAR 27.405(b)(2), FAR 52.227-19, or FAR 52.227-14(ALT III) as applicable.
13. Interface Information. To the extent required by applicable law, and at Customer's written request, Juniper shall provide Customer with the interface
information needed to achieve interoperability between the Software and another independently created program, on payment of applicable fee, if any.
Customer shall observe strict obligations of confidentiality with respect to such information and shall use such information in compliance with any applicable
terms and conditions upon which Juniper makes such information available.
14. Third Party Software. Any licensor of Juniper whose software is embedded in the Software and any supplier of Juniper whose products or technology
are embedded in (or services are accessed by) the Software shall be a third party beneficiary with respect to this Agreement, and such licensor or vendor
shall have the right to enforce this Agreement in its own name as if it were Juniper. In addition, certain third party software may be provided with the
Software and is subject to the accompanying license(s), if any, of its respective owner(s). To the extent portions of the Software are distributed under and
subject to open source licenses obligating Juniper to make the source code for such portions publicly available (such as the GNU General Public License
(“GPL”) or the GNU Library General Public License (“LGPL”)), Juniper will make such source code portions (including Juniper modifications, as appropriate)
available upon request for a period of up to three years from the date of distribution. Such request can be made in writing to Juniper Networks, Inc., 1194
N. Mathilda Ave., Sunnyvale, CA 94089, ATTN: General Counsel. You may obtain a copy of the GPL at http://www.gnu.org/licenses/gpl.html, and a copy of
the LGPL at http://www.gnu.org/licenses/lgpl.html.
15. Miscellaneous. This Agreement shall be governed by the laws of the State of California without reference to its conflicts of laws principles. The provisions
of the U.N. Convention for the International Sale of Goods shall not apply to this Agreement. For any disputes arising under this Agreement, the Parties
hereby consent to the personal and exclusive jurisdiction of, and venue in, the state and federal courts within Santa Clara County, California. This Agreement
constitutes the entire and sole agreement between Juniper and the Customer with respect to the Software, and supersedes all prior and contemporaneous
agreements relating to the Software, whether oral or written (including any inconsistent terms contained in a purchase order), except that the terms of a
separate written agreement executed by an authorized Juniper representative and Customer shall govern to the extent such terms are inconsistent or conflict
with terms contained herein. No modification to this Agreement nor any waiver of any rights hereunder shall be effective unless expressly assented to in
writing by the party to be charged. If any portion of this Agreement is held invalid, the Parties agree that such invalidity shall not affect the validity of the
remainder of this Agreement. This Agreement and associated documentation has been written in the English language, and the Parties agree that the English
version will govern. (For Canada: Les parties aux présentés confirment leur volonté que cette convention de même que tous les documents y compris tout
avis qui s'y rattaché, soient redigés en langue anglaise. (Translation: The parties confirm that this Agreement and all related documentation is and will be
in the English language)).

■

Abbreviated Table of Contents
About This Guide

Part 1

Services Router Overview
Chapter 1
Chapter 2
Chapter 3

Part 2

Overview of Services Routers
J-series Services Router Hardware Features
PIM Overview

3
7
35

Installing a Services Router
Chapter 4
Chapter 5
Chapter 6
Chapter 7

Part 3

Preparing for Router Installation
Installing and Connecting a Services Router
Establishing Basic Connectivity
Installing JUNOS Software with Enhanced Services

63
77
91
115

Maintaining Services Router Hardware
Chapter 8
Chapter 9
Chapter 10

Part 4

Replacing Hardware Components
Troubleshooting a Services Router
Contacting Customer Support and Returning Hardware

119
157
169

J-series Requirements and Specifications
Chapter 11
Chapter 12

Part 5

Network Cable Specifications and Connector Pinouts
Safety and Regulatory Compliance Information

179
197

Index
Index

241

Abbreviated Table of Contents

■

JUNOS Software with Enhanced Services Hardware Guide

■

Table of Contents
About This Guide

Objectives ......................................................................................................xv
Audience .......................................................................................................xv
Supported Routing Platforms ........................................................................xvi
How to Use This Manual ...............................................................................xvi
Document Conventions ..............................................................................xviii
JUNOS Software Documentation for J-series Services Routers and SRX-series
Services Gateways ...................................................................................xx
Documentation Feedback .............................................................................xxi
Requesting Technical Support ......................................................................xxii

Part 1

Services Router Overview

Chapter 1

Overview of Services Routers
J2320
J2350
J4350
J6350

Chapter 2

Services
Services
Services
Services

Router
Router
Router
Router

Overview
Overview
Overview
Overview

3
.....................................................................3
.....................................................................4
.....................................................................5
.....................................................................6

J-series Services Router Hardware Features

J2320 and J2350 Services Router Hardware Features ......................................7
J2320 and J2350 Chassis ...........................................................................8
J2320 and J2350 Midplane ......................................................................12
J2320 and J2350 Routing Engine Hardware ............................................12
J2320 and J2350 Boot Devices ................................................................12
J2320 and J2350 Front Panel ..................................................................13
Physical Interface Modules (PIMs) ....................................................14
Power Button and POWER LED ........................................................14
STATUS LED .....................................................................................15
ALARM LED ......................................................................................15
HA LED ............................................................................................16
RESET CONFIG Button .....................................................................16
Built-In Gigabit Ethernet Ports ..........................................................17
Console Port .....................................................................................17
AUX Port ..........................................................................................17
USB Port ...........................................................................................17

Table of Contents

■

vii

JUNOS Software with Enhanced Services Hardware Guide

J2320 and J2350 External Compact Flashes ............................................18
J2320 Power System ...............................................................................18
J2350 Power System ...............................................................................18
J2320 and J2350 Cooling System ............................................................19
J4350 and J6350 Services Router Hardware Features ....................................20
J4350 and J6350 Chassis .........................................................................21
J4350 and J6350 Midplane ......................................................................25
J4350 and J6350 Routing Engine Hardware ............................................25
J4350 and J6350 Boot Devices ................................................................25
J4350 and J6350 Front Panel ..................................................................26
Physical Interface Modules (PIMs) ....................................................26
Power Button and POWER LED ........................................................27
STATUS LED .....................................................................................27
ALARM LED ......................................................................................28
HA LED ............................................................................................29
RESET CONFIG Button .....................................................................29
Built-In Gigabit Ethernet Ports ..........................................................29
Console Port .....................................................................................30
AUX Port ..........................................................................................30
USB Port ...........................................................................................30
J4350 Power System ...............................................................................30
J6350 Power System ...............................................................................31
J4350 and J6350 Cooling System ............................................................32
Chapter 3

PIM Overview

PIM Terms .....................................................................................................35
Field-Replaceable PIMs ..................................................................................38
J2320 and J2350 Field-Replaceable PIM and Module Summary ..............38
J4350 and J6350 Field-Replaceable PIM Summary ..................................39
1-Port, 6-Port, 8-Port, and 16-Port Gigabit Ethernet uPIMs ......................41
1-Port Gigabit Ethernet ePIMs .................................................................44
Dual-Port Serial PIM ................................................................................47
Dual-Port T1 or E1 PIM ...........................................................................48
Dual-Port Channelized T1/E1/ISDN PRI PIM ............................................49
T3 or E3 PIM ...........................................................................................51
Dual-Port Fast Ethernet PIM ....................................................................53
4-Port Fast Ethernet ePIM .......................................................................54
4-Port ISDN BRI PIMs ..............................................................................55
ADSL PIM ................................................................................................56
G.SHDSL PIM ..........................................................................................58

viii

■

Table of Contents

Part 2

Installing a Services Router

Chapter 4

Preparing for Router Installation

General Site Guidelines ..................................................................................63
Rack Requirements .......................................................................................64
Rack Size and Strength for J2320 and J2350 Routers ..............................64
Rack Size and Strength for J4350 and J6350 Routers ..............................65
Connection to Building Structure ............................................................65
Router Environmental Tolerances .................................................................66
Fire Safety Requirements ..............................................................................66
Fire Suppression .....................................................................................66
Fire Suppression Equipment ...................................................................67
Power Guidelines, Requirements, and Specifications .....................................67
Site Electrical Wiring Guidelines ..............................................................68
Signaling Limitations ........................................................................68
Radio Frequency Interference ..........................................................68
Electromagnetic Compatibility .........................................................68
Router Power Requirements ...................................................................69
AC Power, Connection, and Power Cord Specifications ..........................69
DC Power, Connection, and Power Cable Specifications .........................71
Planning for Power Management ............................................................72
Network Cable Specifications ........................................................................74
ISDN Provisioning .........................................................................................74
Site Preparation Checklist ..............................................................................75
Chapter 5

Installing and Connecting a Services Router

Before You Begin ...........................................................................................77
Unpacking a J-series Services Router .............................................................78
Installing J2320 and J2350 Routers ...............................................................79
Installing J4350 and J6350 Routers ...............................................................80
Connecting Interface Cables to Services Routers ...........................................83
Chassis Grounding .........................................................................................83
Connecting Power .........................................................................................84
Connecting AC Power .............................................................................84
Connecting DC Power .............................................................................86
Powering a Services Router On and Off ........................................................89
Chapter 6

Establishing Basic Connectivity

Basic Connectivity Terms ..............................................................................91
Basic Connectivity Overview .........................................................................92
Router Identification ...............................................................................92
Root Password ........................................................................................92
Time Zone and System Time ..................................................................93
Network Settings .....................................................................................93
Default Gateway .....................................................................................93
Backup Router ........................................................................................94

Table of Contents

■

JUNOS Software with Enhanced Services Hardware Guide

Loopback Address ...................................................................................94
Built-In Ethernet Interface Address .........................................................94
Management Access ...............................................................................95
Before You Begin ...........................................................................................95
Connecting to a Services Router ....................................................................96
Connecting to the J-Web Interface ..........................................................97
Connecting to the CLI Locally ..................................................................98
Connecting to the CLI Remotely ...........................................................100
Configuring the Modem at the Router End .....................................101
Connecting the Modem to the Console Port ...................................102
Connecting to the CLI at the User End ............................................102
Configuring Basic Settings with J-Web Quick Configuration .........................103
Configuring Basic Settings Using the CLI Configuration Wizard ...................106
About the CLI Configuration Wizard .....................................................106
Using the JUNOS Software with Enhanced Services Configuration
Wizard ...........................................................................................107
Configuring Basic Settings with a Configuration Editor ................................110
Verifying Basic Connectivity and the Configuration .....................................113
Displaying Basic Connectivity Configurations .......................................114
Chapter 7

Installing JUNOS Software with Enhanced Services

Part 3

Maintaining Services Router Hardware

Chapter 8

Replacing Hardware Components

115

119

Tools and Parts Required ............................................................................119
Replacing the Console Port Cable ................................................................120
Replacing a PIM ..........................................................................................120
Removing a PIM ...................................................................................120
Installing a PIM .....................................................................................122
Replacing PIM Cables ..................................................................................123
Removing PIM Cables ...........................................................................123
Installing PIM Cables .............................................................................123
Removing and Replacing the Chassis Cover on J2320 and J2350 Routers ....124
Replacing Internal Compact Flashes on J2320 and J2350 Routers ...............126
Replacing Internal Compact Flashes on J4350 and J6350 Routers ...............129
Replacing External Compact Flashes ...........................................................132
Replacing USB Storage Devices ...................................................................134
Removing the USB Storage Device ........................................................134
Installing the USB Storage Device .........................................................135
Replacing DRAM Modules ...........................................................................136
Removing a DRAM Module ...................................................................137
Installing a DRAM Module .....................................................................138
Replacing Power System Components ........................................................139
Replacing AC Power Supply Cords ........................................................139
Removing an AC Power Supply from J6350 Routers .............................140
Installing an AC Power Supply in J6350 Routers ...................................141

■

Table of Contents

Replacing DC Power Supply Cables .......................................................142
Removing a DC Power Supply ..............................................................143
Installing a DC Power Supply ................................................................144
Replacing Crypto Accelerator Modules on J2320 and J2350 Routers ...........146
Removing a J2320 or J2350 Crypto Accelerator Module ........................147
Installing a J2320 or J2350 Crypto Accelerator Module .........................148
Replacing Crypto Accelerator Modules on J4350 and J6350 Routers ...........149
Removing a J4350 or J6350 Crypto Accelerator Module ........................150
Installing a J4350 or J6350 Crypto Accelerator Module .........................152
Replacing Air Filters on J2350 Routers ........................................................153
Replacing Air Filters on J4350 and J6350 Routers .......................................154
Chapter 9

Troubleshooting a Services Router

157

Troubleshooting Hardware Components .....................................................157
Monitoring and Correcting Chassis Alarm Conditions ...........................157
Troubleshooting Power Management ....................................................159
Resetting the Configuration File When the Router Is Inaccessible ................160
Using the RESET CONFIG Button ..........................................................160
Changing the RESET CONFIG Button Behavior ......................................161
Recovering the Root Password ....................................................................161
Recovering Primary Boot Devices ...............................................................164
Why Compact Flash Recovery Might Be Necessary ...............................164
Recommended Recovery Hardware and Software ................................164
Configuring Internal Compact Flash Recovery ......................................165
Contacting the Juniper Networks Technical Assistance Center .....................167
Chapter 10

Contacting Customer Support and Returning Hardware

169

Locating Component Serial Numbers ..........................................................169
J2320 and J2350 Chassis Serial Number and Agency Labels .................170
J4350 and J6350 Chassis Serial Number and Agency Labels .................171
PIM Serial Number Label ......................................................................172
Power Supply Serial Number Labels ......................................................172
Contacting Customer Support ......................................................................172
Information You Might Need to Supply to JTAC ....................................172
Return Procedure ........................................................................................172
Packing a Router or Component for Shipment ............................................173
Tools and Parts Required ......................................................................173
Packing the Services Router for Shipment ............................................174
Packing Components for Shipment .......................................................174

Table of Contents

■

JUNOS Software with Enhanced Services Hardware Guide

Part 4

J-series Requirements and Specifications

Chapter 11

Network Cable Specifications and Connector Pinouts

179

Serial PIM Cable Specifications ....................................................................179
RS-232 DTE Cable Pinout ......................................................................180
RS-232 DCE Cable Pinout .....................................................................181
RS-422/449 (EIA-449) DTE Cable Pinout ...............................................181
RS-422/449 (EIA-449) DCE Cable Pinout ...............................................183
EIA-530A DTE Cable Pinout ..................................................................184
EIA-530A DCE Cable Pinout ..................................................................185
V.35 DTE Cable Pinout ..........................................................................186
V.35 DCE Cable Pinout .........................................................................187
X.21 DTE Cable Pinout .........................................................................187
X.21 DCE Cable Pinout .........................................................................188
Fast Ethernet RJ-45 Connector Pinout .........................................................189
Gigabit Ethernet uPIM RJ-45 Connector Pinout ............................................189
Gigabit Ethernet ePIM RJ-45 Connector Pinout ............................................190
Chassis Console Port Pinouts .......................................................................190
E1 and T1 RJ-48 Cable Pinouts ....................................................................191
E3 and T3 BNC Connector Pinout ................................................................194
ADSL and G.SHDSL RJ-11 Connector Pinout ................................................194
ISDN RJ-45 Connector Pinout ......................................................................195
Chapter 12

Safety and Regulatory Compliance Information

197

Definition of Safety Warning Levels ............................................................197
Safety Guidelines and Warnings ..................................................................199
General Safety Guidelines and Warnings ...............................................199
Qualified Personnel Warning ..........................................................200
Preventing Electrostatic Discharge Damage ...................................201
Electrical Safety Guidelines and Warnings ............................................201
General Electrical Safety Guidelines ................................................202
AC Power Electrical Safety Guidelines ............................................203
DC Power Electrical Safety Guidelines ............................................204
Power Sources for Redundant Power Supplies ...............................205
DC Power Disconnection Warning .................................................205
DC Power Grounding Requirements and Warning ..........................206
DC Power Wiring Sequence Warning .............................................207
DC Power Wiring Terminations Warning .......................................209
Grounded Equipment Warning .......................................................210
Warning Statement for Norway and Sweden ..................................211
In Case of Electrical Accident .........................................................211
Multiple Power Supplies Disconnection Warning ............................211
Power Disconnection Warning .......................................................213
TN Power Warning .........................................................................214
Telecommunication Line Cord Warning .........................................215

xii

■

Table of Contents

Installation Safety Guidelines and Warnings .........................................216
Chassis Lifting Guidelines ...............................................................216
Installation Instructions Warning ....................................................216
Rack-Mounting Requirements and Warnings ..................................217
Ramp Warning ...............................................................................221
Laser and LED Safety Guidelines and Warnings ....................................221
General Laser Safety Guidelines ......................................................222
Class 1 Laser Product Warning .......................................................222
Class 1 LED Product Warning .........................................................222
Laser Beam Warning ......................................................................223
Radiation from Open Port Apertures Warning ................................224
Maintenance and Operational Safety Guidelines and Warnings ............225
Battery Handling Warning ..............................................................226
Jewelry Removal Warning ..............................................................227
Lightning Activity Warning .............................................................228
Operating Temperature Warning ....................................................229
Product Disposal Warning ..............................................................231
Agency Approvals ........................................................................................232
Compliance Statements for Environmental Requirements ..........................233
Lithium Battery .....................................................................................233
Compliance Statements for EMC Requirements ..........................................233
Canada .................................................................................................233
European Community ...........................................................................235
Japan ....................................................................................................236
United States ........................................................................................237
FCC Part 15 Statement ...................................................................237
FCC Part 68 Statement ...................................................................237

Part 5

Index
Index ...........................................................................................................241

Table of Contents

■

xiii

JUNOS Software with Enhanced Services Hardware Guide

xiv

■

Table of Contents

About This Guide
This preface provides the following guidelines for using the JUNOS Software with
Enhanced Services Hardware Guide:
■

Objectives on page xv

■

Audience on page xv

■

Supported Routing Platforms on page xvi

■

How to Use This Manual on page xvi

■

Document Conventions on page xviii

■

JUNOS Software Documentation for J-series Services Routers and SRX-series
Services Gateways on page xx

■

Documentation Feedback on page xxi

■

Requesting Technical Support on page xxii

Objectives
This guide contains an overview, basic instructions, and specifications for J2320,
J2350, J4350, and J6350 Services Routers running JUNOS software with enhanced
services. It explains how to prepare your site for installation, unpack and install
J-series Services Router and its components, power on the router, and establish basic
connectivity.

NOTE: This manual documents Release 9.2 of JUNOS software. For additional
information—either corrections to or information that might have been omitted from
this manual—see the JUNOS Software with Enhanced Services Release Notes or JUNOS
Software for SRX-series Services Gateways Release Notes at http://www.juniper.net.

Audience
This manual is designed for anyone who installs, sets up, configures, monitors, or
administers a J-series Services Router running JUNOS software with enhanced services
or an SRX-series services gateway running JUNOS software. The manual is intended
for the following audiences:
■

Customers with technical knowledge of and experience with networks and
network security, the Internet, and Internet routing protocols

■

Network administrators who install, configure, and manage Internet routers

Objectives

■

JUNOS Software with Enhanced Services Hardware Guide

Personnel operating the equipment must be trained and competent; must not conduct
themselves in a careless, willfully negligent, or hostile manner; and must abide by
the instructions provided by the documentation.

Supported Routing Platforms
This manual describes features supported on J-series Services Routers running JUNOS
software with enhanced services and SRX-series services gateways running JUNOS
software.

How to Use This Manual
This manual and the other manuals in this set explain how to install, configure, and
manage:
■

JUNOS software with enhanced services for J-series Services Routers

■

JUNOS software for SRX-series services gateways

Table 1 on page xvi identifies the tasks required to configure and manage these
devices and shows where to find task information and instructions.
For an annotated list of the documentation referred to in Table 1 on page xvi, see
“JUNOS Software Documentation for J-series Services Routers and SRX-series Services
Gateways” on page xx. All documents are available at http://www.juniper.net/techpubs/.
Table 1: Tasks and Related Documentation
Task

Related Documentation

■

Administering user authentication and access

■

Monitoring the device, routing protocols, and routing
operations

JUNOS Software Administration Guide

■

Configuring and monitoring system alarms and events,
real-time performance (RPM) probes, and performance

■

Monitoring the firewall and other security-related services

■

Managing system log files

■

Upgrading software

■

Diagnosing common problems

User Interfaces
■

Understanding and using the J-Web interface

■

Understanding and using the CLI configuration editor

■

JUNOS Software with Enhanced Services Quick Start
(J-series Services Routers only)

■

JUNOS Software Administration Guide

Document Conventions
Table 2 on page xviii defines the notice icons used in this guide.
Table 2: Notice Icons
Icon

Meaning

Description

Informational note

Indicates important features or instructions.

Caution

Indicates a situation that might result in loss of data or hardware damage.

Warning

Alerts you to the risk of personal injury or death.

Laser warning

Alerts you to the risk of personal injury from a laser.

Table 3 on page xviii defines the text and syntax conventions used in this guide.
Table 3: Text and Syntax Conventions
Convention

Description

Examples

Bold text like this

Represents text that you type.

To enter configuration mode, type the
configure command:
user@host> configure

xviii

■

Document Conventions

About This Guide

Table 3: Text and Syntax Conventions (continued)
Convention

Description

Examples

Fixed-width text like this

Represents output that appears on the
terminal screen.

user@host> show chassis alarms
No alarms currently active

Italic text like this

■

Introduces important new terms.

■

Identifies book names.

■

Identifies RFC and Internet draft
titles.

■

A policy term is a named structure
that defines match conditions and
actions.

■

JUNOS System Basics Configuration
Guide

■

RFC 1997, BGP Communities
Attribute

Represents variables (options for which
you substitute a value) in commands or
configuration statements.

Configure the machine’s domain name:

Represents names of configuration
statements, commands, files, and
directories; IP addresses; configuration
hierarchy levels; or labels on routing
platform components.

■

< > (angle brackets)

Enclose optional keywords or variables.

stub ;

| (pipe symbol)

Indicates a choice between the mutually
exclusive keywords or variables on either
side of the symbol. The set of choices is
often enclosed in parentheses for clarity.

broadcast | multicast

# (pound sign)

Indicates a comment specified on the
same line as the configuration statement
to which it applies.

rsvp { # Required for dynamic MPLS only

[ ] (square brackets)

Enclose a variable for which you can
substitute one or more values.

community name members [
community-ids ]

Indention and braces ( { } )

Identify a level in the configuration
hierarchy.

; (semicolon)

Identifies a leaf statement at a
configuration hierarchy level.

Italic text like this

Plain text like this

[edit]
root@# set system domain-name
domain-name
To configure a stub area, include
the stub statement at the [edit
protocols ospf area area-id]

hierarchy level.
■

The console port is labeled
CONSOLE.

(string1 | string2 | string3)

[edit]
routing-options {
static {
route default {
nexthop address;
retain;
}
}
}

J-Web GUI Conventions

Bold text like this

Represents J-Web graphical user
interface (GUI) items you click or select.

■

In the Logical Interfaces box, select
All Interfaces.

■

To cancel the configuration, click
Cancel.

Document Conventions

■

xix

JUNOS Software with Enhanced Services Hardware Guide

Table 3: Text and Syntax Conventions (continued)
Convention

Description

Examples

> (bold right angle bracket)

Separates levels in a hierarchy of J-Web
selections.

In the configuration editor hierarchy,
select Protocols>Ospf.

JUNOS Software Documentation for J-series Services Routers and SRX-series
Services Gateways
Table 4 on page xx lists the software manuals and release notes for J-series Services
Routers running JUNOS software with enhanced services and SRX-series services
gateways running JUNOS software.
All documents are available at http://www.juniper.net/techpubs/.
Table 4: JUNOS Software Documentation for J-series Services Routers and SRX-series Services
Gateways
Book

Description

All Platforms

■

JUNOS Software Interfaces and Routing
Configuration Guide

Explains how to configure J-series and SRX-series interfaces
for basic IP routing with standard routing protocols, ISDN
service, firewall filters (access control lists), and
class-of-service (CoS) traffic classification.

JUNOS Software Security Configuration Guide

Explains how to configure and manage J-series and
SRX-series security services such as stateful firewall policies,
IPsec VPNs, firewall screens, Network Address Translation
(NAT), Public Key Cryptography, chassis clusters, Application
Layer Gateways (ALGs), and Intrusion Detection and
Prevention (IDP).

JUNOS Software Administration Guide

Shows how to monitor J-series and SRX-series devices and
routing operations, firewall and security services, system
alarms and events, and network performance. This guide
also shows how to administer user authentication and access,
upgrade software, and diagnose common problems.

JUNOS Software CLI Reference

Provides the complete configuration hierarchy available on
J-series and SRX-series devices. This guide also describes
the configuration statements and operational mode
commands unique to these devices.

JUNOS Network Management Configuration Guide

Describes enterprise-specific MIBs for JUNOS software. The
information in this guide is applicable to M-series, T-series,
EX-series, J-series, and SRX-series devices.

JUNOS System Log Messages Reference

Describes how to access and interpret system log messages
generated by JUNOS software modules and provides a
reference page for each message. The information in this
guide is applicable to M-series, T-series, EX-series, J-series,
and SRX-series devices.

JUNOS Software Documentation for J-series Services Routers and SRX-series Services Gateways

About This Guide

Table 4: JUNOS Software Documentation for J-series Services Routers and SRX-series Services
Gateways (continued)
Book

Description

J-series Services Routers Only

JUNOS Software with Enhanced Services Design
and Implementation Guide

Provides guidelines and examples for designing and
implementing IPsec VPNs, firewalls, and routing on J-series
Services Routers running JUNOS software with enhanced
services.

JUNOS Software with Enhanced Services Quick
Start

Explains how to quickly set up a J-series Services Router.
This document contains router declarations of conformity.

JUNOS Software with Enhanced Services
Hardware Guide

Provides an overview, basic instructions, and specifications
for J-series Services Routers. This guide explains how to
prepare a site, unpack and install the router, replace router
hardware, and establish basic router connectivity. This guide
contains hardware descriptions and specifications.

JUNOS Software with Enhanced Services
Migration Guide

Provides instructions for migrating an SSG device running
ScreenOS software or a J-series Services Router running the
JUNOS software to JUNOS software with enhanced services.

WXC Integrated Services Module Installation and
Configuration Guide

Explains how to install and initially configure a WXC
Integrated Services Module in a J-series Services Router for
application acceleration.

JUNOS Software with Enhanced Services Release
Notes

Summarizes new features and known problems for a
particular release of JUNOS software with enhanced services
on J-series Services Routers, including J-Web interface
features and problems. The release notes also contain
corrections and updates to the manuals and software
upgrade and downgrade instructions for JUNOS software
with enhanced services.

SRX-series Services Gateways Only

JUNOS Software for SRX-series Services Gateway
Release Notes

Summarizes new features and known problems for a
particular release of JUNOS software on SRX-series services
gateways, including J-Web interface features and problems.
The release notes also contain corrections and updates to
the manuals and software upgrade and downgrade.

Documentation Feedback
We encourage you to provide feedback, comments, and suggestions so that we can
improve the documentation. You can send your comments to
techpubs-comments@juniper.net, or fill out the documentation feedback form at
http://www.juniper.net/techpubs/docbug/docbugreport.html. If you are using e-mail, be sure
to include the following information with your comments:
■

Document name

■

Document part number

Documentation Feedback

■

xxi

JUNOS Software with Enhanced Services Hardware Guide

■

Page number

■

Software release version (not required for Network Operations Guides [NOGs])

Requesting Technical Support
Technical product support is available through the Juniper Networks Technical
Assistance Center (JTAC). If you are a customer with an active J-Care or JNASC support
contract, or are covered under warranty, and need postsales technical support, you
can access our tools and resources online or open a case with JTAC.
■

JTAC policies—For a complete understanding of our JTAC procedures and policies,
review the JTAC User Guide located at
http://www.juniper.net/customers/support/downloads/710059.pdf.

■

Product warranties—For product warranty information, visit
http://www.juniper.net/support/warranty/.

■

JTAC Hours of Operation —The JTAC centers have resources available 24 hours
a day, 7 days a week, 365 days a year.

Self-Help Online Tools and Resources
For quick and easy problem resolution, Juniper Networks has designed an online
self-service portal called the Customer Support Center (CSC) that provides you with
the following features:
■

Find CSC offerings: http://www.juniper.net/customers/support/

■

Search for known bugs: http://www2.juniper.net/kb/

■

Find product documentation: http://www.juniper.net/techpubs/

■

Find solutions and answer questions using our Knowledge Base:
http://kb.juniper.net/

■

Download the latest versions of software and review release notes:
http://www.juniper.net/customers/csc/software/

■

Search technical bulletins for relevant hardware and software notifications:
https://www.juniper.net/alerts/

■

Join and participate in the Juniper Networks Community Forum:
http://www.juniper.net/company/communities/

■

Open a case online in the CSC Case Manager: http://www.juniper.net/cm/

To verify service entitlement by product serial number, use our Serial Number
Entitlement (SNE) Tool located at https://tools.juniper.net/SerialNumberEntitlementSearch/.
Opening a Case with JTAC
You can open a case with JTAC on the Web or by telephone.

xxii

■

Use the Case Manager tool in the CSC at http://www.juniper.net/cm/ .

■

Call 1-888-314-JTAC (1-888-314-5822 toll-free in the USA, Canada, and Mexico).

Requesting Technical Support

About This Guide

For international or direct-dial options in countries without toll-free numbers, visit
us at http://www.juniper.net/support/requesting-support.html.

Requesting Technical Support

■

xxiii

JUNOS Software with Enhanced Services Hardware Guide

xxiv

■

Requesting Technical Support

Part 1

Services Router Overview
■

Overview of Services Routers on page 3

■

J-series Services Router Hardware Features on page 7

■

PIM Overview on page 35

Services Router Overview

■

JUNOS Software with Enhanced Services Hardware Guide

■

Services Router Overview

Chapter 1

Overview of Services Routers
J-series Services Routers running JUNOS software with enhanced services provide
stable, reliable, and efficient IP routing, WAN and LAN connectivity, and management
services for small to medium-sized enterprise networks. These routers also provide
network security features, including a stateful firewall with access control policies
and screens to protect against attacks and intrusions, and IPSec VPNs. J-series Services
Routers securely connect small, branch, and regional offices to a central site router
across Internet service provider (ISP) networks.
J-series Services Routers run JUNOS software with enhanced services, which offers
many advanced routing and security services.
You can use two user interfaces to monitor, configure, troubleshoot, and manage a
Services Router:
■

J-Web interface—A Web-based graphical interface that allows you to operate a
router without commands. The J-Web interface provides access to all JUNOS
functionality and features. Quick Configuration wizards simplify basic
configuration and minimize the risk of operator error.

■

JUNOS command-line interface—A Juniper Networks command shell that runs
on top of a UNIX-based operating system kernel. The CLI is a straightforward
command interface. On a single line, you type commands that are executed
when you press the Enter key. The CLI provides command Help and command
completion.

For an introduction to the J-Web and CLI interfaces, see the JUNOS Software
Administration Guide. For more information, see the J-Web Interface User Guide and
the JUNOS CLI User Guide
This chapter contains the following topics:
■

J2320 Services Router Overview on page 3

■

J2350 Services Router Overview on page 4

■

J4350 Services Router Overview on page 5

■

J6350 Services Router Overview on page 6

J2320 Services Router Overview
The J2320 Services Router is primarily designed for remote and branch offices. It
has a small chassis that is 1 U (rack unit) in size with a nonredundant AC power

J2320 Services Router Overview

■

JUNOS Software with Enhanced Services Hardware Guide

supply, an external compact flash and two universal serial bus (USB) ports for external
storage, and an optional Crypto Accelerator Module.
J2320 routers ordered with the optional Crypto Accelerator Module come standard
with 1 GB of memory, while those ordered without the Crypto Accelerator Module
come standard with 256 MB of memory. The memory on J2320 routers can be
upgraded to 1 GB. For instructions on upgrading memory, see “Replacing DRAM
Modules” on page 136.
Each J2320 chassis contains four built-in Gigabit Ethernet ports with link speeds of
10/100/1000 Mbps over a copper interface. The chassis also contains three slots for
field-replaceable Physical Interface Modules.
The J2320 Services Router supports the following field-replaceable PIMs:
■

Gigabit Ethernet uPIM (1-port, 6-port, 8-port, and 16-port)

■

Dual-Port Serial PIM

■

Dual-Port E1 PIM

■

Dual-Port T1 PIM

■

Dual-Port Channelized T1/E1/ISDN PRI PIM

■

4-port ISDN BRI S/T or U PIM

■

ADSL 2/2+ Annex A PIM (1 port)

■

ADSL 2/2+ Annex B PIM (1 port)

■

G.SHDSL PIM (2 ports)

J2350 Services Router Overview
The J2350 Services Router is primarily designed for branch offices. It has a chassis
that is 1.5 U (rack unit) in size with a nonredundant AC or DC power supply, an
external compact flash and two universal serial bus (USB) ports for external storage,
and an optional Crypto Accelerator Module.
J2350 routers ordered with the optional Crypto Accelerator Module come standard
with 1 GB of memory, while those ordered without the Crypto Accelerator Module
come standard with 256 MB of memory. The memory on J2350 routers can be
upgraded to 1 GB. For instructions on upgrading memory, see “Replacing DRAM
Modules” on page 136.
Each J2350 chassis contains four built-in Gigabit Ethernet ports with link speeds of
10/100/1000 Mbps over a copper interface. The chassis also contains five slots for
field-replaceable Physical Interface Modules (PIMs).
The J2350 Services Router supports the following field-replaceable PIMs and modules:

■

Gigabit Ethernet uPIM (1–port, 6-port, 8-port, and 16-port)

■

Dual-Port Serial PIM

■

Dual-Port E1 PIM

J2350 Services Router Overview

Chapter 1: Overview of Services Routers

■

Dual-Port T1 PIM

■

Dual-Port Channelized T1/E1/ISDN PRI PIM

■

4-port ISDN BRI S/T or U PIM

■

ADSL 2/2+ Annex A PIM (1 port)

■

ADSL 2/2+ Annex B PIM (1 port)

■

G.SHDSL PIM (2 ports)

■

WXC Integrated Services Module

J4350 Services Router Overview
The J4350 Services Router is designed primarily for regional and branch offices. It
has a chassis that is 2 U (rack units) in size with a nonredundant AC or DC power
supply, and a universal serial bus (USB) port for external storage.
J4350 routers ordered with the optional Crypto Accelerator Module come standard
with 1 GB of memory, while those ordered without the Crypto Accelerator Module
come standard with 256 MB of memory. J4350 routers can contain between 256
MB and 2 GB of memory. For instructions on adding memory, see “Replacing DRAM
Modules” on page 136.
Each J4350 chassis contains four built-in Gigabit Ethernet ports with link speeds of
10/100/1000 Mbps over a copper interface, and six slots for field-replaceable Physical
Interface Modules (PIMs). Two of the six slots (slots 3 and 6) support high-speed
interfaces (ePIMs).
The J4350 Services Router supports the following field-replaceable PIMs and modules:
■

Gigabit Ethernet uPIM (1-port, 6-port, 8-port, and 16-port)

■

SFP Gigabit Ethernet ePIM (1 port)

■

Copper Gigabit Ethernet ePIM (1 port)

■

Dual-Port Serial PIM

■

Dual-Port E1 PIM

■

Dual-Port T1 PIM

■

Dual-Port Channelized T1/E1/ISDN PRI PIM

■

E3 PIM (1 port)

■

DS3 (T3) PIM (1 port)

■

Dual-Port Fast Ethernet PIM

■

4-port Fast Ethernet ePIM

■

4-port ISDN BRI S/T or U PIM

■

ADSL 2/2+ Annex A PIM (1 port)

■

ADSL 2/2+ Annex B PIM (1 port)

J4350 Services Router Overview

■

JUNOS Software with Enhanced Services Hardware Guide

■

G.SHDSL PIM (2 ports)

■

WXC Integrated Services Module

J6350 Services Router Overview
The J6350 Services Router is designed primarily for regional and central offices. It
has a chassis that is 2 U (rack units) in size with an optional redundant AC or DC
power supply, up to 2 GB of memory, and two universal serial bus (USB) ports for
external storage. The J6350 Services Router is a higher-performance system than
the J4350 Services Router.
J6350 routers come standard with 1 GB of memory and can be upgraded to 2 GB of
memory. For instructions on adding memory, see “Replacing DRAM
Modules” on page 136.
Each J6350 chassis contains four built-in Gigabit Ethernet ports with link speeds of
10/100/1000 Mbps over a copper interface, and six slots for field-replaceable Physical
Interface Modules (PIMs). Four of the six slots (slots 2, 3, 5, and 6) support high-speed
interfaces (ePIMs).
The J6350 Services Router supports the following field-replaceable PIMs and modules:

■

Gigabit Ethernet uPIM (1–port, 6-port, 8-port, and 16-port)

■

SFP Gigabit Ethernet ePIM (1 port)

■

Copper Gigabit Ethernet ePIM (1 port)

■

Dual-Port E1 PIM

■

Dual-Port T1 PIM

■

E3 PIM (1 port)

■

DS3 (T3) PIM (1 port)

■

Dual-Port Fast Ethernet PIM

■

Dual-Port Channelized T1/E1/ISDN PRI PIM

■

4-port Fast Ethernet ePIM

■

4-port ISDN BRI S/T or U PIM

■

Dual-Port Serial PIM

■

ADSL 2/2+ Annex A PIM (1 port)

■

ADSL 2/2+ Annex B PIM (1 port)

■

G.SHDSL PIM (2 ports)

■

WXC Integrated Services Module

J6350 Services Router Overview

Chapter 2

J-series Services Router Hardware
Features
J-series Services Routers running JUNOS software with enhanced services have chassis
that are similar but with important differences. J2320, J2350, and J4350 routers have
a single nonredundant power supply and an optional Crypto Accelerator Module.
J6350 routers have redundant power supplies and a standard Crypto Accelerator
Module.
For field-replaceable PIMs, the J2320 has three slots, the J2350 has five slots, and
the J4350 and J6350 have six slots. Of the six slots, two on the J4350 and four on
the J6350 are enhanced (high-speed) slots.
All J-series routers run JUNOS software with enhanced services, which offers advanced
routing and security features.
This chapter contains the following topics:
■

J2320 and J2350 Services Router Hardware Features on page 7

■

J4350 and J6350 Services Router Hardware Features on page 20

J2320 and J2350 Services Router Hardware Features
This section contains the following topics:
■

J2320 and J2350 Chassis on page 8

■

J2320 and J2350 Midplane on page 12

■

J2320 and J2350 Routing Engine Hardware on page 12

■

J2320 and J2350 Boot Devices on page 12

■

J2320 and J2350 Front Panel on page 13

■

J2320 and J2350 External Compact Flashes on page 18

■

J2320 Power System on page 18

■

J2350 Power System on page 18

■

J2320 and J2350 Cooling System on page 19

J2320 and J2350 Services Router Hardware Features

■

JUNOS Software with Enhanced Services Hardware Guide

J2320 and J2350 Chassis
The J2320 and J2350 chassis is a rigid sheet metal structure that houses all the other
router components (see Figure 1 on page 8 through Figure 7 on page 11). The
chassis can be installed in many types of racks or cabinets. For information about
acceptable rack types, see “Rack Requirements” on page 64.
In addition to the components described in subsequent sections, the chassis includes
the following components:
■

Mounting brackets—One pair of metal brackets can be mounted at the front or
center of the chassis for mounting the chassis in a rack or cabinet.

■

Earthing terminal—A protective earthing terminal and a PEM nut at the rear of
the chassis ensure safe dissipation of static electricity in all situations.

■

ESD point—One electrostatic discharge (ESD) point, a banana plug receptacle at
the front of the chassis, minimizes the risk of electrical discharge in potentially
hazardous environments.

CAUTION: Before removing or installing components of a functioning router, attach
an ESD strap to an ESD point and place the other end of the strap around your bare
wrist. Failure to use an ESD strap could result in damage to the router.
The router must be connected to earth ground during normal operation. The protective
earthing terminal on the rear of the chassis is provided to connect the router to
ground (see Figure 3 on page 9). Additional grounding is provided to an AC-powered
router when you plug its power supply into a grounded AC power receptacle.
For additional safety information, see “Safety and Regulatory Compliance
Information” on page 197.

Figure 1: Front of J2320 Chassis

■

J2320 and J2350 Services Router Hardware Features

Chapter 2: J-series Services Router Hardware Features

Figure 2: Front of J2350 Chassis

Figure 3: Rear of J2320 Chassis

Figure 4: Rear of J2350 AC-Powered Chassis

J2320 and J2350 Services Router Hardware Features

■

JUNOS Software with Enhanced Services Hardware Guide

Figure 5: Rear of J2350 DC-Powered Chassis

Figure 6: J2320 Hardware Components

■

J2320 and J2350 Services Router Hardware Features

Chapter 2: J-series Services Router Hardware Features

Figure 7: J2350 Hardware Components

Table 5 on page 11 summarizes the physical specifications for the router chassis.
Table 5: J2320 and J2350 Physical Specifications
Description

Value

Chassis dimensions

■

Router weight

■

J2320 Services Router
■

1.75 in. (4.45 cm) high

■

17.51 in. (44.48 cm) wide—18.9 in. (48.01 cm) wide with mounting brackets attached

■

15.1 in. (38.35 cm) deep—plus 0.78 in. (1.98 cm) of hardware that protrudes from the
chassis front

J2350 Services Router
■

2.61 in. (6.63 cm) high

■

17.51 in. (44.48 cm) wide—18.9 in. (48.01 cm) wide with mounting brackets attached

■

15.1 in. (38.35 cm) deep—plus 0.78 in. (1.98 cm) of hardware that protrudes from the
chassis front

J2320 Services Router
■

Minimum (no PIMs): 14.8 lbs (6.7 kg)

■

Maximum (three PIMs): 15.9 lbs (7.2 kg)

J2350 Services Router
■

Minimum (no PIMs): 16.3 lbs (7.4 kg)

■

Maximum (five PIMs): 18.2 lbs (8.3 kg)

J2320 and J2350 Services Router Hardware Features

■

JUNOS Software with Enhanced Services Hardware Guide

J2320 and J2350 Midplane
The J2320 and J2350 midplane is located in the center of the chassis and forms the
rear of the PIM card cage (see Figure 6 on page 10 and Figure 7 on page 11). You
install the PIMs into the midplane from the front of the chassis. Data packets are
transferred across the midplane from the PIM to the Routing Engine, and from the
Routing Engine across the midplane to the destination PIM.

J2320 and J2350 Routing Engine Hardware
The Routing Engine consists of the following components:
■

Processor—Creates the packet forwarding switch fabric for the router and runs
JUNOS software to maintain the router's routing tables and routing protocols.

■

DRAM—Buffers incoming packets and provides storage for the routing and
forwarding tables and for other Routing Engine processes.
To view the amount of DRAM installed on your router, issue the show chassis
routing-engine command.

■

EPROM—Stores the serial number of the Routing Engine.
To view the serial number of the Routing Engine, issue either the show chassis
routing-engine command or the show chassis hardware command.

■

Crypto Accelerator Module—Processor card that enhances performance of
cryptographic algorithms used in IP security (IPSec) services. The cryptographic
algorithms supported include Advanced Encryption Standard (AES), Data
Encryption Standard (DES), triple DES (3DES), Hashed Message Authentication
Code-Message Digest 5 (HMAC-MD5), and HMAC-Secure Hash Algorithm 1
(SHA-1). The Crypto Module is an optional feature of J2320 and J2350 Services
Routers.
To determine whether there is a Crypto Accelerator Module installed on your
router, issue the show chassis hardware command.

■

Compact flash—Provides primary storage for software images, configuration
files, and microcode. J-series routers have a primary or internal compact flash
located on the system board. For information about replacing the internal
compact flash, see “Replacing Internal Compact Flashes on J2320 and J2350
Routers” on page 126.
J2320 and J2350 Services Routers also provide a slot in the rear of the chassis
into which you can insert an additional external compact flash. For information
about external compact flashes, see “J2320 and J2350 External Compact
Flashes” on page 18.

J2320 and J2350 Boot Devices
J2320 and J2350 Services Routers can boot from three devices:

■

Internal compact flash

■

External compact flash (also known as the removable compact flash)

J2320 and J2350 Services Router Hardware Features

Chapter 2: J-series Services Router Hardware Features

■

USB storage device

Normally, a J2320 or J2350 Services Router boots from the internal compact flash.
If the internal compact flash fails, the router attempts to boot from the external
compact flash if it is installed. If the external compact flash is not present or fails,
the router attempts to boot from the USB storage device.

J2320 and J2350 Front Panel
The front panel of a J2320 or J2350 Services Router (see Figure 8 on page 13 and
Figure 9 on page 13) allows you to install or remove PIMs, view router status LEDs,
access the console port, and perform simple control functions.
Figure 8: Front of J2320 Chassis

Figure 9: Front of J2350 Chassis

The components of the front panel, are described in the following sections:
■

Physical Interface Modules (PIMs) on page 14

■

Power Button and POWER LED on page 14

■

STATUS LED on page 15

■

ALARM LED on page 15

■

HA LED on page 16

■

RESET CONFIG Button on page 16

■

Built-In Gigabit Ethernet Ports on page 17

J2320 and J2350 Services Router Hardware Features

■

JUNOS Software with Enhanced Services Hardware Guide

■

Console Port on page 17

■

AUX Port on page 17

■

USB Port on page 17

Physical Interface Modules (PIMs)
Physical Interface Modules (PIMs) provide the physical connection to various network
media types. For information about individual PIMs, see “Field-Replaceable
PIMs” on page 38.
For pinouts of PIM cable connectors, see “Network Cable Specifications and Connector
Pinouts” on page 179. For PIM replacement instructions, see “Replacing a
PIM” on page 120.
The J2320 front panel has three slots and the J2350 front panel has five slots for
field-replaceable PIMs. These slots are numbered from top to bottom and from left
to right as shown in Figure 10 on page 14.
Slot 0 is a fixed interface module that contains four built-in Gigabit Ethernet ports.
For more information, see “Built-In Gigabit Ethernet Ports” on page 17.
Figure 10: Slot Number Diagram on J2320 and J2350

Power Button and POWER LED
The power button is located on the left side of the front panel (see
Figure 1 on page 8). You can use the power button to power the Services Router
on and off. When you power on the router, the Routing Engine boots as the power
supply completes its startup sequence.
The POWER LED is located to the upper left of the LED dashboard. Table 6 on page
14 describes the POWER LED.
Table 6: J2320 and J2350 POWER LED
Color

State

Description

Green

On steadily

Power is functioning correctly.

Blinking

Power button has been pressed and quickly released, and
the router is gracefully shutting down.

Off

Router is not receiving power.

Unlit

■

J2320 and J2350 Services Router Hardware Features

Chapter 2: J-series Services Router Hardware Features

After the router is powered on, status indicators—such as LEDs on the front panel
and show chassis command output—can take up to 60 seconds to indicate that the
power supply is functioning normally. Ignore error indicators that appear during the
first 60 seconds.
If you need to power off the router after the Routing Engine finishes booting, use the
J-Web interface or the CLI to halt the Services Router first. For instructions, see the
JUNOS Software Administration Guide. Alternatively, you can press and release the
power button to gracefully shut down the router. For more information, see “Powering
a Services Router On and Off” on page 89.

STATUS LED
When the system is powered on, the STATUS LED changes from off to blinking green.
Startup takes approximately 90 seconds to complete. If you want to turn the system
off and on again, we recommend waiting a few seconds between shutting it down
and powering it back up. Table 7 on page 15 describes the STATUS LED.
Table 7: J2320 and J2350 STATUS LED
Color

State

Description

Green

Blinking

Router is starting up or performing diagnostics.

On steadily

Router is operating normally.

Blinking

Error has been detected.

Red

ALARM LED
The ALARM LED lights amber to indicate a minor condition that requires monitoring
or maintenance and lights red to indicate a major condition that can result in a system
shutdown. When the condition is corrected, the light turns off. Table 8 on page 15
describes the ALARM LED.
Table 8: J2320 and J2350 ALARM LED
Color

State

Description

Red

On steadily

Major alarm indicates a critical situation on the router that
has resulted from one of the following conditions. A red
alarm condition requires immediate action:
■

One or more hardware components have failed.

■

One or more hardware components have exceeded
temperature thresholds.

■

An alarm condition configured on an interface has
triggered a critical warning.

J2320 and J2350 Services Router Hardware Features

■

JUNOS Software with Enhanced Services Hardware Guide

Table 8: J2320 and J2350 ALARM LED (continued)
Color

State

Description

Yellow

On steadily

Minor alarm condition requires monitoring or maintenance:

Unlit

Off

■

Indicates a noncritical condition on the router that, if
left unchecked, might cause an interruption in service
or degradation in performance.

■

A missing rescue configuration or software license
generates an amber system alarm.

No alarms.

For information about alarm conditions and corrective actions, see “Monitoring and
Correcting Chassis Alarm Conditions” on page 157. For additional information, see
the JUNOS Software Administration Guide.

HA LED
The HA (high availability) LED is located in the front panel near the power status LED
of the LED dashboard. The LED lights when the router starts, but otherwise remains
unlit.Table 9 on page 16 describes the HA LED.
Table 9: J2320 and J2350 HA LED
Color

State

Description

Green

On steadily

All cluster members and monitored links are available.

Red

On steadily

A cluster member is missing or unreachable, or the other node is no longer part of
a cluster because it has been disabled by the dual membership and detection
recovery process in reaction to a control link or fabric link failure.

Amber

On steadily

All cluster members are present, but one or more monitored links are down.

Unlit

Off

The node is not configured for clustering or it has been disabled by the dual
membership and detection recovery process in reaction to a control link or fabric
link failure.

RESET CONFIG Button
Use the RESET CONFIG button to return the router to a previous valid configuration
or to the factory default configuration, or a rescue configuration. The button is
recessed to prevent it from being pressed accidentally. For details about the RESET
CONFIG button, see “Resetting the Configuration File When the Router Is
Inaccessible” on page 160.

■

J2320 and J2350 Services Router Hardware Features

Chapter 2: J-series Services Router Hardware Features

Built-In Gigabit Ethernet Ports
Four built-in Gigabit Ethernet ports provide LAN connections over copper interfaces
to hubs, switches, local servers, and workstations. You can also designate an Ethernet
port for management traffic. When configuring one of these ports, you use the
interface name that corresponds to the port’s location. From left to right on the front
panel, the interface names for the ports are ge-0/0/0, ge-0/0/1, ge-0/0/2, and
ge-0/0/3.
For Gigabit Ethernet port pinout information, see “Gigabit Ethernet uPIM RJ-45
Connector Pinout” on page 189.
Each port has two LEDs, a TX/RX LED on the left side and a LINK LED on the right
side. Table 10 on page 17 describes the built-in Ethernet port LEDs.
Table 10: Gigabit Ethernet Port LEDs
Function

Color

State

Description

LINK

Green

On steadily

Port is online.

Unlit

Off

Port is offline.

Green

Blinking

Port is transmitting or receiving data.

Unlit

Off

Port might be online, but it is not receiving data.

TX/RX

Console Port
You can use the console port on the chassis front panel to connect to the Routing
Engine through an RJ-45 serial cable. From the chassis console port, you can use the
CLI to configure the router. The console port is configured as data terminal equipment
(DTE) and supports the RS-232 (EIA-232) standard.
For information about securing the chassis console port, see the JUNOS Software
Administration Guide.
For pinout information, see “Chassis Console Port Pinouts” on page 190.

AUX Port
The port labeled AUX on the front panel of the J-series Services Router is for future
use and is not activated.

USB Port
The USB ports on the front panel of the router (see Figure 8 on page 13 and
Figure 9 on page 13) accept a USB storage device or USB storage device adapter with
a compact flash installed, as defined in the CompactFlash Specification published by
the CompactFlash Association. When a USB storage device is installed and configured,
it automatically acts as a secondary boot device if the internal compact flash fails on
startup. Depending on the size of the USB storage device, you can also configure it

J2320 and J2350 Services Router Hardware Features

■

JUNOS Software with Enhanced Services Hardware Guide

to receive any core files generated during a failure. For information about configuring
a USB storage device, see the JUNOS Software Administration Guide.

NOTE: For a list of supported USB storage devices, see the JUNOS Software with
Enhanced Services Release Notes at http://www.juniper.net.

J2320 and J2350 External Compact Flashes
On J2320 and J2350 routers, an external compact flash, also known as removable
compact flash, accepts a type I or II compact flash, as defined in the CompactFlash
Specification published by the CompactFlash Association. The J2320 and J2350 chassis
has a slot on the rear for external compact flashes (see Figure 3 on page 9). When
the external compact flash is installed and configured, it automatically acts as the
secondary boot device if the internal compact flash fails on startup.
Depending on the capacity of the external compact flash, you can also configure it
to receive any core files generated during a failure. For information about configuring
an external compact flash, see the JUNOS Software Administration Guide.

J2320 Power System
The J2320 Services Router uses AC power (see Figure 3 on page 9). The autosensing
power supply distributes the different output voltages to the router components
according to their voltage requirements. The power supply is fixed in the chassis,
and is not field-replaceable.
The AC power supply has a single AC appliance inlet that requires a dedicated AC
power feed.
The J2320 AC-powered chassis has a power switch and does not include a power
LED.
For information about site power preparations, see “Power Guidelines, Requirements,
and Specifications” on page 67. For information about connecting the router to power
and ground, see “Connecting Power” on page 84.

J2350 Power System
The J2350 Services Router uses either AC or DC power. The autosensing power supply
(see Figure 4 on page 9 or Figure 5 on page 10) distributes the different output
voltages to the router components according to their voltage requirements. The
power supply is fixed in the chassis, and is not field-replaceable.
The AC power supply has a single AC appliance inlet that requires a dedicated AC
power feed. The DC power supply has a terminal block that provides a single DC
input (–48 VDC and return) and requires a dedicated 15 A (–48 VDC) circuit breaker.
The J2350 AC-powered or DC-powered chassis has a power switch and does not
include a power LED.

■

J2320 and J2350 Services Router Hardware Features

Chapter 2: J-series Services Router Hardware Features

For information about site power preparations, see “Power Guidelines, Requirements,
and Specifications” on page 67. For information about connecting the router to power
and ground, see “Connecting Power” on page 84.

NOTE: You cannot mix DC and AC power supplies in the same chassis.

WARNING: DC-powered Services Routers are intended for installation only in a
restricted access location.

J2320 and J2350 Cooling System
The cooling system in J2320 and J2350 routers is from side to side. The J2320 router
has five cooling fans and the J2350 router has four cooling fans. The fans draw air
through vents along the left side of the chassis and exhaust it through vents on the
right side of the chassis. The airflow produced by these fans keeps router components
within the acceptable temperature range (see Figure 11 on page 20 and
Figure 12 on page 20). The speed of the fans is adjusted automatically according to
the current temperature.
On J2350 routers that comply with Network Equipment Building System (NEBS)
criteria, an air filter protects the air intake opening at the front of the chassis and
must be replaced periodically. To verify that the system is a NEBS-compliant system,
run the show chassis hardware command. A NEBS-compliant system displays the
term NEBS in the output. For instructions on how to replace air filters, see “Replacing
Air Filters on J2350 Routers” on page 153.
The Routing Engine monitors the temperature of the router components. If the
maximum temperature specification, as measured at the CPU junction, is exceeded
and the router cannot be adequately cooled, the Routing Engine shuts down the
hardware components.
J2320 and J2350 routers shut down when the CPU temperature reaches 80°C (176°F).
There is no alarm for temperature. You can view the CPU junction temperature using
the show chassis routing-engine command. The CPU temperature runs a few degrees
higher than the routing engine temperature displayed on the Monitor>Chassis page
of the J-Web interface.
An additional fan is part of each power supply. This fan is not regulated by the
operating system.

J2320 and J2350 Services Router Hardware Features

■

JUNOS Software with Enhanced Services Hardware Guide

Figure 11: Airflow Through the J2320 Chassis

Figure 12: Airflow Through the J2350 Chassis

J4350 and J6350 Services Router Hardware Features
This section contains the following topics:

■

J4350 and J6350 Chassis on page 21

■

J4350 and J6350 Midplane on page 25

■

J4350 and J6350 Routing Engine Hardware on page 25

■

J4350 and J6350 Boot Devices on page 25

■

J4350 and J6350 Front Panel on page 26

■

J4350 Power System on page 30

J4350 and J6350 Services Router Hardware Features

Chapter 2: J-series Services Router Hardware Features

■

J6350 Power System on page 31

■

J4350 and J6350 Cooling System on page 32

J4350 and J6350 Chassis
The J4350 and J6350 chassis is a rigid sheet metal structure that houses all the other
router components (see Figure 13 on page 22 through Figure 18 on page 24). The
chassis can be installed in many types of racks or cabinets. For information about
acceptable rack types, see “Rack Requirements” on page 64.
In addition to the features described in subsequent sections, the chassis includes the
following features:
■

Mounting brackets—One pair of metal brackets can be mounted at the front or
center of the chassis. Use the brackets for mounting the chassis in a rack or
cabinet.

■

Earthing terminals—Two protective earthing terminals, PEM nuts at the rear of
the chassis ensure safe dissipation of static electricity in all situations.

■

ESD point—One electrostatic discharge (ESD) point, a banana plug receptacle at
the front of the chassis, minimizes the risk of electrical discharge in potentially
hazardous environments.

CAUTION: Before removing or installing components of a functioning router, attach
an ESD strap to an ESD point and place the other end of the strap around your bare
wrist. Failure to use an ESD strap could result in damage to the router.
The router must be connected to earth ground during normal operation. The protective
earthing terminals on the rear of the chassis are provided to connect the router to
ground (see Figure 14 on page 22). Additional grounding is provided to an AC-powered
router when you plug its power supply into a grounded AC power receptacle.
For additional safety information, see “Safety and Regulatory Compliance
Information” on page 197.

J4350 and J6350 Services Router Hardware Features

■

JUNOS Software with Enhanced Services Hardware Guide

Figure 13: Front of J4350 and J6350 Chassis

Figure 14: Rear of J4350 AC-Powered Chassis

NOTE: The J4350 AC-powered chassis has a power switch and does not include a
power supply LED (unlike the J6350 AC-powered chassis).

Figure 15: Rear of J6350 AC-Powered Chassis

■

J4350 and J6350 Services Router Hardware Features

Chapter 2: J-series Services Router Hardware Features

Figure 16: Rear of J4350 DC-Powered Chassis

Figure 17: Rear of DC-Powered J6350 Chassis

J4350 and J6350 Services Router Hardware Features

■

JUNOS Software with Enhanced Services Hardware Guide

Figure 18: J4350 and J6350 Hardware Components

Table 11 on page 24 summarizes the physical specifications for the router chassis.
Table 11: J4350 and J6350 Physical Specifications
Description

Value

Chassis dimensions

■

3.44 in. (8.74 cm) high

■

17.44 in. (44.3 cm) wide—19.44 in. (48.38 cm) wide with mounting brackets attached

■

21.13 in. (53.67 cm) deep—plus 0.5 in. (1.27 cm) of hardware that protrudes from the chassis
front

■

J4350 Services Router:

Router weight

■

Minimum (no PIMs): 23 lb (10.4 kg)

■

Maximum (six PIMs): 25.3 lb (11.5 kg)

J6350 Services Router
■

Minimum (no PIMs and one power supply): 25.5 lb (11.6 kg)

■

Maximum (six PIMs and two power supplies): 30.7 lb (13.9 kg)

J4350 and J6350 Services Router Hardware Features

Chapter 2: J-series Services Router Hardware Features

J4350 and J6350 Midplane
The midplane is located in the center of the chassis and forms the rear of the PIM
card cage (see Figure 18 on page 24). You install the PIMs into the midplane from
the front of the chassis. Data packets are transferred across the midplane from the
PIM to the Routing Engine, and from the Routing Engine across the midplane to the
destination PIM.

J4350 and J6350 Routing Engine Hardware
The Routing Engine consists of the following components.
■

Processor—Creates the packet forwarding switch fabric for the router and runs
JUNOS Internet software to maintain the router's routing tables and routing
protocols.

■

EPROM—Stores the serial number of the Routing Engine.
To view the serial number of the Routing Engine, issue either the show chassis
routing-engine command or the show chassis hardware command.

■

Crypto Accelerator Module—Processor card that enhances performance of
cryptographic algorithms used in IP security (IPSec) services. The cryptographic
algorithms supported include Advanced Encryption Standard (AES), Data
Encryption Standard (DES), triple DES (3DES), Hashed Message Authentication
Code-Message Digest 5 (HMAC-MD5), and HMAC-Secure Hash Algorithm 1
(SHA-1).
To determine whether there is a Crypto Accelerator Module installed on your
router, issue the show chassis hardware command.

■

Compact flash—Provides primary storage for software images, configuration
files, and microcode. J4350 and J6350 routers have a slot on the motherboard
for an internal compact flash. For information about replacing the compact flash,
see “Replacing Internal Compact Flashes on J4350 and J6350
Routers” on page 129.

J4350 and J6350 Boot Devices
The J4350 and J6350 Services Routers can boot from two devices:
■

Internal compact flash

■

USB storage device

Normally, the J4350 or J6350 Services Router boots from the internal compact flash.
If the compact flash fails, the router attempts to boot from the USB storage device.

J4350 and J6350 Services Router Hardware Features

■

JUNOS Software with Enhanced Services Hardware Guide

J4350 and J6350 Front Panel
The front panel of the Services Router (see Figure 19 on page 26) allows you to install
or remove PIMs, view router status LEDs, access the console port, and perform simple
control functions.
Figure 19: Front of J4350 and J6350 Chassis

The components of the front panel, from left to right, are described in the following
sections:
■

Physical Interface Modules (PIMs) on page 26

■

Power Button and POWER LED on page 27

■

STATUS LED on page 27

■

ALARM LED on page 28

■

HA LED on page 29

■

RESET CONFIG Button on page 29

■

Built-In Gigabit Ethernet Ports on page 29

■

Console Port on page 30

■

AUX Port on page 30

■

USB Port on page 30

Physical Interface Modules (PIMs)
Physical Interface Modules (PIMs) provide the physical connection to various network
media types. For information about individual PIMs, see “Field-Replaceable
PIMs” on page 38.
For pinouts of PIM cable connectors, see “Network Cable Specifications and Connector
Pinouts” on page 179. For PIM replacement instructions, see “Replacing a
PIM” on page 120.
Each J4350 and J6350 Services Router has six front panel slots for field-replaceable
PIMs. These slots are numbered from top to bottom and from left to right as shown
in the slot number diagram on the front panel, shown in Figure 20 on page 27.

■

J4350 and J6350 Services Router Hardware Features

Chapter 2: J-series Services Router Hardware Features

Figure 20: Slot Number Diagram on Front Panel

Gigabit Ethernet and 4-port Fast Ethernet ePIMs can be installed in high-speed slots
only. High-speed slots are indicated by a black triangle containing an E in the front
panel slot number diagram. On J4350 Services Routers, the high-speed slots are
slot 3 and slot 6. On J6350 Services Routers, the high-speed slots are slots 2, 3, 5,
and 6.
Slot 0 is the fixed interface module that contains the built-in Ethernet ports.

Power Button and POWER LED
The power button is located on the left side of the front panel (see
Figure 19 on page 26). You can use the power button to power the Services Router
on and off. When you power on the router, the Routing Engine boots as the power
supply completes its startup sequence.
The POWER LED is located to the upper left of the LED dashboard. Table 12 on page
27 describes the POWER LED.
Table 12: POWER LED
Color

State

Description

Green

On steadily

Power is functioning correctly.

Blinking

Power button has been pressed and quickly released, and
the router is gracefully shutting down.

Off

Router is not receiving power.

Unlit

STATUS LED
When the system is powered on, the STATUS LED changes from off to blinking green.
Startup takes approximately 90 seconds to complete. If you want to turn the system

J4350 and J6350 Services Router Hardware Features

■

JUNOS Software with Enhanced Services Hardware Guide

off and on again, we recommend waiting a few seconds between shutting it down
and powering it back up. Table 13 on page 28 describes the STATUS LED.
Table 13: STATUS LED
Color

State

Description

Green

Blinking

Router is starting up or performing diagnostics.

On steadily

Router is operating normally.

Blinking

Error has been detected.

Red

ALARM LED
The ALARM LED lights yellow to indicate a minor condition that requires monitoring
or maintenance and lights red to indicate a major condition that can result in a system
shutdown. When the condition is corrected, the light turns off. Table 14 on page 28
describes the ALARM LED.
Table 14: ALARM LED
Color

State

Description

Red

On steadily

Major alarm indicates a critical situation on the router that
has resulted from one of the following conditions. A red
alarm condition requires immediate action:

Yellow

Unlit

On steadily

Off

■

One or more hardware components have failed.

■

One or more hardware components have exceeded
temperature thresholds.

■

An alarm condition configured on an interface has
triggered a critical warning.

Minor alarm condition requires monitoring or maintenance:
■

Indicates a noncritical condition on the router that, if
left unchecked, might cause an interruption in service
or degradation in performance.

■

A missing rescue configuration or software license
generates a yellow system alarm.

No alarms.

■

J4350 and J6350 Services Router Hardware Features

Chapter 2: J-series Services Router Hardware Features

HA LED
The HA (high availability) LED is located in the front panel near the power status LED
of the LED dashboard. The LED lights when the router starts, but otherwise remains
unlit.Table 15 on page 29 describes the HA LED.
Table 15: HA LED
Color

State

Description

Green

On steadily

All cluster members and monitored links are available.

Red

On steadily

Amber

On steadily

All cluster members are present, but one or more monitored links are down.

Unlit

Off

The node is not configured for clustering or it has been disabled by the dual
membership and detection recovery process in reaction to a control link or fabric
link failure.

Built-In Gigabit Ethernet Ports
Four built-in Gigabit Ethernet ports provide LAN connections over copper interfaces
to hubs, switches, local servers, and workstations. You can also designate an Ethernet
port for management traffic. When configuring one of these ports, you use the
interface name that corresponds to the port’s location. From left to right on the front
panel, the interface names for the ports are ge-0/0/0, ge-0/0/1, ge-0/0/2, and
ge-0/0/3.
For Gigabit Ethernet port pinout information, see “Gigabit Ethernet ePIM RJ-45
Connector Pinout” on page 190.
Each port has two LEDs, a TX/RX LED on the left side and a LINK LED on the right
side. Table 16 on page 29 describes the built-in Ethernet port LEDs.
Table 16: Gigabit Ethernet Port LEDs
Function

Color

State

Description

LINK

Green

On steadily

Port is online.

Unlit

Off

Port is offline.

J4350 and J6350 Services Router Hardware Features

■

JUNOS Software with Enhanced Services Hardware Guide

Table 16: Gigabit Ethernet Port LEDs (continued)
Function

Color

State

Description

TX/RX

Green

Blinking

Port is transmitting or receiving data.

Unlit

Off

Port might be online, but it is not receiving data.

Console Port
You can use the console port on the chassis front panel to connect to the Routing
Engine through an RJ-45 serial cable. From the chassis console port, you can use the
CLI to configure the router. The console port is configured as data terminal equipment
(DTE) and supports the RS-232 (EIA-232) standard.
For information about securing the chassis console port, see the J-series Services
Router Administration Guide.
For pinout information, see “Chassis Console Port Pinouts” on page 190.

AUX Port
The port labeled AUX on the front panel of the J4350 or J6350 Services Router is for
future use and is not activated.

USB Port
The USB ports on the front panel of the router (see Figure 19 on page 26) accept a
USB storage device or USB storage device adapter with a compact flash installed, as
defined in the CompactFlash Specification published by the CompactFlash Association.
When a USB storage device is installed and configured, it automatically acts as a
secondary boot device if the internal compact flash fails on startup. Depending on
the size of the USB storage device, you can also configure it to receive any core files
generated during a failure. For information about configuring a USB storage device,
see the JUNOS Software Administration Guide.

NOTE: For a list of supported USB storage devices, see the JUNOS Software with
Enhanced Services Release Notes at http://www.juniper.net.

J4350 Power System
The J4350 Services Router uses either AC or DC power. The autosensing power supply
(see Figure 14 on page 22 or Figure 16 on page 23) distributes the different output
voltages to the router components according to their voltage requirements. The
power supply is fixed in the chassis and is not field-replaceable.
The AC power supply has a single AC appliance inlet that requires a dedicated AC
power feed. The DC power supply has a terminal block that provides a single DC
input (–48 VDC and return) and requires a dedicated 15 A (–48 VDC) circuit breaker.

■

J4350 and J6350 Services Router Hardware Features

Chapter 2: J-series Services Router Hardware Features

The J4350 AC-powered chassis has a power switch and does not include a power
LED.
The J4350 DC-powered chassis includes a power supply LED located to the upper
right of the power supply connector. Table 17 on page 31 describes the power supply
LED.
Table 17: Power Supply LED
State

Description

Off

No power is flowing to the power supply.

Green

Power supply is connected and power is flowing.

Yellow

Power supply is connected, but the router is not powered on.

NOTE: You cannot mix DC and AC power supplies in the same chassis.

WARNING: DC-powered Services Routers are intended for installation only in a
restricted access location.

J6350 Power System
The J6350 Services Router uses either AC or DC power. You can install one or two
autosensing, load-sharing power supplies on the system board at the bottom of the
chassis, as shown in Figure 15 on page 22 or Figure 17 on page 23. The power
supplies distribute the different output voltages to the router components, depending
on their voltage requirements. When two power supplies are installed and operational,
they automatically share the electrical load.
For full redundancy, two power supplies are required. If a power supply stops
functioning for any reason, the second power supply instantly begins providing all
the power the router needs for normal functioning. It can provide full power
indefinitely.
Each power supply has an LED located to the upper right of the power supply
connector. Table 17 on page 31 describes the power supply LED.
For information about site power preparations, see “Power Guidelines, Requirements,
and Specifications” on page 67. For information about connecting the router to power
and ground, see “Connecting Power” on page 84.

J4350 and J6350 Services Router Hardware Features

■

JUNOS Software with Enhanced Services Hardware Guide

Power supplies on J6350 Services Routers are hot-removable and hot-insertable. You
can remove and replace a redundant power supply without powering down the router
or disrupting the routing functions. To avoid electrical injury, carefully follow the
instructions in “Replacing Power System Components” on page 139.

NOTE: You cannot mix DC and AC power supplies in the same chassis.

WARNING: DC-powered Services Routers are intended for installation only in a
restricted access location.

J4350 and J6350 Cooling System
The cooling system includes three fans at the rear of the chassis. The airflow produced
by these fans keeps router components within the acceptable temperature range
(see Figure 21 on page 33). The speed of the fans is adjusted automatically according
to the current temperature.
An air filter protects the air intake opening at the front of the chassis and must be
replaced periodically. For instructions, see “Replacing Air Filters on J4350 and J6350
Routers” on page 154.
The Routing Engine monitors the temperature of the router components. If the
maximum temperature specification, as measured at the CPU junction, is exceeded
and the router cannot be adequately cooled, the Routing Engine shuts down the
hardware components.
When the CPU temperature reaches 80°C (176°F), a yellow alarm is triggered. When
the CPU temperature reaches 105°C (221°F), the system shuts down. There is no
red alarm for temperature. You can view the CPU junction temperature using the
show chassis routing-engine command. The CPU temperature runs a few degrees
higher than the routing engine temperature displayed on the Monitor>Chassis page
of the J-Web interface.

NOTE: On J4350 and J6350 routers that are not designed to comply with Network
Equipment Building System (NEBS) criteria, the temperature at which the system
shuts down is 90°C (194°F) rather than 105°C (221°F). To verify that the system is
a NEBS-compliant system, run the show chassis hardware command. A
NEBS-compliant system displays the term NEBS in the output.
An additional fan is part of each power supply. This fan is not regulated by the
operating system.

■

J4350 and J6350 Services Router Hardware Features

Chapter 2: J-series Services Router Hardware Features

Figure 21: Airflow Through the J4350 and J6350 Chassis

J4350 and J6350 Services Router Hardware Features

■

JUNOS Software with Enhanced Services Hardware Guide

■

J4350 and J6350 Services Router Hardware Features

Chapter 3

PIM Overview
J-series Services Routers accept Physical Interface Modules (PIMs) in the slots on the
front of the chassis.

CAUTION: PIMs are not hot-swappable. You must power off the Services Router
before removing or inserting a PIM module. Ensure that the PIMs are installed in the
router chassis before booting up the system.
A Physical Interface Module (PIM) is a network interface card that is installed on a
J-series Services Router to provide physical connections to a LAN or a WAN. The PIM
receives incoming packets from the network and transmits outgoing packets to the
network. Each PIM is equipped with a dedicated network processor that forwards
incoming data packets to the Routing Engine and receives outgoing data packets
from the Routing Engine. During this process, the PIM performs framing and
line-speed signaling for its medium type.
For a complete list of supported PIMs, see “Field-Replaceable PIMs” on page 38.
A single WXC Integrated Services Module (also called an ISM 200) can be installed
like a PIM in J2350, J4350, and J6350 routers to provide WAN acceleration. For more
information, see the WXC Integrated Services Module Installation and Configuration
Guide.
For J-series Services Router PIM compatibility matrix and datasheets, go to
http://www.juniper.net/products/jseries/.
For information about network interfaces, and for configuration instructions, see the
JUNOS Software Interfaces and Routing Configuration Guide.
This chapter contains the following topics:
■

PIM Terms on page 35

■

Field-Replaceable PIMs on page 38

PIM Terms
To understand PIM, become familiar with the terms defined in Table 18 on page 36.

PIM Terms

■

JUNOS Software with Enhanced Services Hardware Guide

Table 18: PIM Terms
Term

Definition

ADSL 2/2+ Annex A

ITU-T Standard G.992.1 that defines how ADSL works over plain old telephone service
(POTS) lines.

ADSL 2/2+ Annex B

ITU-T Standard G.992.1 that defines how ADSL works over Integrated Services Digital
Network (ISDN) lines.

bandwidth on demand

ISDN cost-control feature defining the bandwidth threshold that must be reached on
all links before a Services Router initiates additional ISDN data connections to provide
more bandwidth.

Basic Rate Interface (BRI)

ISDN interface intended for home and small enterprise applications. BRI consists of
two 64-Kbps B-channels and one 16-Kbps D-channel.

callback

Alternative feature to dial-in that enables a J-series Services Router to call back the
caller from the remote end of a backup ISDN connection. Instead of accepting a call
from the remote end of the connection, the router rejects the call, waits a configured
period of time, and calls a number configured on the router's dialer interface. See also
dial-in.

caller ID

Telephone number of the caller on the remote end of a backup ISDN connection, used
to dial in and also to identify the caller. Multiple caller IDs can be configured on an
ISDN dialer interface. During dial-in, the router matches the incoming call's caller ID
against the caller IDs configured on its dialer interfaces. Each dialer interface accepts
calls from only callers whose caller IDs are configured on it.

channel service unit (CSU)

Unit that connects a digital telephone line to a multiplexer or other signal service.

data service unit (DSU)

Unit that connects a data terminal equipment (DTE) device—in this case, a Services
Router—to a digital telephone line.

data terminal
equipment–to–data
communication
equipment (DTE–DCE)
interface

Interface that a Services Router (the DTE) uses to exchange information with a serial
device such as a modem (the DCE).

demand circuit

Interface configured for dial-on-demand routing backup. In OSPF, the demand circuit
reduces the amount of OSPF traffic by removing all OSPF protocols when the routing
domain is in a steady state.

dial backup

Feature that reestablishes network connectivity through one or more backup ISDN
dialer interfaces after a primary interface fails. When the primary interface is
reestablished, the ISDN interface is disconnected.

dial-in

Feature that enables J-series Services Routers to receive calls from the remote end of
a backup ISDN connection. The remote end of the ISDN call might be a service provider,
a corporate central location, or a customer premises equipment (CPE) branch office.
All incoming calls can be verified against caller IDs configured on the router's dialer
interface. See also callback.

■

PIM Terms

A DTE cable uses a male 9-pin or 25-pin connector, and a DCE cable uses a female
9-pin or 25-pin connector.

Chapter 3: PIM Overview

Table 18: PIM Terms (continued)
Term

Definition

dialer filter

Stateless firewall filter that enables dial-on-demand routing backup when applied to
a physical ISDN interface and its dialer interface configured as a passive static route.
The passive static route has a lower priority than dynamic routes. If all dynamic routes
to an address are lost from the routing table and the router receives a packet for that
address, the dialer interface initiates an ISDN backup connection and sends the packet
over it. See also dial-on-demand routing backup; floating static route.

dial-on-demand-routing
(DDR) backup

Feature that provides a J-series Services Router with full-time connectivity across an
ISDN line. When routes on a primary serial T1, E1, T3, E3, Fast Ethernet, or PPPoE
interface are lost, an ISDN dialer interface establishes a backup connection. To save
connection time costs, the Services Router drops the ISDN connection after a configured
period of inactivity. Services Router with ISDN interfaces support two types of
dial-on-demand routing backup: on-demand routing with a dialer filter and dialer
watch. See also dialer filter; dialer watch.

dialer watch

Dial-on-demand routing (DDR) backup feature that provides reliable connectivity
without relying on a dialer filter to activate the ISDN interface. The ISDN dialer interface
monitors the existence of each route on a watch list. If all routes on the watch list are
lost from the routing table, dialer watch initiates the ISDN interface for failover
connectivity. See also dial-on-demand routing backup.

“dying gasp” notification

Ability of a Services Router with a digital subscriber line (DSL) connection that has lost
power to send a message informing the attached DSL access multiplexer (DSLAM)
that it is about to go offline.

ePIM

Enhanced PIM. A particular type of high-speed PIM, such as the Gigabit Ethernet ePIM
or 4-port Fast Ethernet ePIM, which can be inserted only in high-speed slots (slots 3
and 6 on a J4350 Services Router, or slots 2, 3, 5, and 6 on a J6350 Services Router).

floating static route

Route with an administrative distance greater than the administrative distance of the
dynamically learned versions of the same route. The static route is used only when
the dynamic routes are no longer available. When a floating static route is configured
on an interface with a dialer filter, the interface can be used for backup.

ISDN S/T interface

Interface between an ISDN network and a network termination device consisting of
two twisted pairs, one each for transmitting and receiving. The S/T interface usually
resides in the customer premises and operates at 192 Kbps, of which ISDN traffic
accounts for 144 Kbps.

ISDN U interface

Single twisted–pair interface line connecting the customer premises unit in an ISDN
network to the central office. A U interface runs at 144 Kbps (128 Kbps for two B
channels and 16 Kbps for the D channel).

plain old telephone
service (POTS)

Standard telephone service that allows limited speed and bandwidth of 52 Kbps, which
is also know as public switched telephone network (PSTN).

Primary Rate Interface
(PRI)

ISDN service intended for higher-bandwidth applications than ISDN BRI. ISDN PRI
consists of a single D-channel for control and signaling, plus a number of 64-Kbps
B-channels—either 23 B-channels on a T1 line or 30 B-channels on an E1 line—to
carry network traffic.

uPIM

Universal switching PIM. A particular type of PIM, such as the Gigabit Ethernet uPIM,
which can be universally inserted in any slot on a J2320, J2350, J4350, or J6350
Services Router.

PIM Terms

■

JUNOS Software with Enhanced Services Hardware Guide

Field-Replaceable PIMs
PIMs are removable and insertable only when the Services Router is powered off.
You install PIMs into slots in the router chassis. If a slot is not occupied by a PIM, a
PIM blank panel must be installed to shield the empty slot and to allow cooling air
to circulate properly through the router.
This section contains the following topics:
■

J2320 and J2350 Field-Replaceable PIM and Module Summary on page 38

■

J4350 and J6350 Field-Replaceable PIM Summary on page 39

■

1-Port, 6-Port, 8-Port, and 16-Port Gigabit Ethernet uPIMs on page 41

■

1-Port Gigabit Ethernet ePIMs on page 44

■

Dual-Port Serial PIM on page 47

■

Dual-Port T1 or E1 PIM on page 48

■

Dual-Port Channelized T1/E1/ISDN PRI PIM on page 49

■

T3 or E3 PIM on page 51

■

Dual-Port Fast Ethernet PIM on page 53

■

4-Port Fast Ethernet ePIM on page 54

■

4-Port ISDN BRI PIMs on page 55

■

ADSL PIM on page 56

■

G.SHDSL PIM on page 58

J2320 and J2350 Field-Replaceable PIM and Module Summary
Table 19 on page 39 provides software release information, port numbers, and
sample interface names for the field-replaceable PIMs and modules supported on
J2320 and J2350 Services Routers. For interface naming conventions, see the JUNOS
Software Interfaces and Routing Configuration Guide. The supported PIMs can be
installed in any slot available on the J2320 and J2350 routers. The WXC Integrated
Services Module supported on the J2350 model occupies two slots. You can install
only one of these modules in a router chassis.

CAUTION: Do not install a combination of modules in a single chassis that exceeds
the maximum power and heat capacity of the chassis. If J-series power management
is enabled, PIMs and modules (PIMs or PIMs plus a WXC Integrated Services Module)
that exceed the maximum power and heat capacity remain offline when the chassis
is powered on.
To verify that the combination of modules to be installed in a chassis does not exceed
the power and heat capacities for the router, see “Planning for Power
Management” on page 72.

■

Field-Replaceable PIMs

Chapter 3: PIM Overview

Table 19: J2320 and J2350 Field-Replaceable PIM and Module Summary
Sample Interface Name
PIM

Supported Software Releases
for This PIM

1-Port SFP, 6-Port SFP,
8-Port, and 16-Port
Gigabit Ethernet uPIMs

Release 8.5 and later of JUNOS
software with enhanced
services

Port Numbering

(type-pim/0/port)

Ports:

ge-2/0/0

■

0 through 5

■

0 through 7

■

0 through 15

Dual-Port Serial PIM

Release 8.5 and later of JUNOS
software with enhanced
services

Ports—0 and 1

se-3/0/1

Dual-Port T1 or E1 PIM

Release 8.5 and later of JUNOS
software with enhanced
services

Ports—0 and 1

t1-0/0/1

or
e1-0/0/1

Dual-Port Channelized
T1/E1/ISDN PRI PIM

Release 8.5 and later of JUNOS
software with enhanced
services

Ports—0 and 1

4-Port ISDN BRI PIM

Release 8.5 and later of JUNOS
software with enhanced
services

Ports—0, 1, 2, and 3

br-1/0/2

ADSL PIM

Release 8.5 and later of JUNOS
software with enhanced
services

Port—0

at-2/0/0

G.SHDSL PIM

Release 8.5 and later of JUNOS
software with enhanced
services

Ports—0 and 1

at-1/0/0

WXC Integrated Services
Module (ISM 200)

Release 8.5 and later of JUNOS
software with enhanced
services

Ports—0

wx-1/0/0

ct1-0/0/0
ce1-0/0/0

NOTE: This module is
not supported on J2320
routers.

J4350 and J6350 Field-Replaceable PIM Summary
Table 20 on page 40 provides software release information, slot and port numbers,
and sample interface names for the field-replaceable PIMs supported on J4350 and
J6350 Services Routers.

Field-Replaceable PIMs

■

JUNOS Software with Enhanced Services Hardware Guide

CAUTION: Do not install a combination of modules in a single chassis that exceeds
the maximum power and heat capacity of the chassis. If J-series power management
is enabled, PIMs and modules (PIMs or PIMs plus a WXC Integrated Services Module)
that exceed the maximum power and heat capacity remain offline when the chassis
is powered on.
To verify that the combination of PIMs to be installed in a chassis does not exceed
the power and heat capacities for the J4350 or J6350 router, see “Planning for Power
Management” on page 72.
Table 20: J4350 and J6350 Field-Replaceable PIM and Module Summary
Sample Interface Name
Supported Software Releases
for This PIM

PIM
1-Port SFP Gigabit
Ethernet uPIM

6-Port SFP Gigabit
Ethernet uPIM

8-Port Gigabit Ethernet
uPIM

16-Port Gigabit Ethernet
uPIM

1-Port SFP Gigabit
Ethernet ePIM

Slot and Port Numbering

(type-pim/0/port)

Release 8.5 and later of JUNOS
software with enhanced
services

Slots—1 through 6

ge-2/0/0

Release 8.5 and later of JUNOS
software with enhanced
services

Slots—1 through 6

Release 8.5 and later of JUNOS
software with enhanced
services

Slots—1 through 6

Release 8.5 and later of JUNOS
software with enhanced
services

Slots—1 through 6

Release 8.5 and later of JUNOS
software with enhanced
services

Can be installed in any
high-speed slot, as follows:

Port—0
ge-2/0/5

Ports—0 through 5
ge-2/0/7

Ports—0 through 7
ge-2/0/15

Ports—0 through 15

■

ge-3/0/0

J4350: Slots 3 and 6
Port—0

■

J6350: Slots 2, 3, 5,
and 6
Port—0

Dual-Port Serial PIM

Dual-Port T1 or E1 PIM

Release 8.5 and later of JUNOS
software with enhanced
services

Slots—1 through 6

Release 8.5 and later of JUNOS
software with enhanced
services

Slots—1 through 6

t1-0/0/1

Ports—0 and 1

se-3/0/1

Ports—0 and 1

e1-0/0/1

Dual-Port Channelized
T1/E1/ISDN PRI PIM

■

Release 8.5 and later of JUNOS
software with enhanced
services

Field-Replaceable PIMs

Slots—1 through 6

ct1-0/0/0

Port—0 and 1

ce1-0/0/0

Chapter 3: PIM Overview

Table 20: J4350 and J6350 Field-Replaceable PIM and Module Summary (continued)
Sample Interface Name
PIM
T3 or E3 PIM

Supported Software Releases
for This PIM
Release 8.5 and later of JUNOS
software with enhanced
services

Slot and Port Numbering

(type-pim/0/port)

Slots—1 through 6

t3-0/0/0

Port—0

or
e3-2/0/0

Dual-Port Fast Ethernet
PIM

4-port Fast Ethernet
ePIM PIM

Release 8.5 and later of JUNOS
software with enhanced
services

Slots—1 through 6

Release 8.5 and later of JUNOS
software with enhanced
services

Can be installed in any
high-speed slot, as follows:

fe-1/0/0

Ports—0 and 1

■

fe-3/0/0

J4350: Slots 3 and 6
Ports—0 through 3

■

J6350: Slots 2, 3, 5,
and 6
Ports—0 through 3

4-Port ISDN BRI PIM

ADSL PIM

G.SHDSL PIM

WXC Integrated Services
Module (ISM 200)

Release 8.5 and later of JUNOS
software with enhanced
services

Slots—1 through 6

Release 8.5 and later of JUNOS
software with enhanced
services

Slots—1 through 6

Release 8.5 and later of JUNOS
software with enhanced
services

Slots—1 through 6

Release 8.5 and later of JUNOS
software with enhanced
services

Ports—0

br-1/0/2

Ports—0, 1, 2, and 3
at-2/0/0

Port—0
at-1/0/0

Ports—0 and 1
wx-1/0/0

1-Port, 6-Port, 8-Port, and 16-Port Gigabit Ethernet uPIMs
Gigabit Ethernet uPIMs are supported on J2320, J2350, J4350, and J6350 Services
Routers. Gigabit Ethernet uPIMs are available in four versions.
The 1-port and 6-port SFP Gigabit Ethernet uPIM, shown in Figure 22 on page 42
and Figure 23 on page 42, have small form-factor pluggable (SFP) transceivers to
allow you to use different connectors. The optical SFP transceivers supported by
these uPIMs are described in Table 22 on page 44.

Field-Replaceable PIMs

■

JUNOS Software with Enhanced Services Hardware Guide

Figure 22: 1-Port Gigabit Ethernet uPIM

Figure 23: 6-Port Gigabit Ethernet uPIM

The 8-port and 16-port Gigabit Ethernet uPIMs, shown in Figure 24 on page 42 and
Figure 25 on page 42, have RJ-45 connectors.
Figure 24: 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet uPIM

Figure 25: 16-Port Gigabit Ethernet uPIM

■

Field-Replaceable PIMs

Chapter 3: PIM Overview

Features. Gigabit Ethernet uPIMs provide the following key features:
■

The multiport uPIMs can be used as switches in the access layer (for connections
to workstations and desktops). For more information, see the JUNOS Software
Interfaces and Routing Configuration Guide.

■

Link speed for 8-port and 16-port Gigabit Ethernet uPIMs is configurable to 10,
100, or 1000 Mbps, and transmission mode is configurable to half or full duplex.
The 1-port and 6-port SFP Gigabit Ethernet uPIMs cannot be manually
configured—they are set at 1000 Mbps and full duplex.

■

Autonegotiation.

■

1-port and 6-port Gigabit Ethernet uPIMs use SFP transceivers to allow different
connectors to be used on uPIM ports. These SFP Gigabit Ethernet uPIMs support
1000Base-SX, 1000Base-LX, and 1000Base-T SFPs. They do not support
1000Base-LH SFPs.
1000Base-SX and 1000Base-LX SFP transceivers have the following characteristics:

■

Duplex LC/PC connector (Rx and Tx).

■

Optical interface support—See the JUNOS Software Administration Guide.

8-port and 16-port Gigabit Ethernet uPIMs—and SFPs on the 1-port and 6-port
uPIMs—support 1000Base-T RJ-45 connectors.
For pinouts of cable connectors for Gigabit Ethernet uPIMs, see “Gigabit Ethernet
uPIM RJ-45 Connector Pinout” on page 189.

Limitations. Gigabit Ethernet uPIMs have the following limitations:
■

Gigabit Ethernet uPIMs do not support SNMP.

■

Gigabit Ethernet uPIM interfaces can be configured up to a maximum MTU size
of 9014 bytes.

Installation. Gigabit Ethernet uPIMs can be inserted in any slot on J2320, J2350,
J4350, or J6350 Services Routers.
Throughput for a uPIM is higher when it is inserted in a high-speed slot. High-speed
slots are slots 3 and 6 on the J4350 router, and slots 2, 3, 5, and 6 on the J6350
router.
16-port Gigabit Ethernet uPIMs are two slots high. Because the connector on the PIM
is on the lower half, the PIM occupies the slot that it is plugged into and the slot above
it. Thus you cannot install a 16-port uPIM in the top slots of a router. For example,
on a J4350 router you cannot install a 16-port uPIM in slots 1 and 4. If you install
the PIM in slot 2, it occupies both slots 2 and 1.
To install or remove a PIM, see “Replacing a PIM” on page 120.
Interface LEDs. For 8-port and 16-port Gigabit Ethernet uPIMs, the activity LED is
located on the left side of each port, and the link LED is located on the right side of
each port. For the 6-port Gigabit Ethernet uPIM, the LEDs are located to the right of
each port, with the link LED above the activity LED. LEDs on the 1-port uPIM are
clearly labeled.Table 21 on page 44 describes the meaning of the LEDs.

Field-Replaceable PIMs

■

JUNOS Software with Enhanced Services Hardware Guide

Table 21: Gigabit Ethernet Port LEDs
Function

Color

State

Description

Link

Green

On steadily

Port is online.

Unlit

Off

Port is offline.

Green

Blinking

Port is transmitting or receiving traffic.

Unlit

Off

Port might be online, but it is not
receiving traffic.

Activity
(TX/RX)

For alarms, see the configuring and monitoring alarms information in the JUNOS
Software Administration Guide.
Optical Interface Support. Table 22 on page 44 describes the optical interface
support on the 1-port and 6-port Gigabit Ethernet uPIMs over single-mode fiber-optic
(SMF) and multimode fiber-optic (MMF) cables.
Table 22: Optical Interface Support for SFP Gigabit Ethernet uPIMs
Parameter

1000Base-SX Transceiver

1000Base-LX Transceiver

Model number

JX-SFP-1GE-SX

JX-SFP-1GE-LX

Maximum distance

500 m (1640 ft) on 50/125-µm
MMF cable

10 km (6.2 mi) on 9/125-µm SMF
cable

200 m (656 ft) on 62.5/125-µm
MMF cable

550 m (1894 ft) on MMF cable

Transmitter
wavelength

830 nm through 860 nm

1270 nm through 1355 nm

Average launch power

–9.5 dBm through –4 dBm

For SMF cable: –9.5 dBm through
–3 dBm
For MMF cable: –11.5 dBm through
–3 dBm

Receiver sensitivity

–21 dBm through –18 dBm

–25 dBm through –20.5 dBm

Copper Interface Support. The 1-port and 6-port Gigabit Ethernet uPIMs also support
1000Base-T SFPs (model number JX-SFP-1GE-T).

1-Port Gigabit Ethernet ePIMs
The 1-port Gigabit Ethernet ePIM is supported on J4350 and J6350 Services Routers
and is available in two versions, one with copper connector (see
Figure 26 on page 45), the other with small form-factor pluggable (SFP) transceivers
(see Figure 27 on page 45).

■

Field-Replaceable PIMs

Chapter 3: PIM Overview

Figure 26: Copper Gigabit Ethernet ePIM

Figure 27: SFP Gigabit Ethernet ePIM

Features. The Gigabit Ethernet ePIM provides the following key features:
■

Autonegotiation through medium-dependent interface (MDI) and MDI crossover
(MDI-X) support.

■

Link speeds for the Copper Gigabit Ethernet ePIM are configurable to 10, 100,
or 1000 Mbps, and transmission mode is configurable to half or full duplex. The
SFP Gigabit Ethernet ePIM cannot be manually configured—it is set at 1000 Mbps
and full duplex.

■

The SFP Gigabit Ethernet ePIM uses SFPs to allow different connectors to be
used on the ePIM ports. The ePIM supports 1000Base-SX, 1000Base-LX, and
1000Base-T copper SFPs. It does not support 1000Base-LH SFPs.
1000Base-SX and 1000Base-LX SFP transceivers have the following characteristics:

■

Duplex LC/PC connector (Rx and Tx).

■

Optical interface support—See Table 24 on page 46.

Copper Gigabit Ethernet ePIM and 1000Base-T SFP transceivers have the following
characteristics:
■

Connector: Four-pair, category 5 unshielded twisted-pair cable through an
RJ-45 connector

■

Pinout: MDI crossover

■

Maximum distance: 100 m (328 ft)

For pinouts of cable connectors for Copper Gigabit Ethernet ePIMs, see “Gigabit
Ethernet ePIM RJ-45 Connector Pinout” on page 190.

Field-Replaceable PIMs

■

JUNOS Software with Enhanced Services Hardware Guide

Limitations. The Gigabit Ethernet ePIM has the following limitations:
■

Gigabit Ethernet ePIMs do not support SNMP.

■

Configure Gigabit Ethernet ePIM interfaces up to a maximum MTU size of
9018 bytes.

Installation. You can install Gigabit Ethernet ePIMs in any high-speed slot as follows:
■

J4350—Install up to two Gigabit Ethernet ePIMs in slots 3 and 6.

■

J6350—Install up to four Gigabit Ethernet ePIMs in slots 2, 3, 5, and 6.

NOTE: High-speed slots are labeled with an E on the front-panel slot number diagram.
To install or remove a PIM, see “Replacing a PIM” on page 120.
Interface LEDs. The LINK and TX/RX LEDs indicate link status and activity.
Table 23 on page 46 describes the meaning of the LEDs.
Table 23: Gigabit Ethernet Port LEDs
Function

Color

State

Description

LINK

Green

On steadily

Port is online.

Unlit

Off

Port is offline.

Green

Blinking

Port is transmitting or receiving traffic.

Unlit

Off

Port might be online, but it is not
receiving traffic.

TX/RX

For alarms, see the configuring and monitoring alarms information in the JUNOS
Software Administration Guide.
Optical Interface Support. Table 24 on page 46 describes the optical interface
support on the SFP Gigabit Ethernet ePIM over single-mode fiber-optic (SMF) and
multimode fiber-optic (MMF) cables.
Table 24: Optical Interface Support for SFP Gigabit Ethernet ePIM
Parameter

1000Base-SX Transceiver

1000Base-LX Transceiver

Maximum distance

500 m (1640 ft) on 50/125-µm
MMF cable

10 km (6.2 mi) on 9/125-µm SMF
cable

200 m (656 ft) on 62.5/125-µm
MMF cable

550 m (1894 ft) on MMF cable

830 nm through 860 nm

1270 nm through 1355 nm

Transmitter wavelength

■

Field-Replaceable PIMs

Chapter 3: PIM Overview

Table 24: Optical Interface Support for SFP Gigabit Ethernet ePIM (continued)
Parameter

1000Base-SX Transceiver

1000Base-LX Transceiver

Average launch power

–9.5 dBm through –4 dBm

For SMF cable: –9.5 dBm through
–3 dBm
For MMF cable: –11.5 dBm through
–3 dBm

Receiver saturation

–3 dBm

Receiver sensitivity

–18 dBm

–20.5 dBm

Dual-Port Serial PIM
The Dual-Port Serial PIM (Figure 28 on page 47) provides a physical connection to
serial network media types through two serial interface ports.
Figure 28: Dual-Port Serial PIM

The Dual-Port Serial PIM provides the following key features:
■

Onboard network processor

■

Autoselection of operation modes based on data terminal equipment (DTE) or
data communication equipment (DCE) cables

■

Local and remote loopback diagnostics

■

Configurable clock rate for the transmit (Tx) clock and receive (Rx) clock

For pinouts of cable connectors for serial PIMs, see “Serial PIM Cable
Specifications” on page 179.
To install or remove a PIM, see “Replacing a PIM” on page 120.
Status LEDs indicate port status. Table 25 on page 48 describes the meaning of the
LED states.

Field-Replaceable PIMs

■

JUNOS Software with Enhanced Services Hardware Guide

Table 25: Status LEDs for Serial Ports
Color

State

Description

Green

On steadily

Online with no alarms or failures.

Red

On steadily

Active with a local alarm. The router has
detected a failure.

Unlit

Off

Offline.

For alarms, see the configuring and monitoring alarms information in the JUNOS
Software Administration Guide.

Dual-Port T1 or E1 PIM
The Dual-Port T1 PIM (Figure 29 on page 48) and Dual-Port E1 PIM
(Figure 30 on page 48) provide a physical connection to T1 or E1 network media
types. Each PIM has two physical T1 or E1 ports with an integrated channel service
unit (CSU) or data service unit (DSU).
Figure 29: Dual-Port T1 PIM

Figure 30: Dual-Port E1 PIM

The Dual-Port T1 and E1 PIMs provides the following key features:

■

Onboard network processor

■

Integrated CSU/DSU—Eliminates the need for a separate external device

■

56-Kbps and 64-Kbps modes

■

ANSI T1.102, T1.107, and T1.403 standards compliance

Field-Replaceable PIMs

Chapter 3: PIM Overview

■

G.703, G.704, and G.706 E1 standards compliance

■

Independent internal and external clocking system

■

Loopback, bit error rate test (BERT), T1 facilities data link (FDL), and long buildout
diagnostics

For pinouts of cable connectors for T1 and E1 PIMs, see “E1 and T1 RJ-48 Cable
Pinouts” on page 191.
To install or remove a PIM, see “Replacing a PIM” on page 120.
Status LEDs indicate port status. Table 26 on page 49 describes the meaning of the
LED states.
Table 26: Status LEDs for T1 and E1 Ports
Color

State

Description

Green

On steadily

Online with no alarms or failures.

Red

On steadily

Active with a local alarm. The router has
detected a failure.

Unlit

Off

Offline.

For alarms, see the configuring and monitoring alarms information in the JUNOS
Software Administration Guide.

Dual-Port Channelized T1/E1/ISDN PRI PIM
The Dual-Port Channelized T1/E1/ISDN PRI PIM (Figure 31 on page 50) is a multiflex
interface card that allows you to configure a single interface as a channelized T1
interface or a channelized E1 interface. You can also configure ISDN PRI services on
a channelized T1 or E1 interface. The channelized T1/E1/ISDN PRI interface supports
up to 24 DS0 channels on a T1 interface and up to 31 DS0 channels on an E1
interface, in addition to supporting the features of regular (unchannelized) T1 and
E1 PIMs. Each interface can be configured as a single clear-channel, fractionalized,
or channelized interface.

NOTE: You cannot configure a channelized T1/E1/ISDN PRI interface through a J-Web
Quick Configuration page.

Field-Replaceable PIMs

■

JUNOS Software with Enhanced Services Hardware Guide

Figure 31: Channelized T1/E1/ISDN PRI PIM

The Dual-Port Channelized T1/E1/ISDN PRI PIM provides the following key features:
■

Onboard network processor

■

Two-port channelization

■

Interfaces that are software configurable as T1 or E1 channels or ISDN PRI
B-channels

■

Clear-channel, fractional, and channelized operation

■

Lower latency due to the addition of a Freescale processor

■

Maximum MTU value of 4500 bytes (for channelized T1 or E1 interface) and
4098 bytes (for ISDN PRI services)

NOTE: For a clear-channel T1 or E1 interface, the maximum MTU is 9150 bytes.

■

56-Kbps and 64-Kbps modes

■

ANSI T1.102, T1.107, and T1.403 standards compliance

■

G.703, G.704, and G.706 E1 standards compliance

■

Independent internal and external clocking system

■

Loopback, bit error rate test (BERT), T1 facilities data link (FDL), and long buildout
diagnostics

For pinouts of cable connectors for channelized T1/E1/ISDN PRI PIMs, see “ISDN
RJ-45 Connector Pinout” on page 195.
To install or remove a PIM, see “Replacing a PIM” on page 120.
Channelized T1/E1/ISDN PRI LEDs indicate PIM and port status. Table 27 on page
51 describes the meaning of the LED states.

NOTE: The STATUS LED displays channelized T1 or E1 port activity and alarms only.
It does not display ISDN PRI B-channel or D-channel status.

■

Field-Replaceable PIMs

Chapter 3: PIM Overview

Table 27: LEDs for Channelized T1/E1/ISDN PRI PIMs
Label

Color

State

Description

ONLINE

Green

On steadily

PIM is online and
operational.

Unlit

Off

PIM is not online.

Green

On steadily

Port is online with no
alarms or failures, and
the physical layer is
active.

Red

Online

Port is active with a
local alarm. The
router has detected a
failure and the
physical layer is
inactive.

Yellow

Online

Port is online with
alarms for remote
failures.

Unlit

Offline

Port is disabled.

STATUS

For alarms, see the configuring and monitoring alarms information in the JUNOS
Software Administration Guide.

T3 or E3 PIM
The T3 (also known as DS3) PIM (Figure 32 on page 51) and E3 PIM
(Figure 33 on page 52) provide a physical connection to T3 or E3 network media
types. The T3 and E3 PIMs include one physical T3 or E3 port with an integrated
data service unit (DSU).
Figure 32: T3 PIM

Field-Replaceable PIMs

■

JUNOS Software with Enhanced Services Hardware Guide

Figure 33: E3 PIM

The T3 and E3 PIMs provide the following key features:
■

Onboard network processor

■

Integrated DSU—Eliminates the need for a separate external device

■

Subrate and scrambling options with support for major DSU vendors

■

Independent internal and external clocking system

■

Loopback (payload–supported only on T3 PIM, local, and remote), bit error rate
test (BERT), and T3 far-end alarm and control (FEAC) diagnostics

For pinouts of cable connectors for T3 and E3 PIMs, see “E3 and T3 BNC Connector
Pinout” on page 194.
To install or remove a PIM, see “Replacing a PIM” on page 120.
Status LEDs indicate port status. Table 28 on page 52 describes the meaning of the
LED states.
Table 28: Status LEDs for T3 and E3 Ports
Color

State

Description

Green

On steadily

Online with no alarms or failures.

Red

On steadily

Active with a local alarm. The router has
detected a failure.

Yellow

On steadily

■

Loopback mode.

■

T3 (DS3)—Remote endpoint is in red
alarm failure.

■

E3—Remote defect indication (RDI).

Unlit

Off

Offline.

For alarms, see the configuring and monitoring alarms information in the JUNOS
Software Administration Guide.

■

Field-Replaceable PIMs

Chapter 3: PIM Overview

Dual-Port Fast Ethernet PIM
The Dual-Port 10/100-Mbps Fast Ethernet PIM (Figure 34 on page 53) has two physical
Fast Ethernet ports.
Figure 34: Fast Ethernet PIM

The Dual-Port Fast Ethernet PIM provides the following key features:
■

Onboard network processor

■

Full-duplex and half-duplex modes

■

Media access control (MAC) address filtering

■

Autonegotiation through medium-dependent interface (MDI) and MDI crossover
(MDI–X) support

For pinouts of cable connectors for Fast Ethernet PIMs, see “Fast Ethernet RJ-45
Connector Pinout” on page 189.
To install or remove a PIM, see “Replacing a PIM” on page 120.
Fast Ethernet LEDs indicate link status, port speed, and activity. Table 29 on page
53 describes the meaning of the LEDs.
Table 29: LEDs for Dual-Port Fast Ethernet PIM
Label

Color

State

Description

LINK/SPEED

Green (100 Mbps)

On steadily

Online and link is active.

Red

Disconnected

Link is unavailable.

Green

Blinking

Online with network traffic.

Green

On steadily

Online without traffic.

Yellow (10 Mbps)

ACTIVITY

For alarms, see the configuring and monitoring alarms information in the JUNOS
Software Administration Guide.

Field-Replaceable PIMs

■

JUNOS Software with Enhanced Services Hardware Guide

4-Port Fast Ethernet ePIM
You can install 4-Port Fast Ethernet ePIMs in any of the high-speed slots, as follows:
■

J4350—Install up to two 4-Port Fast Ethernet ePIMs in slots 3 and 6.

■

J6350—Install up to four 4-Port Fast Ethernet ePIMs in slots 2, 3, 5, and 6.

NOTE: For 4-port Fast Ethernet ePIMs, if you apply a CoS scheduler map on outgoing
(egress) traffic, the router does not divide the bandwidth appropriately among the
CoS queues. As a workaround, configure enforced CoS shaping on the ports.
The 4-Port 10/100-Mbps Fast Ethernet ePIM, shown in Figure 35 on page 54, has
four physical Fast Ethernet ports.
Figure 35: 4-Port Fast Ethernet ePIM

The 4-Port Fast Ethernet ePIM provides the following key features:
■

Full-duplex and half-duplex modes.

■

Autonegotiation through medium-dependent interface (MDI) and MDI crossover
(MDI–X) support.

For pinouts of cable connectors for Fast Ethernet ePIMs, see “Fast Ethernet RJ-45
Connector Pinout” on page 189.

NOTE: 4-port Fast Ethernet ePIMs support a maximum frame size of 1514 bytes.
Jumbo frames are not supported.
For information about installing and removing a PIM, see “Replacing a
PIM” on page 120.
Fast Ethernet LEDs indicate link status and activity. Table 30 on page 55 describes
the meaning of the LEDs.

■

Field-Replaceable PIMs

Chapter 3: PIM Overview

Table 30: LEDs for 4-Port Fast Ethernet ePIM
Label

Color

State

Description

Link status (upper
left)

Green

On steadily

Port is online.

Unlit

Off

Port is offline.

Green

Blinking

Port is transmitting or receiving
data.

Unlit

Off

Port might be online, but it is not
transmitting or receiving data.

Link activity (upper
right)

For alarms, see the configuring and monitoring alarms information in the JUNOS
Software Administration Guide.

4-Port ISDN BRI PIMs
The 4-port ISDN BRI PIMs have four physical ports that support the ISDN BRI S/T
(Figure 36 on page 55) or ISDN BRI U (Figure 37 on page 55) interface type.
Figure 36: ISDN BRI S/T PIM

Figure 37: ISDN BRI U PIM

ISDN BRI PIMs provide the following key features:
■

Onboard network processor

■

Bandwidth on demand

Field-Replaceable PIMs

■

JUNOS Software with Enhanced Services Hardware Guide

■

Dial backup

■

Dial-on-demand routing backup (floating static and dialer watch)

For pinouts of cable connectors for ISDN PIMs, see “ISDN RJ-45 Connector
Pinout” on page 195.
To install or remove a PIM, see “Replacing a PIM” on page 120.
ISDN LEDs indicate PIM and port status. Table 31 on page 56 describes the meaning
of the LED states.
Table 31: LEDs for ISDN BRI S/T and U PIMs
Label

Color

State

Description

ONLINE

Green

Blinking

Call setup is successful on either the B1 or B2
channel.

Green

On steadily

ISDN Layer 2 is active.

Amber

On steadily

■

ISDN Layer 1 is active.

■

ISDN Layer 2 is unavailable.

■

BRI interface port is not connected.

■

ISDN Layer 1 is unavailable.

Red

STATUS

Disconnected

Unlit

Off

BRI interface is offline.

Green

On steadily

PIM is online and operational.

Red

Disconnected

PIM is not operational and needs replacement.

Unlit

Off

PIM is offline.

For alarms, see the configuring and monitoring alarms information in the JUNOS
Software Administration Guide.

ADSL PIM
The ADSL PIM provides a single physical interface to asymmetric digital subscriber
line (ADSL) network media types. The ADSL PIM, one supporting Annex A
(Figure 38 on page 57) over plain old telephone service (POTS) and the other Annex B
(Figure 39 on page 57) over ISDN, includes one physical ADSL port for an
ATM-over-ADSL connection.

■

Field-Replaceable PIMs

Chapter 3: PIM Overview

Figure 38: ADSL 2/2+ Annex A PIM

Figure 39: ADSL 2/2+ Annex B PIM

The ADSL PIM provides the following key features:
■

Onboard network processor

■

ADSL, ADSL2, and ADSL2+ protocols on the same PIM

■

“Dying gasp” notification

■

Asynchronous Transfer Mode (ATM) Adaptation Layer 5 (AAL5) encapsulation

For pinouts of cable connectors for ADSL PIMs, see “ADSL and G.SHDSL RJ-11
Connector Pinout” on page 194.
To install or remove a PIM, see “Replacing a PIM” on page 120.
The ADSL PIMs have two LEDs to indicate the status of the PIM and its port.
Table 32 on page 57 describes the meaning of the LED states.
Table 32: LEDs for ADSL PIMs
Label

Color

State

Description

ONLINE

Green

On steadily

PIM passed the self-test and is online and
operational.

Unlit

Off

PIM is offline.

Green

On steadily

Online with no alarms or failures.

Red

On steadily

Active with local or remote alarms. The router
has detected a failure.

STATUS

Field-Replaceable PIMs

■

JUNOS Software with Enhanced Services Hardware Guide

For alarms, see the configuring and monitoring alarms information in the JUNOS
Software Administration Guide.

G.SHDSL PIM
The G.SHDSL PIM (Figure 40 on page 58) provides symmetric high-speed digital
subscriber line (SHDSL) physical interfaces to ATM network media types. The G.SHDSL
PIM has two ports for ATM-over-SHDSL connections.
Figure 40: G.SHDSL PIM

The G.SHDSL PIM supports the following key features:
■

Onboard network processor

■

2-port two-wire mode and 1-port four-wire mode

■

Programmable line rates in both modes:
■

2-port two-wire mode supports autodetection of line rate and fixed line rates
from 192 Kbps to 2.304 Mbps in 64-Kbps increments.

■

1-port four-wire mode supports fixed line rates from 384 Kbps to 4.608 Mbps
in 128-Kbps increments.

■

32 virtual channels per PIM

■

ATM-over-G.SHDSL framing

■

“Dying gasp” notification

■

Local and remote loopback diagnostics

■

ITU-T G.991.2, ITU-T G.994.1, and ITU-T G.997.1 standards compliance

NOTE: Payload loopback functionality is not supported on ATM-over-SHDSL interfaces.
For pinouts of cable connectors for G.SHDSL PIMs, see “ADSL and G.SHDSL RJ-11
Connector Pinout” on page 194.
To install or remove a PIM, see “Replacing a PIM” on page 120.
The G.SHDSL PIM has two LEDs to indicate the status of the PIM and its ports.
Table 33 on page 59 describes the meaning of the LED states.

■

Field-Replaceable PIMs

Chapter 3: PIM Overview

Table 33: LEDs for G.SHDSL PIMs
Label

Color

State

Description

ONLINE

Green

On steadily

Online with no alarms or failures.

Red

Disconnected

Initialization of the PIM has failed.

Unlit

Off

PIM is booting.

Green

On steadily

Online with no alarms or failures.

Red

On steadily

Active with a local alarm. The router has detected a
failure.

STATUS

For alarms, see the configuring and monitoring alarms information in the JUNOS
Software Administration Guide.

Field-Replaceable PIMs

■

JUNOS Software with Enhanced Services Hardware Guide

■

Field-Replaceable PIMs

Part 2

Installing a Services Router
■

Preparing for Router Installation on page 63

■

Installing and Connecting a Services Router on page 77

■

Establishing Basic Connectivity on page 91

■

Installing JUNOS Software with Enhanced Services on page 115

Installing a Services Router

■

JUNOS Software with Enhanced Services Hardware Guide

■

Installing a Services Router

Chapter 4

Preparing for Router Installation
Before installing a J-series Services Router, make sure that your site has the proper
operating environment and equipment. Use the checklist at the end of the chapter
to help you prepare your site.
This chapter discusses the following topics:
■

General Site Guidelines on page 63

■

Rack Requirements on page 64

■

Router Environmental Tolerances on page 66

■

Fire Safety Requirements on page 66

■

Power Guidelines, Requirements, and Specifications on page 67

■

Network Cable Specifications on page 74

■

ISDN Provisioning on page 74

■

Site Preparation Checklist on page 75

General Site Guidelines
The following precautions help you plan an acceptable operating environment for
your Services Router and avoid environmentally caused equipment failures:
■

For the cooling system to function properly, the airflow around the chassis must
be unrestricted. Ensure that there is adequate circulation in the installation
location. In J2320 and J2350 routers, allow at least 6 in. (15.2 cm) of clearance
between the left and right sides of the chassis and adjacent equipment. In J4350
and J6350 routers, allow at least 6 in. (15.2 cm) of clearance between the front
and back of the chassis and adjacent equipment.

■

Follow ESD procedures described in “Preventing Electrostatic Discharge
Damage” on page 201, to avoid damaging equipment. Static discharge can cause
components to fail completely or intermittently over time.

■

Install blank PIM panels in empty slots, to prevent any interruption or reduction
in the flow of air across internal components.

General Site Guidelines

■

JUNOS Software with Enhanced Services Hardware Guide

Rack Requirements
J-series Services Routers must be installed in a rack. Many types of racks are
acceptable, including front-mount racks, four-post (telco) racks, and center-mount
racks.
The following sections describe rack requirements:
■

Rack Size and Strength for J2320 and J2350 Routers on page 64

■

Rack Size and Strength for J4350 and J6350 Routers on page 65

■

Connection to Building Structure on page 65

Rack Size and Strength for J2320 and J2350 Routers
The J2320 and J2350 Services Routers are designed for installation in a rack that
complies with either of the following standards:
■

A 19-in. rack as defined in Cabinets, Racks, Panels, and Associated Equipment
(document number EIA-310-D) published by the Electronics Industry Association
(http://www.eia.org)

■

A 600-mm rack as defined in the four-part Equipment Engineering (EE); European
telecommunications standard for equipment practice (document numbers ETS 300
119-1 through 119-4) published by the European Telecommunications Standards
Institute (http://www.etsi.org)
The horizontal spacing between the rails in a rack that complies with this standard
is usually wider than the router's mounting ears, which measure 19 in. (48.2 cm)
from outer edge to outer edge. Use approved wing devices to narrow the opening
between the rails as required.

The rack rails must be spaced widely enough to accommodate the router chassis's
external dimensions:
■

J2320 chassis—1.75 in. (4.45 cm) high, 17.51 in. (44.48 cm) wide, and 15.1 in.
(38.35 cm) deep.

■

J2350 chassis—2.61 in. (6.63 cm) high, 17.51 in. (44.48 cm) wide, and 15.1 in.
(38.35 cm) deep.

The outer edges of the mounting ears extend the width of either chassis to 19 in.
(48.2 cm), and the front of the chassis extends approximately 0.78 in. (1.98 cm)
beyond the mounting ears. The spacing of rails and adjacent racks must also allow
for the clearances around the router and rack. (See “General Site
Guidelines” on page 63.)

CAUTION: If you are mounting the router in a cabinet, be sure that ventilation is
sufficient to prevent overheating.
If a front-mount rack is used, we recommend supporting the back of the router with
a shelf or other structure.

■

Rack Requirements

Chapter 4: Preparing for Router Installation

The J2320 chassis height of 1.75 in. (4.45 cm) equals 1 U. The J2350 chassis height
of 2.61 in. (6.63 cm) equals 1.5 U. Each U is a standard rack unit defined in Cabinets,
Racks, Panels, and Associated Equipment (document number EIA-310-D) published
by the Electronics Industry Association.

Rack Size and Strength for J4350 and J6350 Routers
The Services Router is designed for installation in a rack that complies with either
of the following standards:
■

A 19-in. rack as defined in Cabinets, Racks, Panels, and Associated Equipment
(document number EIA-310-D) published by the Electronics Industry Association
(http://www.eia.org)

■

The rack rails must be spaced widely enough to accommodate the router chassis's
external dimensions: 3.44 in. (8.74 cm) high, 17.44 in. (44.3 cm) wide, and 21.13
in. (53.67 cm) deep.
The outer edges of the mounting ears extend the width of either chassis to 19.44 in.
(48.38 cm), and the front of the chassis extends approximately 0.5 in. (1.27 cm)
beyond the mounting ears. The spacing of rails and adjacent racks must also allow
for the clearances around the router and rack. (See “General Site
Guidelines” on page 63.)

The J4350 and J6350 chassis height of 3.44 in. (8.74 cm) equals 2 U. Each U is a
standard rack unit defined in Cabinets, Racks, Panels, and Associated Equipment
(document number EIA-310-D) published by the Electronics Industry Association.

Connection to Building Structure
Always secure the rack to the structure of the building. If your geographical area is
subject to earthquakes, bolt the rack to the floor. For maximum stability, also secure
the rack to ceiling brackets. For more information, see “Rack-Mounting Requirements
and Warnings” on page 217.

Rack Requirements

■

JUNOS Software with Enhanced Services Hardware Guide

Router Environmental Tolerances
Table 34 on page 66 specifies the environmental conditions required for normal
Services Router operation. In addition, the site must be as dust-free as possible. Dust
can clog air intake vents, reducing cooling system efficiency. Check vents frequently,
cleaning them as necessary.
Table 34: Router Environmental Tolerances
Description

Value

Altitude

No performance degradation to 10,000 ft (3048 m)

Relative humidity

Normal operation ensured in relative humidity range of 5% to
90%, noncondensing

Temperature

Normal operation ensured in temperature range of 0°C (32°F) to
40°C (104°F)
Non-operating storage temperature in shipping carton:
–40°C (–40°F) to 70°C (158°F)

Seismic

Designed to meet Telcordia Technologies Zone 4 earthquake
requirements

Maximum thermal output

■

J2320 chassis: 1091 BTU/hour (320 W)

■

J2350 chassis: 1195 BTU/hour (350 W)

■

J4350 chassis: 1092 BTU/hour (320 W)

■

J6350 chassis: 1126 BTU/hour (330 W)

Fire Safety Requirements
In the event of a fire emergency involving Services Routers and other network
equipment, the safety of people is the primary concern. Establish procedures for
protecting people in the event of a fire emergency, provide safety training, and
properly provision fire-control equipment and fire extinguishers.
In addition, establish procedures to protect your equipment in the event of a fire
emergency. Juniper Networks products must be installed in an environment suitable
for electronic equipment. We recommend that fire suppression equipment be available
in the event of a fire in the vicinity of the equipment, and that all local fire, safety,
and electrical codes and ordinances be observed when you are installing and operating
your equipment.

Fire Suppression
In the event of an electrical hazard or an electrical fire, first unplug the power cord.
(For shutdown instructions, see “Powering a Services Router On and Off” on page 89.)

■

Router Environmental Tolerances

Chapter 4: Preparing for Router Installation

Then, use a Type C fire extinguisher, which uses noncorrosive fire retardants, to
extinguish the fire. For more information about fire extinguishers, see “Fire
Suppression Equipment” on page 67.

Fire Suppression Equipment
Type C fire extinguishers, which use noncorrosive fire retardants such as carbon
dioxide (CO2) and Halotron, are most effective for suppressing electrical fires. Type
C fire extinguishers displace the oxygen from the point of combustion to eliminate
the fire. For extinguishing fire on or around equipment that draws air from the
environment for cooling, use this type of inert oxygen displacement extinguisher
instead of an extinguisher that leave residues on equipment.
Do not use multipurpose Type ABC chemical fire extinguishers (dry chemical fire
extinguishers) near Juniper Networks equipment. The primary ingredient in these
fire extinguishers is monoammonium phosphate, which is very sticky and difficult
to clean. In addition, in minute amounts of moisture, monoammonium phosphate
can become highly corrosive and corrodes most metals.

NOTE: To keep warranties effective, do not use a dry chemical fire extinguisher to
control a fire at or near a Juniper Networks router. If a dry chemical fire extinguisher
is used, the unit is no longer eligible for coverage under a service agreement.
Any equipment in a room in which a chemical fire extinguisher has been discharged
is subject to premature failure and unreliable operation. The equipment is considered
to be irreparably damaged.
We recommend that you dispose of any irreparably damaged equipment in an
environmentally responsible manner.

Power Guidelines, Requirements, and Specifications
All Services Routers are available with AC power. J2350, J4350, and J6350 routers
are also available with DC power. For information about each router's power system,
see “J4350 Power System” on page 30 and “J6350 Power System” on page 31.
For site wiring and power system guidelines, requirements, and specifications, see
the following sections:
■

Site Electrical Wiring Guidelines on page 68

■

Router Power Requirements on page 69

■

AC Power, Connection, and Power Cord Specifications on page 69

■

DC Power, Connection, and Power Cable Specifications on page 71

■

Planning for Power Management on page 72

Power Guidelines, Requirements, and Specifications

■

JUNOS Software with Enhanced Services Hardware Guide

Site Electrical Wiring Guidelines
WARNING: Certain ports on the router are designed for use as intrabuilding
(within-the-building) interfaces only (Type 2 or Type 4 ports as described in
GR-1089-CORE, Issue 4) and require isolation from the exposed outside plant (OSP)
cabling. To comply with NEBS requirements and protect against lightening surges
and commercial power disturbances, the intrabuilding ports must not be metallically
connected to interfaces that connect to the OSP or its wiring. The intrabuilding ports
on the router are suitable for connection to intrabuilding or unexposed wiring or
cabling only. The addition of primary protectors is not sufficient protection for
connecting these interfaces metallically to OSP wiring.

WARNING: DC-powered J2350, J4350 and J6350 Services Routers are intended for
installation only in a restricted access location.
When planning the electrical wiring at your site, consider the factors discussed in
the following sections.

Signaling Limitations
Improperly installed wires can emit radio interference. In addition, the potential for
damage from lightning strikes increases if wires exceed recommended distances, or
if wires pass between buildings. The electromagnetic pulse (EMP) caused by lightning
can damage unshielded conductors and destroy electronic devices. If your site has
previously experienced such problems, you might want to consult experts in electrical
surge suppression and shielding.

Radio Frequency Interference
You can reduce or eliminate the emission of radio frequency interference (RFI) from
your site wiring by using twisted-pair cable with a good distribution of grounding
conductors. If you must exceed the recommended distances, use a high-quality
twisted-pair cable with one ground conductor for each data signal when applicable.

Electromagnetic Compatibility
If your site is susceptible to problems with electromagnetic compatibility (EMC),
particularly from lightning or radio transmitters, you might want to seek expert
advice. Strong sources of electromagnetic interference (EMI) can destroy the signal
drivers and receivers in the router and conduct power surges over the lines into the
equipment, resulting in an electrical hazard. It is particularly important to provide a
properly grounded and shielded environment and to use electrical surge-suppression
devices.

■

Power Guidelines, Requirements, and Specifications

Chapter 4: Preparing for Router Installation

CAUTION: To comply with intrabuilding lightning/surge requirements, intrabuilding
wiring must be shielded, and the shield for the wiring must be grounded at both
ends.

Router Power Requirements
Table 35 on page 69 and Table 36 on page 69 list the AC and DC power system
electrical specifications for Services Routers.
Table 35: AC and DC Power System Electrical Specifications for J2320 and J2350 Routers
Item

Specification

AC input voltage

100 to 240 VAC nominal

AC input line frequency

50 to 60 Hz

AC system current rating

J2320 Services Routers: 3.2 A to 1.3 A
J2350 Services Routers: 3.5 A to 1.5 A

DC input voltage

–48 to –60 VDC operating range

DC system current rating

7.2 A

Table 36: AC and DC Power System Electrical Specifications for J4350 and J6350 Routers
Item

Specification

AC input voltage

100 to 240 VAC nominal

AC input line frequency

50 to 60 Hz

AC system current rating

J4350 Services Routers: 6 A
J6350 Services Routers: 8 A

DC input voltage

–48 to –60 VDC operating range

DC system current rating

20 A

AC Power, Connection, and Power Cord Specifications
NOTE: The AC power cord for the Services Router is intended for use with the router
only and not for any other use.

Power Guidelines, Requirements, and Specifications

■

JUNOS Software with Enhanced Services Hardware Guide

Detachable AC power cords, each 2.5 m (approximately 8 ft) long, are supplied with
the Services Router. The appliance coupler at the female end of the cord inserts into
the appliance inlet on the faceplate of the AC power supply. The coupler is type C19
as described by International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC) standard 60320.
The plug at the male end of the power cord fits into the power source receptacle that
is standard for your geographical location.

NOTE: In North America, AC power cords must not exceed 4.5 m (approximately
14.75 ft) in. length, to comply with National Electrical Code (NEC) Sections 400-8
(NFPA 75, 5-2.2) and 210-52, and Canadian Electrical Code (CEC) Section 4-010(3).
The cords supplied with the router are in compliance.
Table 37 on page 70 lists AC power cord specifications provided for each country or
region.
Table 37: AC Power Cord Specifications
Country

Electrical Specifications

Plug Standards

Australia

250 VAC, 10 A, 50 Hz

AS/NZ 3112–1993

China

250 VAC, 10 A, 50 Hz

GB2099.1 1996 and GB1002 1996 (CH1-10P)

Europe (except Italy and
United Kingdom)

250 VAC, 10 A, 50 Hz

CEE (7) VII

Italy

250 VAC, 10 A, 50 Hz

CEI 23–16/VII

Japan

125 VAC, 12 A, 50 Hz or 60 Hz

JIS 8303

North America

125 VAC, 10 A, 60 Hz

NEMA 5-15

United Kingdom

250 VAC, 10 A, 50 Hz

BS 1363A

Figure 41 on page 70 illustrates the plug on the power cord for each country or region
listed in Table 37 on page 70.
Figure 41: AC Plug Types

NOTE: Power cords and cables must not block access to router components or drape
where people might trip on them.

■

Power Guidelines, Requirements, and Specifications

Chapter 4: Preparing for Router Installation

For information about the AC power supply, see “J2320 Power System” on page 18,
“J2350 Power System” on page 18, “J4350 Power System” on page 30 or “J6350
Power System” on page 31.
To connect the power cord during initial installation, see “Connecting
Power” on page 84.
To replace the AC power cord, see “Replacing AC Power Supply Cords” on page 139.

DC Power, Connection, and Power Cable Specifications
Each DC power supply has a single DC input (–48 VDC and return) that requires a
dedicated circuit breaker:
■

J2350 routers—minimum 15 A (–48 VDC)

■

J4350 and J6350 routers—minimum 25 A (–48 VDC)

If the J6350 router contains redundant DC power supplies, one power supply must
be powered by a dedicated power feed derived from feed A, and the other power
supply must be powered by a dedicated power feed derived from feed B. This
configuration provides the commonly deployed A/B feed redundancy for the system.
Most sites distribute DC power through a main conduit that leads to frame-mounted
DC power distribution panels, one of which might be located at the top of the rack
that houses the router. A pair of cables (one input and one return) connects each set
of terminal studs to the power distribution panel.

CAUTION: You must ensure that power connections maintain the proper polarity.
The power source cables might be labeled (+) and (–) to indicate their polarity. There
is no standard color coding for DC power cables. The color coding used by the external
DC power source at your site determines the color coding for the leads on the power
cables that attach to the terminal studs on each power supply.

WARNING: Power plant ground and chassis ground must be connected to the same
building ground.

CAUTION: Before router installation begins, a licensed electrician must attach a cable
lug to the grounding and power cables that you supply. A cable with an incorrectly
attached lug can damage the router.
Each DC power cable (–48 VDC and return) must be 14 AWG single-strand wire cable,
or as permitted by the local code. Each lug attached to the power cables must be a
ring-type, vinyl-insulated TV14-6R lug, or equivalent.

Power Guidelines, Requirements, and Specifications

■

JUNOS Software with Enhanced Services Hardware Guide

NOTE: Power cords and cables must not block access to router components or drape
where people might trip on them.
For information about the DC power supply, see “J2350 Power System” on page 18,
“J4350 Power System” on page 30 or “J6350 Power System” on page 31.
To connect the DC power cable during initial installation, see “Connecting DC
Power” on page 86.
To replace a DC power cable, see “Replacing DC Power Supply Cables” on page 142.

Planning for Power Management
Before you install a chassis or add a new PIM to an existing chassis, verify that the
combination of PIMs and modules (PIMs or PIMs plus a WXC Integrated Services
Module) to be installed does not exceed the power and heat capacities for that model.
Add the low-power tokens, high-power tokens, and heat tokens required by each
PIM, and compare them to the capacity of the chassis.

NOTE: The low power and high power correspond to a specific voltage for that PIM.

CAUTION: Do not install a combination of modules in a single chassis that exceeds
the maximum power and heat capacity of the chassis. If J-series power management
is enabled, PIMs and modules (PIMs or PIMs plus a WXC Integrated Services Module)
that exceed the maximum power and heat capacity remain offline when the chassis
is powered on.
To verify that the combination of PIMs to be installed in a chassis does not exceed
the power and heat capacities for that model:
1.

Check Table 38 on page 73 to determine the token values for low-power,
high-power, and heat for each PIM that you plan to install in the chassis.

For all PIMs to be installed in the chassis:

Add the low-power tokens for all PIMs to be installed in the chassis.

Add the high-power tokens for all PIMs to be installed in the chassis.

Add the heat dissipation tokens for all PIMs to be installed in the chassis.

Verify that the total number of low-power tokens, total number of high-power
tokens, and the total number of heat dissipation tokens do not exceed the
maximums permitted for your J-series chassis as specified in Table 39 on page 74.

Table 38 on page 73 shows the low-power consumption, high-power consumption,
and heat dissipation, represented in non-dimensional tokens, assigned to each J-series
PIM.

■

Power Guidelines, Requirements, and Specifications

Chapter 4: Preparing for Router Installation

Table 38: J-series PIM Power Consumption and Heat Dissipation
Name

Model Number

PIM Abbreviation
in JUNOS CLI

Tokens
Low Power

High Power

Heat

1-Port Gigabit
Ethernet uPIM

JXU-SFP-S

1xSFP uPIM

–

6-Port Gigabit
Ethernet uPIM

JXU-6GE-SFP-S

6xSFP uPIM

–

8-Port Gigabit
Ethernet uPIM

JXU-8GE-TX-S

8xGE uPIM

–

16-Port Gigabit
Ethernet uPIM

JXU-16GE-TX-S

16xGE uPIM

–

1-Port Copper
Gigabit Ethernet
ePIM

JXE-1GE-TX-S

1xGE Copper

–

1-Port SFP Gigabit
Ethernet ePIM

JXE-1GE-SFP-S

1xGE SFP

–

Dual-Port Serial
PIM

JX-2Serial-S

2xSerial

–

Dual-Port E1 PIM

JX-2E1-RJ48-S

2xE1

–

Dual-Port T1 PIM

JX-2T1-RJ48-S

2xT1

–

Dual-Port
Channelized
T1/E1/ISDN PRI
PIM

JX-2CT1E1-RJ45-S

2xCT1E1 / PRI

–

E3 PIM (1 port)

JX-1E3-S

1xE3

–

T3 PIM (also
known as DS3)

JX-1DS3-S

1xT3

–

Dual-Port Fast
Ethernet PIM

JX-2FE-TX-S

2xFE

4-Port Fast
Ethernet ePIM

JXE-4FE-TX-S

4xFE ePIM

–

4-Port ISDN BRI
S/T PIM

JX-4BRI-S-S

4x BRI S/T

–

4-Port ISDN BRI U
PIM

JX-4BRI-U-S

4x BRI U

–

ADSL 2/2+
Annex A PIM
(1 port, for POTS)

JX-1ADSL-A-S

1x ADSL Annex A

Power Guidelines, Requirements, and Specifications

■

JUNOS Software with Enhanced Services Hardware Guide

Table 38: J-series PIM Power Consumption and Heat Dissipation (continued)
Name

Model Number

PIM Abbreviation
in JUNOS CLI

Tokens
Low Power

High Power

Heat

ADSL 2/2+
Annex B PIM
(1 port, for ISDN)

JX-1ADSL-B-S

1x ADSL Annex B

G.SHDSL PIM
(2-port two-wire
mode or 1-port
four-wire mode)

JX-2SHDSL-S

2x SHDSL (ATM)

–

WXC Integrated
Services Module

ISM-200–WXC

wan-acceleration

Table 39 on page 74 lists the maximum power tokens and maximum heat tokens
available for each model.
Table 39: Maximum Power and Heat Capacities of J-series Models
Model

Low- Power Capacity
(tokens)

High- Power Capacity
(tokens)

Heat Capacity (tokens)

J2320

J2350

J4350

100

J6350

100

Network Cable Specifications
The Services Router supports interfaces that use various kinds of network cable. For
information about the type of cable used by each interface, see “Network Cable
Specifications and Connector Pinouts” on page 179.

ISDN Provisioning
You might need a network termination type 1 (NT1) device to connect your ISDN
interface to the ISDN service. Contact your service provider for details on the following
information:

■

External NT1 device and ISDN cable

■

If the two items are required, where to obtain the items

■

List of NT1 vendors

Network Cable Specifications

Chapter 4: Preparing for Router Installation

Site Preparation Checklist
The checklist in Table 40 on page 75 summarizes the tasks you need to perform
when preparing a site for Services Router installation.
Table 40: Site Preparation Checklist
Item or Task

Performed By

Date

Notes

Verify that environmental factors such as
temperature and humidity do not exceed router
tolerances.
Measure the distances between external power
sources and the router installation site.
Select the type of rack.
Plan the rack location, including required space
clearances.
Secure the rack to the floor and the building
structure.
Acquire appropriate cables and connectors.

Site Preparation Checklist

■

JUNOS Software with Enhanced Services Hardware Guide

■

Site Preparation Checklist

Chapter 5

Installing and Connecting a Services
Router
Make the appropriate preparations and verify the J-series equipment before installing
a J-series Services Router and connecting it to a power source and the network.

Before You Begin on page 77

■

Unpacking a J-series Services Router on page 78

■

Installing J2320 and J2350 Routers on page 79

■

Installing J4350 and J6350 Routers on page 80

■

Connecting Interface Cables to Services Routers on page 83

■

Chassis Grounding on page 83

■

Connecting Power on page 84

■

Powering a Services Router On and Off on page 89

Before You Begin
Before you begin installation, complete the following tasks:
■

Read the information in “Maintenance and Operational Safety Guidelines and
Warnings” on page 225, with particular attention to “Chassis Lifting
Guidelines” on page 216.

■

Determine where to install the Services Router, and verify that the rack or
installation site meets the requirements described in “Preparing for Router
Installation” on page 63.

■

For installation, gather the following equipment and tools:

Before You Begin

■

JUNOS Software with Enhanced Services Hardware Guide

■

For J2320 and J2350 Services Routers—Number 2 Phillips screwdriver, and
mounting screws appropriate for your rack.

■

For J4350 and J6350 Services Routers—Mounting brackets and screws
(provided), number 2 Phillips screwdriver, and mounting screws appropriate
for your rack.

To connect the router to power and ground, have ready a grounding cable and
lug, as specified in “Chassis Grounding” on page 83, and the power cords or
cords shipped with the router. (You must supply your own power cables if you
have a DC-powered router. See “DC Power, Connection, and Power Cable
Specifications” on page 71.)

NOTE: The AC power cord for the Services Router is intended for use with the router
only and not for any other use.

■

To connect network interfaces, have ready a length of cable used by the interface,
as specified in “Network Cable Specifications and Connector Pinouts” on page 179.

■

If your router has ISDN ports, you might need an NT1 device to connect to the
ISDN service. For details, see “ISDN Provisioning” on page 74.

Unpacking a J-series Services Router
The Services Router is shipped in a cardboard carton and secured with foam packing
material. The carton also contains an accessory box and quick start instructions.

NOTE: The router is maximally protected inside the shipping carton. Do not unpack
it until you are ready to begin installation.
To unpack the router:

■

Move the shipping carton to a staging area as close to the installation site as
possible, but where you have enough room to remove the router.

Position the carton so that the arrows are pointing up.

Open the top flaps on the shipping carton.

Remove the accessory box, and verify the contents against the parts inventory
on the label attached to the carton.

Pull out the packing material holding the router in place.

Verify the contents of the carton against the packing list included with the router.

Save the shipping carton and packing materials in case you later need to move
or ship the router.

Unpacking a J-series Services Router

Chapter 5: Installing and Connecting a Services Router

Installing J2320 and J2350 Routers
WARNING: DC-powered Services Routers are intended for installation only in a
restricted access location.
You can center-mount or front-mount the J2320 and J2350 Services Routers in a
rack. In general, a center-mount rack is preferable to a front-mount rack because the
more even distribution of weight in the center-mount rack provides greater stability.
Many types of racks are acceptable, including four-post (telco) racks, enclosed
cabinets, and open-frame racks. For more information about the type of rack or
cabinet the J-series router can be installed into, see “Rack Requirements” on page 64.

WARNING: If you are installing multiple routers in one rack, install the lowest one
first and proceed upward in the rack. Install heavier routers in the lower part of the
rack. The router must be mounted at the bottom of the rack if it is the only unit in
the rack.

WARNING: The J2320 or J2350 chassis weighs between 14.8 lb (6.7 kg) and 18.2 lb
(8.3 kg). Read and follow the lifting guidelines in “Chassis Lifting
Guidelines” on page 216.
To install the J2320 or J2350 router into a rack:
1.

If necessary, reposition the mounting brackets. You can position the brackets in
either the center or the front. Positioning the brackets in the center offers greater
stability.
J2320 and J2350 Services Routers come with mounting brackets installed on
them (see Figure 42 on page 79).

Figure 42: Mounting Brackets on J2320 and J2350 Routers

Have one person grasp the sides of the router, lift the router, and position it in
the rack.

Installing J2320 and J2350 Routers

■

JUNOS Software with Enhanced Services Hardware Guide

Align the top hole in each mounting bracket with a hole in each rack rail as shown
in Figure 43 on page 80 and Figure 44 on page 80, making sure the chassis is
level.

Figure 43: Hanging a J2320 Router in a Rack

Figure 44: Hanging a J2350 Router in a Rack

Have a second person install a mounting screw into each of the two aligned
holes. With a number 2 Phillips screwdriver, tighten the screws.

Verify that the mounting screw on one side of the rack is aligned with the
mounting screw on the opposite side and that the router is level.

Install the second screw in each mounting bracket.

Installing J4350 and J6350 Routers
WARNING: DC-powered Services Routers are intended for installation only in a
restricted access location.

■

Installing J4350 and J6350 Routers

Chapter 5: Installing and Connecting a Services Router

You can center-mount or front-mount the J4350 and J6350 Services Routers in a
rack. In general, a center-mount rack is preferable to a front-mount rack because the
more even distribution of weight in the center-mount rack provides greater stability.
Many types of racks are acceptable, including four-post (telco) racks, enclosed
cabinets, and open-frame racks. For more information about the type of rack or
cabinet the J-series router can be installed into, see “Rack Requirements” on page 64.

WARNING: The chassis weighs between 23 lb (10.4 kg) and 30.7 lb (13.9 kg). Read
and follow the lifting guidelines in “Chassis Lifting Guidelines” on page 216.
To install the J4350 or J6350 into a rack:
1.

Attach the mounting brackets to the sides of the chassis (see
Figure 45 on page 81). You can position the brackets either in the center or the
front. Positioning the brackets in the center offers greater stability.

Figure 45: Installing the Mounting Brackets

Attach a screw to each rack rail in the third hole down from where you want the
top of the router to be positioned. Screw only part way in, leaving about ¼ in.
(6 mm) distance between the screw head and the rail (see Figure 46 on page 82).

Installing J4350 and J6350 Routers

■

JUNOS Software with Enhanced Services Hardware Guide

Figure 46: Attaching the Center Screw to the Rack

Lift the router and insert the larger elliptical openings in the mounting brackets
onto the partially inserted screws so that the router is hanging from the two
screws (see Figure 47 on page 82).

Figure 47: Hanging the Router in the Rack

■

Verify that the mounting screws on one side of the rack are aligned with the
mounting screws on the opposite side and that the router is level.

Install at least two mounting screws into each mounting bracket, in addition to
the center screws from which the router hangs (see Figure 48 on page 83). Use
a number 2 Phillips screwdriver to tighten the screws.

Installing J4350 and J6350 Routers

Chapter 5: Installing and Connecting a Services Router

Figure 48: Completing the Installation

Connecting Interface Cables to Services Routers
You connect the interfaces installed in the Services Router to various network media.
For more information about the network interfaces supported on the router, see the
JUNOS Software Interfaces and Routing Configuration Guide.
1.

Have ready a length of the type of cable used by the interface, as specified in
“Network Cable Specifications and Connector Pinouts” on page 179.

Insert the cable connector into the cable connector port on the interface faceplate.

Arrange the cable as follows to prevent it from dislodging or developing stress
points:
a.

Secure the cable so that it is not supporting its own weight as it hangs to the
floor.

Place excess cable out of the way in a neatly coiled loop.

Place fasteners on the loop to help maintain its shape.

Chassis Grounding
To meet safety and electromagnetic interference (EMI) requirements and to ensure
proper operation, the Services Router must be adequately grounded before power
is connected. In addition to the grounding pin on the AC power plug cord, a threaded
insert (PEM nut), screw, and washer are provided on the rear of the chassis to connect
the router to earth ground.

Connecting Interface Cables to Services Routers

■

JUNOS Software with Enhanced Services Hardware Guide

■

For J2320 and J2350 Services Routers—The grounding cables must be, at
minimum, 14 AWG single-strand wire cable. The grounding lug must be a
ring-type, vinyl-insulated TV14-8R lug as shown in Figure 49 on page 85 and
Figure 50 on page 86.

■

For J4350 and J6350 Services Routers—The grounding cables must be, at
minimum, 12 AWG single-strand wire cable. The grounding lug must be a
two-hole lug as shown in Figure 51 on page 86.

To ground the router before connecting power, you connect the grounding cable to
earth ground and then attach the lug on the cable to the chassis grounding point,
with the screw. (See “Connecting Power” on page 84.)

Connecting Power
J2320, J2350 and J4350 Services Routers have a single fixed power supply. J6350
Services Routers have one or two field-replaceable power supplies. For more
information about the J-series power specifications, see “Power Guidelines,
Requirements, and Specifications” on page 67.

WARNING: DC-powered Services Routers are intended for installation only in a
restricted access location.

Connecting AC Power
The router must be connected to earth ground during normal operation. The protective
earthing terminal on the rear of the chassis is provided to connect the router to
ground. Additional grounding is provided to an AC-powered router when you plug
its power supply into a grounded AC power receptacle.
The AC power cord shipped with the router connects the router to earth ground when
plugged into an AC grounding-type power outlet. The router must be connected to
earth ground during normal operation.
For power cord requirements, see “AC Power, Connection, and Power Cord
Specifications” on page 69.
To connect AC power to the router:

■

Connecting Power

Attach an electrostatic discharge (ESD) grounding strap to your bare wrist, and
connect the strap to the ESD point on the chassis. For more information about
ESD, see “Preventing Electrostatic Discharge Damage” on page 201.

Use a grounding cable to connect the router to earth ground: (For cable
requirements, see “Chassis Grounding” on page 83.)
a.

Verify that a licensed electrician has attached an appropriate grounding cable
lug to the grounding cable.

Connect one end of the grounding cable to a proper earth ground, such as
the rack in which the router is installed.

Chapter 5: Installing and Connecting a Services Router

With a Phillips screwdriver, remove the screw and washer from the PEM
nuts at the grounding point on the rear of the chassis.

Place the grounding lug at the other end of the cable over the grounding
point, as shown in Figure 49 on page 85 through Figure 51 on page 86.

Secure the cable lug to the grounding point, first with the washer, then with
the screw. On J2320 and J2350 routers, use the screw containing a captive
washer to secure the cable lug to the grounding point.

Locate the power cord or cords shipped with the router, which has a plug
appropriate for your geographical location. For power cord specifications, see
“Power Guidelines, Requirements, and Specifications” on page 67.

For the power supply:
a.

Insert the appliance coupler end of a power cord into the appliance inlet on
the power supply faceplate, as shown in Figure 49 on page 85 through
Figure 51 on page 86.

Insert the plug into an AC power source receptacle.

Verify that the power cord does not block access to router components or drape
where people can trip on it.

On J2320 and J2350 routers, use the power cable tie as follows to relieve strain
on the cable (see Figure 49 on page 85 and Figure 50 on page 86):
a.

Wrap the loose end of the tie around the cable, and insert it into the opening
on the tie.

Pull the end to tighten the tie.

To release the tie from the cable, press down the tab on the tie and loosen it.

Figure 49: Connecting AC Power to the J2320 Services Router

Connecting Power

■

JUNOS Software with Enhanced Services Hardware Guide

Figure 50: Connecting AC Power to the J2350 Services Router

Figure 51: Connecting AC Power to the J4350 or J6350 Services Router

Connecting DC Power
CAUTION: If your J6350 Services Router includes an optional redundant DC power
supply, connect each of the two power supplies to different input power sources.
Failure to do so makes the router susceptible to total power failure if one of the power
supplies fails.
The router must be connected to earth ground during normal operation. The protective
earthing terminal on the rear of the chassis is provided to connect the router to
ground.
For DC cable requirements, see “DC Power, Connection, and Power Cable
Specifications” on page 71.
To connect DC power to the router:

■

Connecting Power

Chapter 5: Installing and Connecting a Services Router

Use a grounding cable to connect the router to earth ground: (For cable
requirements, see “Chassis Grounding” on page 83.)
a.

Verify that a licensed electrician has attached an appropriate grounding cable
lug to the grounding cable.

Connect one end of the grounding cable to a proper earth ground, such as
the rack in which the router is installed.

With a Phillips screwdriver, remove the screw and washer from the PEM
nut at the grounding point on the rear of the chassis.

Place the grounding lug at the other end of the cable over the grounding
point, as shown in Figure 52 on page 88 and Figure 53 on page 89.

NOTE: A DC power supply in a Services Router becomes grounded when you connect
a grounding cable between the router and earth ground.

For each power supply:
a.

Ensure that the voltage across the DC power source cable leads is 0 V and
that the cable leads cannot become active in any way during installation.

Verify that a licensed electrician has attached the appropriate power cable
lugs to the negative and positive DC source power cables.

Use a Phillips screwdriver to remove the clear plastic cover protecting the
terminal block.

Within the terminal block, remove the two center screws next to the labels
–48 VDC and RTN.
Each screw contains a captive washer to secure a DC source power cable
lug to the terminal block.

Using one of the removed screws, secure the positive (+) DC source power
cable lug to the RTN terminal. Tighten the screw until snug. Do not

Connecting Power

■

JUNOS Software with Enhanced Services Hardware Guide

overtighten. Apply between 8 lb-in. (0.9 Nm) and 9 lb-in. (1.02 Nm) of torque
to the screw.
f.

Using the other removed screw, secure the negative (–) DC source power
cable lug to the –48 VDC terminal. Tighten the screw until snug. Do not
overtighten. Apply between 8 lb-in. (0.9 Nm) and 9 lb-in. (1.02 Nm) of torque
to the screw.

Dress the power cables appropriately.

Replace the clear plastic cover over the terminal block.

Verify that the power cables do not block access to router components or drape
where people can trip on them.

On J2320 and J2350 routers, use the power cable tie as follows to relieve strain
on the cable (see Figure 52 on page 88 ):
a.

Wrap the loose end of the tie around the cable, and insert it into the opening
on the tie.

Pull the end to tighten the tie.

To release the tie from the cable, press down the tab on the tie and loosen it.

Figure 52: Connecting DC Power to the J2350 Services Router

■

Connecting Power

Chapter 5: Installing and Connecting a Services Router

Figure 53: Connecting DC Power to the J4350 or J6350 Services Router

Powering a Services Router On and Off
To power on a Services Router, press the power button. The Routing Engine boots
as the power supply completes its startup sequence. The POWER LED lights during
startup and remains on steadily when the router is operating normally.
To power off a Services Router, you can shut it down in one of the following ways:
■

Graceful shutdown—Press and release the power button. The router begins
gracefully shutting down the operating system and then powers itself off.

■

Immediate shutdown—Press the power button and hold it for more than
5 seconds. The router immediately powers itself off without shutting down the
operating system.

To remove power completely from the router, unplug the AC power cord or switch
off the DC power source. The power button on the Services Router is a standby power
switch. If the router is connected to a power source when you press the power button
to power the router off, the router remains in standby mode and a small amount
(5 V and 3.3 V) of standby voltage is still available in the chassis.

Powering a Services Router On and Off

■

JUNOS Software with Enhanced Services Hardware Guide

■

Powering a Services Router On and Off

Chapter 6

Establishing Basic Connectivity
The JUNOS software is preinstalled on the Services Router. When the router is
powered on, it is ready to be configured. If the router does not have a configuration
from the factory or your service provider, you must configure the software to establish
basic connectivity.
If you are setting up a Services Router for the first time, you can use either J-Web
Quick Configuration or a configuration editor to configure basic connectivity. If you
are setting up many Services Routers, autoinstallation can help automate the
configuration process. For more information, see the JUNOS Software Administration
Guide.
This chapter contains the following topics. For more information about basic
connectivity, see the JUNOS System Basics Configuration Guide.
■

Basic Connectivity Terms on page 91

■

Basic Connectivity Overview on page 92

■

Before You Begin on page 95

■

Connecting to a Services Router on page 96

■

Configuring Basic Settings with J-Web Quick Configuration on page 103

■

Configuring Basic Settings Using the CLI Configuration Wizard on page 106

■

Configuring Basic Settings with a Configuration Editor on page 110

■

Verifying Basic Connectivity and the Configuration on page 113

Basic Connectivity Terms
Before configuring basic connectivity, become familiar with the terms defined in
Table 41 on page 91.
Table 41: Basic Connectivity Terms
Term

Definition

domain name

Name that identifies the network or subnetwork of a router.

Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP)

Protocol for assigning dynamic IP addresses to devices on a network.

gateway

Packets destined for IP addresses not identified in the routing table are
sent to the default gateway.

Basic Connectivity Terms

■

JUNOS Software with Enhanced Services Hardware Guide

Table 41: Basic Connectivity Terms (continued)
Term

Definition

hostname

Unique name that identifies a router on the network.

loopback address

IP address of a Services Router on logical interface lo0.0 that is always
active and available to external hosts and as the source address for
outgoing packets.

Network Time Protocol (NTP)

Protocol that provides a reliable way of synchronizing the system time
of a router.

root user

A superuser or system administrator who can perform any task in the
file system.

secure shell (SSH)

Protocol that provides a secured method of logging in to a remote
network system.

Telnet

Software that allows a computer to act as a remote terminal on a
network system.

Basic Connectivity Overview
To connect your Services Router to the network and establish basic connectivity,
you enter information about your network. This overview contains the following
topics:
■

Router Identification on page 92

■

Root Password on page 92

■

Time Zone and System Time on page 93

■

Network Settings on page 93

■

Default Gateway on page 93

■

Backup Router on page 94

■

Loopback Address on page 94

■

Built-In Ethernet Interface Address on page 94

■

Management Access on page 95

Router Identification
The domain name defines the network or subnetwork that the Services Router belongs
to. The hostname refers to the specific machine, while the domain name is shared
among all the devices in a given network. Together the hostname and domain name
identify the router in the network.

Root Password
The root user has complete privileges to configure the Services Router, and manage
files in the router's file system. Initially, the root password is not defined on the

■

Basic Connectivity Overview

Chapter 6: Establishing Basic Connectivity

router. To ensure basic security, you must define the root password during initial
configuration. If a root password is not defined, you cannot commit configuration
settings to take effect on the router.
If you use a plain-text password, the router displays the password as an encrypted
string so that users viewing the configuration cannot easily see the password.
The root password must meet the following conditions:
■

The password must be at least 6 characters long.

■

You can include most character classes in a password (alphabetic, numeric, and
special characters), except control characters.

■

Valid passwords must contain at least one change of case or character class.

Time Zone and System Time
You define the time zone for the location where you plan to operate the Services
Router by using a designation that consists of the following information for the
location:
■

Name of the continent or ocean—For example, America or Atlantic

■

Name of the major city or other geographic feature in the time zone—For
example, Detroit or Azores

A Network Time Protocol (NTP) server provides accurate time across a network. The
router synchronizes the system time with the NTP server, and periodically accesses
the NTP server to maintain the correct time.
The time zone and system time must be accurate so that the router schedules events
and operations as expected.

Network Settings
A Domain Name System (DNS) server on the network maintains a database for
resolving hostnames and IP addresses. Network devices can query the DNS server
by hostnames rather than IP addresses. The router accesses the DNS servers that
are added to the configuration to resolve hostnames in the order in which you list
them.
If you plan to include your router in several domains, you can add these domains to
the configuration so that they are included in a DNS search. When DNS searches are
requested, the domain suffixes are appended to the hostnames.

Default Gateway
A default gateway is a static route that is used to direct packets addressed to networks
not explicitly listed in the routing table. If a packet arrives at the Services Router with
an address that the router does not have routing information for, the router sends
the packet to the default gateway. The default gateway entry is always present in
the routing and forwarding tables.

Basic Connectivity Overview

■

JUNOS Software with Enhanced Services Hardware Guide

Backup Router
You can specify a backup router to take over when the routing protocol process of
the Services Router is not running, usually when the Services Router is booting, or
if its routing protocol process has failed. Packets arriving at a Services Router in this
situation are routed to the backup router. When the routing protocol process starts
up again, the address of the backup router is removed from the routing and forwarding
tables of the Services Router. The backup router must be located on the same subnet.

NOTE: To configure a backup router, you must use the CLI or J-Web configuration
editor. You cannot configure a backup router with J-Web Quick Configuration.

Loopback Address
The loopback address is the IP address of the Services Router. The loopback address
ensures that the router provides an IP address to management applications. Because
it must always be available to hosts attempting to route packets to the router, the
loopback address resides on an interface that is always active, known as the loopback
interface (lo0.0). Setting a loopback address ensures that the router can receive
packets addressed to the loopback address as long as the router is reachable though
any entry (ingress) interface. In addition, applications such as NTP, RADIUS, and
TACACS+ can use the loopback address as the source address for outgoing packets.
If you use the J-Web Set Up Quick Configuration page, you can either set a loopback
address of your choice or have the loopback address automatically set to 127.0.0.1
when you click Apply or OK to commit the configuration.

Built-In Ethernet Interface Address
The built-in Gigabit Ethernet interfaces, ge-0/0/0 through ge-0/0/3, on the front
panel of the Services Router, are the interfaces through which you perform initial
router setup. The examples in this guide use the ge-0/0/0 interface as the
management interface, but you can use any built-in Ethernet port for management.
After the initial configuration is complete, you can attach the built-in Ethernet port
that you are using for management purposes to the management network.
Before initial configuration, when the factory default configuration is active, the router
attempts to perform autoinstallation by obtaining a router configuration through all
its connected interfaces, including ge-0/0/0. The Services Router acts as a DHCP
client out the built-in Ethernet interfaces.
If the Services Router does not find a DHCP server within a few seconds, it sets the
address of ge-0/0/0 to 192.168.1.1/24 and becomes a DHCP server out the ge-0/0/0
interface.

NOTE: If the ge-0/0/1 interface is being used, it is set to 192.168.2.1/24.

■

Basic Connectivity Overview

Chapter 6: Establishing Basic Connectivity

With the router temporarily acting as a DHCP server, you can manually configure it
with the J-Web interface. Any DHCP client host, for example, a PC or laptop computer,
directly connected to ge-0/0/0 receives an address on the 192.168.1.1/24 network.

NOTE: The DHCP functionality for initial setup is different from the configurable
DHCP server functionality of the Services Router during operation. To configure the
Services Router as a DHCP server, see the JUNOS Software Administration Guide.
Once you connect your laptop or PC to ge-0/0/0, you can use a Web browser to visit
the address 192.168.1.1/24, access the J-Web Set Up Quick Configuration page, and
complete the initial configuration of the router.
After you perform the initial configuration and commit it by clicking Apply or OK
on the Set Up page, the configured router can no longer act as a DHCP server.
Therefore, to continue using ge-0/0/0 as a management interface you must configure
the IP address of the interface as part of the initial configuration.

Management Access
Telnet allows you to connect to the Services Router and access the CLI to execute
commands from a remote system. Telnet connections are not encrypted and therefore
can be intercepted.
Telnet access to the root user is prohibited. You must use more secure methods,
such as SSH, to log in as root.
If you are using a JUNOScript server to configure and monitor routers, you can activate
clear-text access on the router to allow unencrypted text to be sent directly over a
TCP connection without using any additional protocol (such as SSH, SSL, or Telnet).
Information sent in clear text is not encrypted and therefore can be intercepted. For
more information about the JUNOScript application programming interface (API),
see the JUNOScript API Guide.
SSH also allows you to connect to the router and access the CLI to execute commands
from a remote system. However, unlike Telnet, SSH encrypts traffic so that it cannot
be intercepted.
SSH can be configured so that connections are authenticated by a digital certificate.
SSH uses public-private key technology for both connection and authentication. The
SSH client software must be installed on the machine where the client application
runs. If the SSH private key is encrypted (for greater security), the SSH client must
be able to access the passphrase used to decrypt the key.
For information about obtaining SSH software, see http://www.ssh.com and
http://www.openssh.com.

Before You Begin
Before you begin initial configuration, complete the following tasks:

Before You Begin

■

JUNOS Software with Enhanced Services Hardware Guide

■

Install the Services Router in its permanent location, as described in “Installing
and Connecting a Services Router” on page 77.

■

Gather the following information:

■

Hostname for the router on the network

■

Domain that the router belongs to on the network

■

Password for the root user

■

Time zone where the router is located

■

IP address of an NTP server (if NTP is used to set the time on the router)

■

IP address of a DNS server

■

List of domains that can be appended to hostnames for DNS resolution

■

IP address of the default gateway

■

IP address to be used for the loopback interface

■

IP address of the built-in Ethernet interface that you will use for management
purposes. The examples in this guide use the ge-0/0/0 interface.

If you are performing the initial configuration with the J-Web interface, collect
the following equipment:
■

A management device, such as a laptop, with an Ethernet port

■

An Ethernet cable (provided)

If you are performing the initial configuration with the CLI, collect the following
equipment:
■

A management device, such as a PC or laptop, with a serial port and an
asynchronous terminal application (such as Microsoft Windows
Hyperterminal)

■

An RJ-45 to DB-9 serial port adapter (provided)

■

An Ethernet cable (provided)

■

For a remote connection, two dial-up modems

■

For a remote modem connection, a DB-9 female to DB-25 male adapter, or
other adapter appropriate for your modem (not provided)

Connecting to a Services Router
You can connect to the Services Router using the J-Web or CLI interface. You can
connect to the CLI from a remote location through two dial-up modems. For details
see, “Connecting to the CLI Remotely” on page 100.

■

Connecting to a Services Router

Chapter 6: Establishing Basic Connectivity

This section contains the following topics:
■

Connecting to the J-Web Interface on page 97

■

Connecting to the CLI Locally on page 98

■

Connecting to the CLI Remotely on page 100

Connecting to the J-Web Interface
If you plan to use the J-Web interface to configure the Services Router, you must
connect through one of the built-in Ethernet management ports, as shown in
Figure 54 on page 98 and Figure 55 on page 98.
When the Services Router is powered on for the first time, the system looks for a
DHCP server, and if it does not find one, it assigns an IP address within the
192.168.1.0/24 subnetwork to any devices connected to it.
To connect to the J-Web interface through port 0 on the router (see Figure 54 on page
98 and Figure 55 on page 98):
1.

On the management device, such as a PC or laptop, you use to access the J-Web
interface, verify that the address of the port that you connect to the router is set
to one of the following:
■

An Ethernet address on the 192.168.1/24 subnetwork other than
192.168.1.1

■

An Ethernet address from a DHCP server

Turn off the power to the management device.

Plug one end of the Ethernet cable into the Ethernet port on the management
device.

Connect the other end of the Ethernet cable to the built-in Ethernet port on the
router.

Power on the router by pressing the power button on the front panel.

Wait until the STATUS LED on the front panel turns solid green.

Turn on the power to the management device. The router assigns an IP address
to the management device within the 192.168.1.0/24 subnetwork if the device
is configured to use DHCP.

From the management device, open a Web browser and enter the IP address
192.168.1.1 in the address field. The Set Up Quick Configuration page appears.

Configure basic settings for your router as described in “Configuring Basic Settings
with J-Web Quick Configuration” on page 103.

NOTE: You must manually configure the IP address for the management port you
are using before you save your initial configuration. When you save the configuration
for the first time, you will lose the connection to the router if you have not manually
configured the IP address. If you lose connection through the management interface,
you must connect through the console port.

Connecting to a Services Router

■

JUNOS Software with Enhanced Services Hardware Guide

Figure 54: Connecting to the Gigabit Ethernet Port on J2320 and J2350 Routers

Figure 55: Connecting to the Gigabit Ethernet Port on J4350 and J6350 Routers

Connecting to the CLI Locally
If you plan to use the CLI to configure the router, you must connect through the
console port, as shown in Figure 56 on page 100 and Figure 57 on page 100.

NOTE: Figure 56 on page 100 and Figure 57 on page 100 show a connection to a local
management device. A remote connection to the router through a modem requires
the cable and connector shown (provided in the router's accessory box), plus a DB-9
female to DB-25 male (or similar) adapter for your modem, which you must purchase
separately.

■

Connecting to a Services Router

Chapter 6: Establishing Basic Connectivity

To connect to the CLI using a local management device through the console port on
the router:
1.

Turn off power to the router.

Turn off the power to the management device, such as a PC or laptop computer,
that you are using to access the CLI.

Plug one end of the Ethernet cable supplied with your router into the RJ-45 to
DB-9 serial port adapter supplied with your router (see Figure 57 on page 100).

Plug the RJ-45 to DB-9 serial port adapter into the serial port on the management
device (see Figure 57 on page 100).

Connect the other end of the Ethernet cable to the console port on the router
(Figure 57 on page 100).

Turn on the power to the management device.

Start your asynchronous terminal emulation application (such as Microsoft
Windows Hyperterminal) and select the appropriate COM port to use (for example,
COM1).

Configure the port settings as follows:

■

Bits per second: 9600

■

Data bits: 8

■

Parity: None

■

Stop bits: 1

■

Flow control: None

Power on the router by pressing the power button on the front panel. Verify that
the POWER LED on the front panel turns green.
The terminal emulation screen on your management device displays the boot
sequence. When the router has finished booting, a login prompt appears.

10. Log in as the user root. No password is required at initial connection, but you

must assign a root password before committing any configuration settings.

Connecting to a Services Router

■

JUNOS Software with Enhanced Services Hardware Guide

Figure 56: Connecting to the Console Port on J2320 and J2350 Routers

Figure 57: Connecting to the Console Port on the J4350 and J6350 Routers

Connecting to the CLI Remotely
You can connect to the CLI from a remote location through two dial-up modems: a
modem that is connected to the console port on the Services Router and a second
modem connected to a remote management device. The modem connection allows
you to remotely perform the same console operations you can perform locally.

100

■

Connecting to a Services Router

Chapter 6: Establishing Basic Connectivity

This section contains the following topics:
■

Configuring the Modem at the Router End on page 101

■

Connecting the Modem to the Console Port on page 102

■

Connecting to the CLI at the User End on page 102

Configuring the Modem at the Router End
NOTE: These instructions use Hayes-compatible modem commands to configure the
modem. If your modem is not Hayes-compatible, refer to the documentation for
your modem and enter equivalent modem commands.
Before you can connect a dial-up modem to the console port on the Services Router,
you must configure the modem to accept a call on the first ring and accept Data
Terminal Ready (DTR) signals. You must also disable flow control on the modem.
To configure the modem on the router end:
1.

Connect the modem to a PC or laptop computer.

Power on the modem.

From the PC or laptop computer, start your asynchronous terminal emulation
application (such as Microsoft Windows Hyperterminal) and select the COM port
to which the modem is connected (for example, COM1).

Configure the port settings as follows:

■

Bits per second: 9600

■

Data bits: 8

■

Parity: None

■

Stop bits: 1

■

Flow control: None

In the HyperTerminal window, enter AT.
An OK response verifies that the modem communicates successfully with the
COM port on the PC or laptop.

To configure the modem to answer a call on the first ring, enter ATS0=1.

To configure the modem to accept modem control Data Terminal Ready (DTR)
signals, enter AT&D1.

To disable flow control, enter AT&K0.

To save modem settings, enter AT&W.

Connecting to a Services Router

■

101

JUNOS Software with Enhanced Services Hardware Guide

Connecting the Modem to the Console Port
NOTE: Most modems have an RS-232 DB-25 connector. You must separately purchase
an adapter to connect your modem to the RJ-45 to DB-9 adapter and Ethernet cable
supplied with the router.
To connect the dial-up modem to the console port on the router:
1.

Turn off power to the router.

Turn off the power to the modem.

Plug one end of the Ethernet cable supplied with your router into the console
port on the router.

Plug the other end of the Ethernet cable into the RJ-45 to DB-9 serial port adapter
supplied with your router.

Connect the serial port adapter to a separately purchased DB-9 female to DB-25
male adapter, or other adapter appropriate for your modem.

Plug the modem adapter into the DB-25 connector on the modem.

Connect the modem to your telephone network.

Turn on the power to the modem.

Power on the router by pressing the power button on the front panel. Verify that
the POWER LED on the front panel turns green.

Connecting to the CLI at the User End
To remotely connect to the CLI through a dial-up modem connected to the console
port on the router:
1.

At your remote location, connect a modem to a management device such as a
PC or laptop computer.

On the PC or laptop computer, start your asynchronous terminal emulation
application (such as Microsoft Windows Hyperterminal).

Select the COM port to which the modem is connected (for example, COM1).

Configure the port settings as follows:

102

■

Bits per second: 9600

■

Data bits: 8

■

Parity: None

■

Stop bits: 1

■

Flow control: None

In the HyperTerminal window, enter AT.

Connecting to a Services Router

Chapter 6: Establishing Basic Connectivity

An OK response verifies that the modem communicates successfully with the
COM port on the PC or laptop.
6.

To dial the modem that is connected to the console port on the router, enter
ATDT remote-modem-number. For example, if the number of the modem connected
to the console port on the router is 0013033033030, enter ATDT 0013033033030.
The router login prompt appears.

Log in as the user root. No password is required at initial connection, but you
must assign a root password before committing any configuration settings.

Configuring Basic Settings with J-Web Quick Configuration
J-Web Quick Configuration allows you to configure basic settings. Figure 58 on page
103 shows the Quick Configuration page for basic setup.
Figure 58: Set Up Quick Configuration Page

Before you configure the router, gather the information described in “Before You
Begin” on page 95.

Configuring Basic Settings with J-Web Quick Configuration

■

103

JUNOS Software with Enhanced Services Hardware Guide

To configure basic settings with J-Web Quick Configuration:
1.

If you have not already done so, connect a management device to the ge-0/0/0
interface on port 0/0. For instructions, see “Connecting to the J-Web
Interface” on page 97.

If the Set Up Quick Configuration page is not displayed, select
Configuration>Quick Configuration >Set Up.

Enter information into the Set Up Quick Configuration page, as described in
Table 42 on page 104.

Click one of the following buttons:
■

To apply the configuration and stay in the Set Up Quick Configuration page,
click Apply.

■

To apply the configuration and return to the Quick Configuration page, click
OK.

■

To cancel your entries and return to the Quick Configuration page, click
Cancel.

NOTE: After initial configuration is complete, the Services Router stops functioning
as a DHCP server. If you change the IP address of ge-0/0/0 and have the management
device configured to use DHCP, you lose your DHCP lease and your connection to
the router through the J-Web interface. To reestablish a connection, either set the IP
address on the management device manually, or connect ge-0/0/0 to the
management network and access the router another way—for example, through the
console port.

To check the configuration, see “Verifying Basic Connectivity and the
Configuration” on page 113.

Table 42: Set Up Quick Configuration Summary
Field

Function

Your Action

Host Name
(required)

Defines the hostname of the router.

Type the hostname.

Domain Name

Defines the network or subnetwork that the
machine belongs to.

Type the domain name.

Root Password
(required)

Sets the root password that user “root” can
use to log in to the router.

Type a plain-text password that the system encrypts.

Identification

NOTE: After a root password has been defined, it is
required when you log in to the J-Web user interface
or the CLI.
Verify Root Password
(required)

104

■

Verifies the root password has been typed
correctly.

Configuring Basic Settings with J-Web Quick Configuration

Retype the password.

Chapter 6: Establishing Basic Connectivity

Table 42: Set Up Quick Configuration Summary (continued)
Field

Function

Your Action

Time Zone

Identifies the time zone that the router is
located in.

From the list, select the appropriate time zone.

NTP Servers

Specify an NTP server that the router can
reach to synchronize the system time.

To add an IP address, type it in the box to the left of
the Add button, then click Add.

Time

To delete an IP address, click on it in the box above
the Add button, then click Delete.
Current System Time

Synchronizes the system time with the NTP
server, or manually set the system time and
date.

■

To immediately set the time using the NTP server,
click Set Time via NTP. The router sends a
request to the NTP server and synchronizes the
system time.

NOTE: If you are configuring other settings on this
page, the router also synchronizes the system time
using the NTP server when you click Apply or OK.
■

To set the time manually, click Set Time
Manually. A pop-up window allows you to select
the current date and time from lists.

Network

DNS Name Servers

Specify a DNS server that the router can use
to resolve hostnames into addresses.

To add an IP address, type it in the box to the left of
the Add button, then click Add.
To delete an IP address, click on it in the box above
the Add button, then click Delete.

Domain Search

Adds each domain name that the router is
included in to the configuration so that they
are included in a DNS search.

To add a domain name, type it in the box to the left
of the Add button, then click Add.
To delete a domain name, click on it in the box above
the Add button, then click Delete.

Default Gateway

Defines a default gateway through which to
direct packets addressed to networks not
explicitly listed in the routing table.

Type a 32-bit IP address, in dotted decimal notation.

Loopback Address

Defines a reserved IP address that is always
available on the router. If no address is
entered, this address is set to 127.0.0.1/32.

Type a 32-bit IP address and prefix length, in dotted
decimal notation.

ge-0/0/0 Address

Defines the IP address and prefix length of
ge-0/0/0. The interface ge-0/0/0 is typically
used as the management interface for
accessing the router. The DHCP client sets this
address to 192.168.1.1/24 if no DHCP server
is found.

Type a 32-bit IP address and prefix length, in dotted
decimal notation.
NOTE: You must enter the ge-0/0/0 address on the
Quick Configuration Set Up page before you click
Apply or OK. If you do not manually configure this
address, you will lose your connection to the J-Web
interface when you click Apply or OK.

Management Access

Configuring Basic Settings with J-Web Quick Configuration

■

105

JUNOS Software with Enhanced Services Hardware Guide

Table 42: Set Up Quick Configuration Summary (continued)
Field

Function

Your Action

Allow Telnet Access

Allows remote access to the router using
Telnet.

To enable Telnet access, select the check box.

Allow JUNOScript
over Clear-Text
Access

Allows JUNOScript to access the router using
a protocol for sending unencrypted text over
a TCP connection.

To enable JUNOScript access over clear text, select the
check box.

Allow SSH Access

Allows remote access to the router using SSH.

To enable SSH access, select the check box.

Configuring Basic Settings Using the CLI Configuration Wizard
To establish basic connectivity on a Services Router, you must identify the router,
connect the router to the network, and specify basic network settings. This section
explains how to use the command line interface (CLI) configuration wizard for JUNOS
software with enhanced services to configure basic settings so that you can connect
the router to a network and further configure it using the J-Web interface or the CLI.

NOTE: To use the CLI configuration wizard, you must have JUNOS software with
enhanced services installed on your Services Router. If JUNOS software with enhanced
services is not installed on your Services Router, following the instructions
in“Configuring Basic Settings with J-Web Quick Configuration” on page 103 to use the
J-Web Quick Configuration pages to configure basic settings or use the CLI, as
described in “Configuring Basic Settings with a Configuration Editor” on page 110.

About the CLI Configuration Wizard
The JUNOS software with enhanced services configuration wizard is a command line
interface application that allows you to configure basic settings for a Services Router
that is already configured with the factory default settings. For details on factory
default settings, see the JUNOS Software Administration Guide.
Understand these configuration wizard characteristics before using the wizard:

106

■

Because the configuration wizard overrides any existing configuration, it is meant
to be used on a router configured with the factory defaults only.

■

The configuration wizard shows default values in parenthesis ( ).

■

At any time during the configuration you can type a question mark (?) to obtain
Help.

■

To terminate the configuration at any time without completing it, press Ctrl+c.

■

After you complete the configuration, the wizard allows you to review it before
committing it on the router.

Configuring Basic Settings Using the CLI Configuration Wizard

Chapter 6: Establishing Basic Connectivity

Using the JUNOS Software with Enhanced Services Configuration Wizard
Before you use the CLI configuration wizard, log in to the Services Router console as
described in “Connecting to the CLI Locally” on page 98 or “Connecting to the CLI
Remotely” on page 100
To invoke the configuration wizard, enter config-wizard at the console prompt. After
you invoke the wizard, it presents the following series of prompts. Follow the prompts
as described in Table 43 on page 107.
Table 43: Basic Configuration Wizard Summary
Prompt

Function

Your Action

Enter host name:

Defines the hostname of the router.

Type the hostname.
Alphanumeric, hyphen, and
underline characters are allowed.

Please enter root password:

Sets the root password that user “root”
can use to log into the router.

Type a plain-text password that
the system encrypts.

Identification

NOTE: After a root password has
been defined, it is required when
you log into the J-Web user
interface or the CLI.
Retype root password:

Verifies that the root password has
been typed correctly.

Retype the password.

Would you like to configure a domain name? [yes,
no] (no):

Defines the network or subnetwork
that the machine belongs to.

Type the domain name.
Alphanumeric, hyphen, period,
and underline characters are
allowed.

If you enter y(es), the configuration wizard
presents the following prompt.
Enter domain name:

Configuring Basic Settings Using the CLI Configuration Wizard

■

107

JUNOS Software with Enhanced Services Hardware Guide

Table 43: Basic Configuration Wizard Summary (continued)
Prompt

Function

Your Action

Would you like to configure name server? [yes, no]
(no):

Defines the name server

Type the IP address of the name
server.

If you enter y(es), the configuration wizard
presents the following prompt:
Enter IP address for the name server:

After you specify one name server, the
configuration wizard presents the following
prompt:
Would you like to configure alternative name server?
[yes, no] (no):

If you enter y(es), the configuration wizard
presents the following prompt:
Enter IP address for the name server:
Management Interfaces

108

■

Configuring Basic Settings Using the CLI Configuration Wizard

Chapter 6: Establishing Basic Connectivity

Table 43: Basic Configuration Wizard Summary (continued)
Prompt

Function

Your Action

To allow you to configure the management interfaces, the configuration wizard presents
the following information. To configure a specific management interface, enter the number
associated with it at the prompt.
Configure the following network interfaces
Identifier...Interface

....1........ge-0/0/0
....2........ge-0/0/1
....3........ge-0/0/2
....4........ge-0/0/3
Would you like to configure any of the above interfaces [yes, no] (yes):
Please enter one or more identifiers of the interfaces separated by comma.
For example, 1, 2
Please select interface identifiers:

For example, if you enter 1, the following text and prompt is displayed:
Configure IP on interface ge-0/0/0
IP address for this interface:

After you enter the IP address, the configuration wizard presents the following prompt:
Subnet mask bit length for this interface [1–32] (32):

After you enter the subnet mask for the interface, the configuration wizard presents the
following prompt:
Enter a security zone name to associate this interface to:
Default Gateway
Would you like to configure default gateway? [yes,
no] (no):

If you enter y(es), the configuration wizard
presents the following prompt:

Defines a default gateway through
which to direct packets addressed to
networks not explicitly listed in the
routing table.

Type a 32-bit IP address, in
dotted decimal notation.

Enter IP address for the default gateway:
New User Account

Configuring Basic Settings Using the CLI Configuration Wizard

■

109

JUNOS Software with Enhanced Services Hardware Guide

Table 43: Basic Configuration Wizard Summary (continued)
Prompt

Function

Your Action

Would you like to create a new user account? [yes,
no] (no):

Defines a new (non-root) user account.

Type a username composed of
only alphanumeric characters, the
hyphen character, and the
underscore character.

If you enter y(es), the configuration wizard
displays the following prompt:

For the password, you must enter
a value that is no less than 6 and
no more than 128 characters
long. It must contain at least 1
uppercase character and 1
lowercase character. It can
include numbers and special
characters.

Enter a new user name:

After you enter a username, the configuration
wizard prompts you for an associated password.
Enter user password

After you enter the password, the configuration
wizard requests that you verify it.
Retype the password:
SNMP
Would you like to configure SNMP Network
Management? [yes,no] (no):

If you enter y(es), the configuration wizard
presents the following prompt:
Enter community string [public]:

Configures the Simple Network
Management Protocol parameters. The
SNMP community string defines the
relationship between an SNMP server
system and the client systems. The
string serves as a password to control
the client's access to the server.

Type the SNMP community
string.

Configuring Basic Settings with a Configuration Editor
To establish basic connectivity on a Services Router, you identify the router, connect
the router to the network, and specify basic network settings.
In a typical network, the Services Router has the basic settings listed in
Table 44 on page 110. Determine the values to set on the Services Router in your
network.
Table 44: Sample Settings on a Services Router
Services Router Property

Sample Value

Services Router hostname

routera

Access for user “root”

SSH RSA public key

IP address of the NTP server used to synchronize system time
on the Services Router

10.148.2.21

Services Router location

Sunnyvale, California, USA, which is in the
America/Los_Angeles time zone

110

■

Configuring Basic Settings with a Configuration Editor

Chapter 6: Establishing Basic Connectivity

Table 44: Sample Settings on a Services Router (continued)
Services Router Property

Sample Value

IP address of the DNS server to which DNS requests are sent

10.148.2.32

Domains to which the Services Router belongs

lab.router.net and router.net

IP address of a backup router to use while the Services Router
is booting or if the routing protocol processes fail to start

192.168.2.12/24

Loopback IP address and prefix length for the Services Router
lo0 interface

172.16.1.24/32

IP address and prefix length for the Services Router ge-0/0/0
interface

192.168.1.1/24

You can configure basic settings in the J-Web interface from a device attached to the
ge-0/0/0 interface on port 0. For instructions, see “Connecting to the J-Web
Interface” on page 97. You can also connect to the CLI to configure basic settings.
For instructions, see “Connecting to the CLI Locally” on page 98 and “Connecting
to the CLI Remotely” on page 100.
To use a configuration editor to configure basic settings:
1.

Navigate to the top of the configuration hierarchy in either the J-Web or CLI
configuration editor.

To configure basic settings, perform the configuration tasks described in
Table 45 on page 111.

If you are using the J-Web interface, click Commit to view a summary of your
changes, then click OK to commit the configuration. If you are using the CLI,
commit the configuration by entering the commit command.

To check the configuration, see Displaying Basic Connectivity
Configurations on page 114.

Table 45: Configuring Basic Settings
Task

J-Web Configuration Editor

CLI Configuration Editor

Navigate to the System
level in the configuration
hierarchy.

In the J-Web interface, select Configuration>View
and Edit> Edit Configuration.

From the [edit] hierarchy level,
enter

Next to System, click Configure or Edit.

Define the hostname of
the router.

In the Host name box, type the hostname of the router—for
example, routera.

edit system

Set the hostname. For example:
set host-name routera

Name the domain in
which the router is
located.

In the Domain name box, type the domain name of the
router—for example, lab.router.net.

Set the domain name. For example:
set domain-name lab.router.net

Configuring Basic Settings with a Configuration Editor

■

111

JUNOS Software with Enhanced Services Hardware Guide

Table 45: Configuring Basic Settings (continued)
Task

J-Web Configuration Editor

CLI Configuration Editor

Allow SSH remote access.

In the Nested configuration section, next to Services,
click Configure or Edit.

Set remote access for SSH:

Next to Ssh, click Configure or Edit.

Click OK.

Click OK a second time to return to the System level
in the configuration editor hierarchy.

Define root authentication
for access to the router.

In the Nested configuration section, next to Root
authentication, click Configure or Edit.

NOTE: For readability, the
entire key is not shown.

Next to Ssh rsa, click Add New Entry.

In the Authorized key box, type the RSA password—for
example, ssh-rsa AAAAB3Nza...D9Y2gXF9ac==
root@routera.lab.router.net

Define the time zone the
router is located in.

Click OK.

Click OK a second time to return to the System level
in the configuration editor hierarchy.

In the Time zone list, select the time zone for your
router—for example, America/Los_Angeles.

set services ssh

Set the root password. For
example:
set root-authentication ssh-rsa
“ssh-rsa
AAAAB3Nza...D9Y2gXF9ac==
root@routera.lab.router.net”

Set the time zone. For example:
set time-zone America/Los_Angeles

Define the NTP server that
NTP requests can be sent
to.

Define the DNS server that
receives DNS requests.

Add each domain that the
router belongs to.

112

■

In the Nested configuration section, next to Ntp, click
Configure or Edit.

Next to Server, click Add New Entry.

In the Address box, type the NTP server's IP
address—for example, 10.148.2.21

Click OK.

Click OK a second time to return to the System level
in the configuration editor hierarchy.

Next to Name server, click Add New Entry.

In the Address box, type the address of the DNS
server—for example, 10.148.2.32.

Click OK.

Next to Domain search, click Add New Entry.

In the Value box, type the name of the domain in
which the router is located—for example, lab.router.net.

Click OK.

Next to Domain search, click Add New Entry.

In the Value box, type the name of another domain
that the router belongs to—for example, router.net.

Click OK.

Configuring Basic Settings with a Configuration Editor

Set the address of the NTP server.
For example:
set ntp server 10.148.2.21

Set the address of the DNS server.
For example:
set name-server 10.148.2.32

Set the domains to be searched.
For example:
set domain-search lab.router.net
set domain-search router.net

Chapter 6: Establishing Basic Connectivity

Table 45: Configuring Basic Settings (continued)
Task

J-Web Configuration Editor

CLI Configuration Editor

Define the backup router
to be used when the
router is booting or the
routing protocol processes
are not running.

In the Backup router section, next to Address, type the IP
address of the backup router—for example, 192.168.2.44.

Set the address for the backup
router. For example:

Define the IP address for
lo0.0.

In the configuration editor hierarchy, next to Interfaces,
click Configure or Edit.

In the Interface table, locate the lo0 row and click Unit.

In the Unit table, click 0, and in the Family section
next to Inet, click Configure or Edit.

To delete the existing IP address, click the Discard
button. Select the Delete Configuration Below This
Point option button from the next display.

Next to Address, click Add new entry.

In the Source box, type the address and prefix length
for the loopback interface—for example,
172.16.1.24/32.

Click OK.

In the configuration editor hierarchy, next to Interfaces,
click Configure or Edit.

In the Interface table, locate the ge-0/0/0 row and click
Unit.

In the Unit table, click 0, and in the Family section
next to Inet, click Configure or Edit.

To delete the existing IP address, click the Discard
button. Select the Delete Configuration Below This
Point option button from the next display.

Define the IP address for
ge-0/0/0.

set backup router 192.168.2.44

Next to Address, click Add new entry.

In the Source box, type the address and prefix length
for the management interface—for example,
192.168.1.1/24.

Click OK.

From the [edit] hierarchy level,
enter
edit interfaces

Delete the existing IP address:
delete lo0 unit 0 family inet
address

Set the IP address and prefix
length of lo0.0. For example:
set lo0 unit 0 family inet
address 172.16.1.24/32

Delete the existing IP address:
delete ge-0/0/0 unit 0 family
inet address.

Set the IP address and prefix
length of ge-0/0/0. For
example:
set ge-0/0/0 unit 0 family inet
address 192.168.1.1/24

Verifying Basic Connectivity and the Configuration
To verify that the Services Router has the settings you configured, perform the
following task:
■

Displaying Basic Connectivity Configurations on page 114

Verifying Basic Connectivity and the Configuration

■

113

JUNOS Software with Enhanced Services Hardware Guide

Displaying Basic Connectivity Configurations
Purpose

Verify the configuration of basic connectivity. Because the basic connectivity settings
appear in different places in the configuration hierarchy, displaying the entire
configuration at once makes viewing the settings easier.

Action

From the J-Web interface, select
Configuration>View and Edit>View Configuration Text. Alternatively, from
configuration mode in the CLI, enter the show command. The following sample output
displays the sample values configured in Table 45 on page 111. Your output displays
the values you set.
[edit]
user@host# show
system {
host-name routera;
domain-name lab.router.net;
domain-search [ lab.router.net router.net ];
backup-router 192.168.2.44;
time-zone America/Los_Angeles;
root-authentication {
ssh-rsa "ssh-rsa AAAAB3Nza...D9Y2gXF9ac==root@routera.lab.router.net";
}
name-server {
10.148.2.32;
}
services {
ssh
}
ntp {
server 10.148.2.21;
}
}
interfaces {
ge-0/0/0 {
unit 0 {
family inet {
address 192.168.1.1/24;
}
}
}
lo0 {
unit 0 {
family inet {
address 172.16.1.24/32;
}
}
}
}

Meaning

Related Topics

114

■

The output shows the configuration of basic connectivity. Verify that the values
displayed are correct for your Services Router.
For more information about the format of a configuration file, see the JUNOS CLI
User Guide.

Displaying Basic Connectivity Configurations

Chapter 7

Installing JUNOS Software with Enhanced
Services
For information explaining how to install JUNOS software with enhanced services if
your Services Router is running JUNOS software, see the JUNOS Software with Enhanced
Services Migration Guide. For information explaining how to upgrade the software if
you have already installed JUNOS software with enhanced services, see the JUNOS
Software Administration Guide.

■

115

JUNOS Software with Enhanced Services Hardware Guide

116

■

Part 3

Maintaining Services Router Hardware
■

Replacing Hardware Components on page 119

■

Troubleshooting a Services Router on page 157

■

Contacting Customer Support and Returning Hardware on page 169

Maintaining Services Router Hardware

■

117

JUNOS Software with Enhanced Services Hardware Guide

118

■

Maintaining Services Router Hardware

Chapter 8

Replacing Hardware Components
Because many of the Services Router's hardware components are field-replaceable
units (FRUs), you can remove and replace them yourself. When you need to replace
a router component, contact your customer support or sales representative to order
the field-replaceable unit (FRU) that contains the component. For instructions, see
“Contacting Customer Support and Returning Hardware” on page 169.
This chapter contains the following topics:
■

Tools and Parts Required on page 119

■

Replacing the Console Port Cable on page 120

■

Replacing a PIM on page 120

■

Replacing PIM Cables on page 123

■

Removing and Replacing the Chassis Cover on J2320 and J2350
Routers on page 124

■

Replacing Internal Compact Flashes on J2320 and J2350 Routers on page 126

■

Replacing Internal Compact Flashes on J4350 and J6350 Routers on page 129

■

Replacing External Compact Flashes on page 132

■

Replacing USB Storage Devices on page 134

■

Replacing DRAM Modules on page 136

■

Replacing Power System Components on page 139

■

Replacing Crypto Accelerator Modules on J2320 and J2350 Routers on page 146

■

Replacing Crypto Accelerator Modules on J4350 and J6350 Routers on page 149

■

Replacing Air Filters on J2350 Routers on page 153

■

Replacing Air Filters on J4350 and J6350 Routers on page 154

Tools and Parts Required
To replace hardware components, you need the tools and parts listed in
Table 46 on page 120.

Tools and Parts Required

■

119

JUNOS Software with Enhanced Services Hardware Guide

Table 46: Tools and Parts Required
Tool or Part

Components

Electrostatic bag or antistatic mat

All

Electrostatic discharge (ESD)
grounding wrist strap

All

Flat-blade screw-blade screwdriver,
approximately 1/4 in. (6 mm)

PIM

Phillips (+) screwdriver, number 1
and number 2

■

Chassis cover

■

Compact flash

■

Crypto Accelerator Module

■

DRAM modules

■

PIM

■

Power system components

Replacing the Console Port Cable
The RJ-45 port labeled CONSOLE on the Services Router's front panel allows you to
connect the router to an external management device, such as a laptop or a terminal
server. For cable specifications, see “Chassis Console Port Pinouts” on page 190.
To replace the console port cable:
1.

Locate an appropriate replacement cable and connector.

Plug the Ethernet connector at either end of the cable into the console port on
the front panel (see Figure 57 on page 100).

Plug the connector at the other end of the cable into the external management
device. If you are connecting to a DB-9 serial port, use the provided RJ-45 to
DB-9 serial port adapter.

Replacing a PIM
To remove or install field-replaceable Physical Interface Modules (PIMs) in a Services
Router, you must first power off the router. This section contains the following topics:
■

Removing a PIM on page 120

■

Installing a PIM on page 122

Removing a PIM
The PIMs are installed in the front of the Services Router. A PIM weighs less than
1 lb (0.5 kg).

120

■

Replacing the Console Port Cable

Chapter 8: Replacing Hardware Components

CAUTION: Do not hot-swap WXC Integrated Services Modules. Failure to power off
the router before removing or installing a WXC Integrated Services Module might
result in damage to the hardware.

Figure 59: Removing a PIM

To remove a PIM (see Figure 59 on page 121):
1.

Place an electrostatic bag or antistatic mat on a flat, stable surface to receive the
PIM.

Attach an electrostatic discharge (ESD) grounding strap to your bare wrist and
connect the strap to the ESD point on the chassis, or to an outside ESD point if
the Services Router is disconnected from earth ground. For more information
about ESD, see “Preventing Electrostatic Discharge Damage” on page 201.

Press and release the power button to power off the router. Verify that the POWER
LED blinks and then turns off.

Label the cables connected to the PIM so that you can later reconnect each cable
to the correct PIM.

Disconnect the cables from the PIM.

If necessary, arrange the cables to prevent them from dislodging or developing
stress points:
■

Secure each cable so that it is not supporting its own weight as it hangs to
the floor.

■

Place excess cable out of the way in a neatly coiled loop.

■

Use fasteners to maintain the shape of cable loops.

Loosen the captive screws on each side of the PIM faceplate.

Grasp the handles on each side of the PIM faceplate, and slide the PIM out of the
router. Place it in the electrostatic bag or on the antistatic mat.

If you are not reinstalling a PIM into the emptied slot, install a blank PIM panel
over the slot to maintain proper airflow.

Replacing a PIM

■

121

JUNOS Software with Enhanced Services Hardware Guide

Installing a PIM
CAUTION: Do not hot-swap WXC Integrated Services Modules. Failure to power off
the router before removing or installing a WXC Integrated Services Module might
result in damage to the hardware.

Figure 60: Installing a PIM

CAUTION: Do not install a combination of modules in a single chassis that exceeds
the maximum power and heat capacity of the chassis. If J-series power management
is enabled, PIMs and modules (PIMs or PIMs plus a WXC Integrated Services Module)
that exceed the maximum power and heat capacity remain offline when the chassis
is powered on.
To verify that the combination of PIMs to be installed in a chassis do not exceed the
power and heat capacities for the J4350 or J6350 router, see “Planning for Power
Management” on page 72.
To install a PIM (see Figure 60 on page 122):
1.

Press and release the power button to power off the router. Verify that the POWER
LED blinks and then turns off.

Align the notches in the connector at the rear of the PIM with the notches in the
PIM slot in the Services Router, and slide the PIM in until it lodges firmly in the
router.

CAUTION: Slide the PIM straight into the slot to avoid damaging the components on
the PIM.

122

■

Replacing a PIM

Tighten the captive screws on each side of the PIM faceplate.

Chapter 8: Replacing Hardware Components

Insert the appropriate cables into the cable connectors on the PIM.

If necessary, arrange the cables to prevent them from dislodging or developing
stress points:

■

Secure each cable so that it is not supporting its own weight as it hangs to
the floor.

■

Place excess cable out of the way in a neatly coiled loop.

■

Use fasteners to maintain the shape of cable loops.

Press and release the power button to power on the router. Verify that the POWER
LED lights steadily.

Replacing PIM Cables
Removing and installing PIM cables does not affect Services Router function, except
that a PIM does not receive or transmit data while its cable is disconnected. To replace
a PIM cable, perform the following procedures:
■

Removing PIM Cables on page 123

■

Installing PIM Cables on page 123

Removing PIM Cables
To remove a PIM cable:
1.

If you are removing all cables connected to the PIM, issue the following CLI
command to take the PIM offline:
user@host> request chassis fpc slot

pim-slot offline

For example, to take the PIM in slot 4 offline, enter the following command:
user@host> request chassis fpc slot 4 offline

For more information about the command, see the JUNOS System Basics and
Services Command Reference.
2.

Unplug the cable from the cable connector port.

Detach the cable from the destination port.

Installing PIM Cables
To install a PIM cable:
1.

Have ready a length of the type of cable used by the PIM. For cable specifications,
see “Network Cable Specifications and Connector Pinouts” on page 179.

Insert the cable connector into the cable connector port on the PIM faceplate.

Replacing PIM Cables

■

123

JUNOS Software with Enhanced Services Hardware Guide

Arrange the cable as necessary to prevent it from dislodging or developing stress
points:
■

Secure the cable so that it is not supporting its own weight as it hangs to the
floor.

■

Place excess cable out of the way in a neatly coiled loop.

■

Use fasteners to maintain the shape of cable loops.

Insert the other end of the cable into the destination port.

Repeat the previous steps for any additional cables.

If the PIM is offline (its status LED is steadily red), issue the following CLI
command to bring the PIM online:
user@host> request chassis fpc slot pim-slot online

For example, to bring the PIM in slot 4 online, enter the following command:
user@host> request chassis fpc slot 4 online

For more information about the command, see the JUNOS System Basics and
Services Command Reference.
7.

Verify that the PIM status LED shines steadily green to confirm that the PIM is
online.
You can also verify correct PIM functioning by issuing the show chassis fpc
pic-status command described in the JUNOS Software Interfaces and Routing
Configuration Guide.

NOTE: In the show chassis fpc pic-status command, the PIM slot number is reported
as an FPC number and the PIM number (always 0) is reported as a PIC number. For
more information about interface naming, see the JUNOS Software Interfaces and
Routing Configuration Guide.

Removing and Replacing the Chassis Cover on J2320 and J2350 Routers
On J2320 and J2350 routers, the chassis cover fits tightly on the chassis. To remove
the cover from the chassis:

124

■

Press and release the power button to power off the router. Wait for the POWER
LED to turn off.

Remove the power cable from the power source receptacle.

With a Phillips screwdriver remove the grounding screw.

Remove the router from the rack.

Removing and Replacing the Chassis Cover on J2320 and J2350 Routers

Chapter 8: Replacing Hardware Components

With a Phillips screwdriver remove the flat head screws from the rear and sides
of the chassis.

Position the router so that you face the front panel.

Place your hands on the cover and press down while pushing the cover back
until the two front tabs disengage from the chassis base (see
Figure 61 on page 125).

Figure 61: Sliding the Chassis Cover

Lift the cover upward and pull it away from the tabs on the rear of the chassis
(see Figure 62 on page 125).

Figure 62: Removing and Replacing the Chassis Cover

To replace the cover on the J2320 and J2350 chassis:
1.

Lower the cover onto the chassis so that the front edge of the cover is a few
inches away from the front edge of the chassis base (see Figure 62 on page 125).

Tilt the cover and align the rear tabs with the slots at the bottom of the chassis
(see Figure 63 on page 126).

Removing and Replacing the Chassis Cover on J2320 and J2350 Routers

■

125

JUNOS Software with Enhanced Services Hardware Guide

Figure 63: Matching the Chassis Slots and Tabs

Lower the cover fully onto the base, and slide it so that the front tabs match the
front slots and the chassis cover and base edges align completely.

Insert and tighten the flat head screws with a Phillips screwdriver.

Return the router to its installation site, and attach the grounding cable and the
power cables. (See “Connecting Power” on page 84.)

Press and release the power button to power on the router. Verify that the POWER
LED lights steadily.

Replacing Internal Compact Flashes on J2320 and J2350 Routers
The internal compact flash provides primary storage for the router and is installed
in a slot on the bottom of the J2320 or J2350 chassis (see Figure 64 on page 127). It
can accommodate software images, configuration files, and microcode. For
information about configuring the internal compact flash, see the JUNOS Software
Administration Guide.

NOTE: Use only compact flash cards purchased from Juniper Networks for your
J-series platform and model.

126

■

Replacing Internal Compact Flashes on J2320 and J2350 Routers

Chapter 8: Replacing Hardware Components

Figure 64: Location of J2320 and J2350 Internal Compact Flash

To replace the internal compact flash:
1.

Place an electrostatic bag or antistatic mat on a flat, stable surface.

Attach an electrostatic discharge (ESD) grounding strap to your bare wrist and
connect the strap to the ESD point on the chassis, or to an outside ESD point if
the router is disconnected from earth ground. For more information about ESD,
see “Preventing Electrostatic Discharge Damage” on page 201.

Press and release the power button to power off the router. Wait for the POWER
LED to turn off.

Remove the power cable from the power source receptacle.

Remove chassis cover. (See “Removing and Replacing the Chassis Cover on
J2320 and J2350 Routers” on page 124.)

WARNING: If the fans are still rotating, wait until they stop before proceeding with
the next step.

With a Phillips screwdriver, loosen the pan head screws that secure the internal
compact flash slot cover.

Remove the compact flash slot cover.

Gently grasp the compact flash, and slide it out of the compact flash slot (see
Figure 65 on page 128).

Replacing Internal Compact Flashes on J2320 and J2350 Routers

■

127

JUNOS Software with Enhanced Services Hardware Guide

Figure 65: Removing the J2320 or J2350 Internal Compact Flash

Place the compact flash on the antistatic mat or in the electrostatic bag.

10. With the vendor name and memory size facing up and the arrow pointing towards

the router, insert the new compact flash into the compact flash slot (see
Figure 66 on page 128).
Figure 66: Inserting the J2320 or J2350 Internal Compact Flash

11. Replace the compact flash slot cover.
12. Tighten the pan head screws that secure the compact flash slot cover.
13. Slide the chassis cover onto the chassis.
14. Replace the chassis cover. (See “Removing and Replacing the Chassis Cover on

J2320 and J2350 Routers” on page 124.)
15. Replace the power cable.
16. Press and release the power button to power on the router. Verify that the POWER

LED lights steadily.

128

■

Replacing Internal Compact Flashes on J2320 and J2350 Routers

Chapter 8: Replacing Hardware Components

Replacing Internal Compact Flashes on J4350 and J6350 Routers
The internal compact flash is installed in a slot on the bottom of the J4350 or J6350
chassis (see Figure 67 on page 129).

NOTE: Use only compact flash cards purchased from Juniper Networks for your
J-series platform and model.

Figure 67: Location of J4350 and J6350 Compact Flash

On some J4350 and J6350 Services Routers, the compact flash is in a horizontal
position, while on others it is in a vertical position. Figure 68 on page 130 shows the
alternative horizontal orientation of the compact flash.

Replacing Internal Compact Flashes on J4350 and J6350 Routers

■

129

JUNOS Software with Enhanced Services Hardware Guide

Figure 68: Alternative Horizontal Orientation of J4350 and J6350 Compact Flash

To replace the compact flash:
1.

Place an electrostatic bag or antistatic mat on a flat, stable surface.

Press and release the power button to power off the router. Wait for the POWER
LED to turn off.

Remove the power cord or cable from the power source receptacle.

Remove the screws from the sides and top of the chassis that secure the cover
to the chassis.

Slide the cover off the chassis.

WARNING: If the fans are still rotating, wait until they stop before proceeding with
the next step, especially if your compact flash is in the horizontal position (flat against
the system board).

130

■

Slide the compact flash out of its slot, as shown in Figure 69 on page 131.

Replacing Internal Compact Flashes on J4350 and J6350 Routers

Chapter 8: Replacing Hardware Components

Figure 69: Removing the J4350 or J6350 Compact Flash

Place the compact flash on the antistatic mat or in the electrostatic bag.

Slide the new compact flash into the slot and press down, as shown in
Figure 70 on page 131.

Figure 70: Inserting the J4350 or J6350 Compact Flash

NOTE: On some Services Routers the compact flash is in a horizontal position. If the
compact flash connection is horizontal, lay the compact flash behind the slot and
slide it forward until it clicks into place.
10. Slide the cover onto the chassis.
11. Replace and tighten the screws on the sides and top of the chassis that secure

the cover to the chassis.

Replacing Internal Compact Flashes on J4350 and J6350 Routers

■

131

JUNOS Software with Enhanced Services Hardware Guide

12. Replace the power cord or cable.
13. Press and release the power button to power on the router. Verify that the POWER

LED lights steadily.

Replacing External Compact Flashes
The external compact flash is an optional component on J2320 and J2350 Services
Routers. It provides secondary storage for the router and can accommodate software
images, configuration files, and microcode. If the internal compact flash fails on
startup, the router boots from the external compact flash.
For information about configuring the external compact flash, see the JUNOS Software
Administration Guide.

NOTE: Depending on your configuration, the Services Router might not have an
external compact flash. If no external compact flash is installed, proceed directly to
Step 10 to install the compact flash.
The external compact flash is installed in a slot on the rear of the J2320 or J2350
chassis.
To replace the external compact flash:
1.

Verify the device that the router used to boot by running the show system storage
command from the CLI. For example:
user@host> show system storage
Filesystem
/dev/ad0s1a
...

512-blocks
218254

Used
175546

Avail Capacity Mounted on
40526
81% /

The boot device is mounted on /. The internal compact flash is located at ad0.
The external compact flash is located at ad2. The USB storage device is located
at da0. This example shows that the router booted from the internal compact
flash.
If the show system storage output indicates that the router booted from the
external compact flash, you need to power off the router before replacing the
compact flash.

132

■

Place an electrostatic bag or antistatic mat on a flat, stable surface.

Press and release the power button to power off the router. Wait for the POWER
LED to turn off before you remove the compact flash.

Replacing External Compact Flashes

Chapter 8: Replacing Hardware Components

Skip this step, if the router did not boot from the external compact flash (see
step 1).
5.

With a Phillips screwdriver, loosen the pan head screws that secure the external
compact flash cover to the rear of the chassis (see Figure 71 on page 133).

Figure 71: Removing the External Compact Flash Cover

Remove the compact flash cover.

Eject the external compact flash by pressing the ejector button to the left of the
compact flash slot once to unlock the button, and again to eject the compact
flash (see Figure 72 on page 133).

Figure 72: Removing the External Compact Flash

Gently grasp the compact flash, and slide it out of the slot.

Place the compact flash on the antistatic mat or in the electrostatic bag.

10. With the vendor name and memory size facing up and the arrow pointing towards

the router, insert the new compact flash in the external compact flash slot (see
Figure 73 on page 133).
Figure 73: Inserting the External Compact Flash

11. Replace the compact flash slot cover.

Replacing External Compact Flashes

■

133

JUNOS Software with Enhanced Services Hardware Guide

12. Tighten the pan head screws that secures the compact flash slot cover to the

rear of the chassis.
13. Plug the power cord into the power supply.
14. Press and release the power button to power on the router. Verify that the POWER

LED lights steadily.

Replacing USB Storage Devices
USB storage devices are optional components on J-series Services Routers. If installed,
a USB storage device provides secondary storage for the router. It can accommodate
software images, configuration files, and microcode. If the internal compact flash
fails on startup, and the external compact flash is not installed or fails, the router
boots from the USB storage device.
For information about configuring the USB storage device, see the JUNOS Software
Interfaces and Routing Configuration Guide.

NOTE: For a list of supported USB storage devices, see the JUNOS Software with
Enhanced Services Release Notes at http://www.juniper.net.
To remove and install a USB storage device, perform the following procedures:
■

Removing the USB Storage Device on page 134

■

Installing the USB Storage Device on page 135

Removing the USB Storage Device
NOTE: Depending on your configuration, the Services Router might not have a USB
storage device. If no USB storage device is installed, proceed directly to “Installing
the USB Storage Device” on page 135.
The USB storage device is installed into the USB port on the front panel of the Services
Router. To remove the USB storage device:

134

■

Replacing USB Storage Devices

Chapter 8: Replacing Hardware Components

Verify the device that the router used to boot, by running the show system storage
command from the CLI. For example:
user@host> show system storage
Filesystem
/dev/ad0s1a
...

512-blocks
218254

Used
175546

Avail Capacity Mounted on
40526
81% /

Place an electrostatic bag or antistatic mat on a flat, stable surface.

Press and release the power button to power off the router. Wait for the POWER
LED to turn off before you remove the compact flash.
Skip this step, if the router did not boot from the external compact flash (see
Step 1).

Gently grasp the USB storage device and slide it out of the USB port.

Place the USB storage device on the antistatic mat or in the electrostatic bag.

Installing the USB Storage Device
To install the USB storage device:

NOTE: For a list of supported USB storage devices, see the JUNOS Software with
Enhanced Services Release Notes at http://www.juniper.net.

Orient the USB storage device with the USB port on the front panel of the router.

Replacing USB Storage Devices

■

135

JUNOS Software with Enhanced Services Hardware Guide

Insert the USB storage device into the USB port. If the USB storage device does
not easily slide into the port, it might not be oriented correctly. Turn the USB
storage device upside-down and try again.

To configure the USB storage device with the request system snapshot command,
see the JUNOS Software Administration Guide.

Replacing DRAM Modules
The DRAM installed on the Routing Engine provides storage for the routing and
forwarding tables and for other Routing Engine processes. The design of the Routing
Engine allows you to modify the DRAM configuration by adding DRAM modules to
the system board, or removing DRAM modules from the board.
The DRAM modules are located on the top of the system board, as shown in
Figure 74 on page 136 and Figure 75 on page 137. Two pairs of slots are available for
installing DRAM modules. Installing DRAM modules in slots away from each other
provides better performance than installing them in two adjacent slots.

NOTE: Use only DRAM modules purchased through Juniper Networks specifically for
your model.

Figure 74: J2320 and J2350 DRAM Location

136

■

Replacing DRAM Modules

Chapter 8: Replacing Hardware Components

Figure 75: J4350 and J6350 DRAM Location

To modify the DRAM configuration, use the following procedures:
■

Removing a DRAM Module on page 137

■

Installing a DRAM Module on page 138

Removing a DRAM Module
To remove a DRAM module:
1.

Place an electrostatic bag or antistatic mat on a flat, stable surface.

Press and release the power button to power off the router. Wait for the POWER
LED to turn off.

Unplug the power cord or cable from the power source receptacle.

Remove the screws from the sides and top of the chassis that secure the cover
to the chassis.

Slide the cover off the chassis. (For J2320 and J2350 routers, see “Removing and
Replacing the Chassis Cover on J2320 and J2350 Routers” on page 124.)

To release the DRAM module, press the plastic ejectors on both sides of the
module (see Figure 76 on page 138).

Grasp the DRAM module, being careful not to touch any electrical components
on the module, and firmly pull it out of the slot on the system board.

Place the DRAM module on the antistatic mat or in the electrostatic bag.

Replacing DRAM Modules

■

137

JUNOS Software with Enhanced Services Hardware Guide

Figure 76: Installing or Replacing DRAM Modules

Installing a DRAM Module
J2320, J2350, J4350 and J6350 Services Routers support 256-MB and 512-MB DRAM
modules. Use only DRAM modules purchased from Juniper Networks specifically for
your model.

NOTE: If you are installing a second DRAM module, do not install it in a slot adjacent
to the first module. For example, if the first DRAM module is installed in slot 1, install
the second module in slot 3 (see Figure 74 on page 136 and Figure 75 on page 137).
To install a DRAM module:
1.

138

■

Take the following steps if you have not already done so:
a.

Attach an electrostatic discharge (ESD) grounding strap to your bare wrist
and connect the strap to the ESD point on the chassis, or to an outside ESD
point if the router is disconnected from earth ground. For more information
about ESD, see the Getting Started Guide for your router.

Press and release the power button to power off the router. Wait for the
POWER LED to turn off.

Unplug the power cord or cable from the power source receptacle.

Remove the screws from the sides and top of the chassis that secure the
cover to the chassis.

Slide the cover off the chassis. (For J2320 and J2350 routers, see “Removing
and Replacing the Chassis Cover on J2320 and J2350 Routers” on page 124.)

Remove the DRAM module from its electrostatic bag.

Press the plastic ejectors on both sides of the DRAM slot to open it (see
Figure 76 on page 138).

Grasp the DRAM module by the edges, being careful not to touch any electrical
components.

Replacing DRAM Modules

Chapter 8: Replacing Hardware Components

Pressing firmly on both ends, push the module into the slot until the ejectors
click into the closed position (see Figure 76 on page 138).

Slide the cover onto the chassis.

Replace and tighten the screws on the sides and top of the chassis that secure
the cover to the chassis.

Replace the power cord or cable.

Press and release the power button to power on the router. Verify that the POWER
LED lights steadily.

10. To view the DRAM configuration and verify that it was installed correctly, issue

the show chassis routing-engine command, described in the JUNOS System Basics
and Services Command Reference. This command shows the total memory
installed.

Replacing Power System Components
The power cords on all Services Routers are replaceable.
You can add a second power supply to the J6350 Services Router that is of the same
type as the first (either AC or DC). The power supplies are located at the right rear
of the chassis (see Figure 15 on page 22 and Figure 17 on page 23). Each J6350
power supply provides power to all components in the router. The J6350 power
supplies are fully redundant. If one power supply fails or is removed, the remaining
power supply instantly assumes the entire electrical load. One power supply can
provide full power for as long as the router is operational.
Each J6350 power supply is hot-insertable and hot-removable.

CAUTION: Do not leave a power supply slot empty for more than a short time while
the Services Router is operational. The power supply or a blank power supply panel
must remain in the chassis for proper airflow.
To replace power system components, use the following procedures:
■

Replacing AC Power Supply Cords on page 139

■

Removing an AC Power Supply from J6350 Routers on page 140

■

Installing an AC Power Supply in J6350 Routers on page 141

■

Replacing DC Power Supply Cables on page 142

■

Removing a DC Power Supply on page 143

■

Installing a DC Power Supply on page 144

Replacing AC Power Supply Cords
To replace the AC power cord for a redundant power supply:

Replacing Power System Components

■

139

JUNOS Software with Enhanced Services Hardware Guide

Locate a replacement power cord with the type of plug appropriate for your
geographical location (see “AC Power, Connection, and Power Cord
Specifications” on page 69).

Press and release the power button to power off the router. Wait for the POWER
LED to turn off.

NOTE: If the power supply is a redundant power supply in a J6350 Services Router,
you can leave the router powered on and power flowing in the other power supply.

Unplug the power cord from the power source receptacle.

Unplug the power cord from the appliance inlet on the power supply faceplate.

Insert the appliance coupler end of the replacement power cord into the appliance
inlet on the power supply faceplate.

Insert the power cord plug into an AC power source receptacle.

NOTE: Each power supply must be connected to a dedicated AC power feed. For
information about connecting to AC power sources, see “Connecting
Power” on page 84.

Verify that the power cord does not block access to Services Router components
or drape where people might trip on it.

Press and release the power button to power on the router. Verify that the POWER
LED lights steadily.

Removing an AC Power Supply from J6350 Routers
The power supplies are located at the right rear of the chassis. A power supply weighs
2.4 lb (1.1 kg).
To remove an AC power supply from a J6350 Services Router (see
Figure 77 on page 141):

140

■

Press and release the power button to power off the Services Router. Wait for
the POWER LED to turn off.

Replacing Power System Components

Chapter 8: Replacing Hardware Components

NOTE: If the power supply is a redundant power supply in a J6350 Service Router,
you can leave the router powered on and power flowing in the other power supply.

Unplug the power cord from the power source receptacle.

Unplug the power cord from the appliance inlet on the power supply faceplate.

Slide the ejector tab on the power supply faceplate to the right and hold it in
place to unlock the power supply.

Grasp the handle on the power supply faceplate, and pull firmly to start removing
the power supply. Slide it halfway out of the chassis (see Figure 77 on page 141).

Place one hand underneath the power supply to support it and slide it completely
out of the chassis.

If you are not reinstalling a power supply into the emptied slot, install a blank
power supply panel over the slot.

Figure 77: Removing an AC Power Supply

Installing an AC Power Supply in J6350 Routers
To install an AC power supply in a J6350 Services Router (see Figure 78 on page 142):
1.

Using both hands, slide the power supply into the chassis until you feel resistance.

Firmly push the power supply into the chassis until it comes to a stop. Make sure
that the power supply faceplate is flush with any adjacent power supply faceplate.

Insert the appliance coupler end of a power cord into the appliance inlet on the
power supply faceplate.

Insert the power cord plug into an AC power source receptacle.

Replacing Power System Components

■

141

JUNOS Software with Enhanced Services Hardware Guide

NOTE: Each power supply must be connected to a dedicated AC power feed. For
information about connecting to AC power sources, see “Connecting
Power” on page 84.

Verify that the power cord does not block access to router components or drape
where people might trip on it.

Press and release the power button to power on the router. Verify that the POWER
LED lights steadily.

Figure 78: Installing an AC Power Supply

Replacing DC Power Supply Cables
To replace a power cable for a DC power supply:
1.

Locate a replacement power cable and a lug that meet the specifications defined
in “Chassis Grounding” on page 83 and “DC Power, Connection, and Power
Cable Specifications” on page 71.

CAUTION: A licensed electrician must attach a cable lug to the power cable that you
supply. A cable with an incorrectly attached lug can damage the router (for example,
by causing a short circuit).

142

■

Press and release the power button to power off the Services Router. Wait for
the POWER LED to turn off.

Ensure that the voltage across the DC power source cable leads is 0 V and that
the cable leads cannot become active during installation.

Replacing Power System Components

Chapter 8: Replacing Hardware Components

Remove the power cable from the DC power source.

Use a Phillips screwdriver to remove the clear plastic cover protecting the terminal
block.

Within the terminal block, remove the screw that fastens the power cable lug to
the terminal block.

Carefully move the power cable out of the way.

Using the removed screw, secure the replacement power cable (see 1) to the
appropriate terminal. Tighten the screw until snug. Do not overtighten.
The screw contains a captive washer used to secure the power cable lug to the
terminal block.

NOTE: Each power supply must be connected to a dedicated DC power feed. For
information about connecting to DC power sources, see “Connecting
Power” on page 84.
10. Dress the power cable appropriately.
11. Replace the clear plastic cover over the terminal block.
12. Verify that the power cable does not block access to router components or drape

where people might trip on it.
13. Press and release the power button to power on the router. Verify that the POWER

LED lights steadily.

Removing a DC Power Supply
The power supplies are located at the right rear of the chassis. A power supply weighs
2.4 lb (1.1 kg).
To remove a DC power supply (see Figure 79 on page 144):
1.

Press and release the power button to power off the Services Router. Wait for
the POWER LED to turn off.

Ensure that the voltage across the DC power source cable leads is 0 V and that
the cable leads cannot become active during installation.

Replacing Power System Components

■

143

JUNOS Software with Enhanced Services Hardware Guide

Remove the power cables from the DC power source.

Use a Phillips screwdriver to remove the clear plastic cover protecting the terminal
block.

Within the terminal block, remove the screws that fasten the power cable lugs
to the terminal block.

Carefully move the power cables out of the way.

Slide the ejector tab on the power supply faceplate to the right, and hold it in
place to unlock the power supply.

Grasp the handle on the power supply faceplate, and pull firmly to start removing
the power supply. Slide it halfway out of the chassis (see Figure 79 on page 144).

10. Place one hand underneath the power supply to support it, and slide it completely

out of the chassis.
11. If you are not reinstalling a power supply into the emptied slot, install a blank

power supply panel over the slot.

Figure 79: Removing a DC Power Supply

Installing a DC Power Supply
Each power supply in a DC-powered router must be connected to earth ground. A
ground terminal is provided on each DC power supply for this purpose.
To install a DC power supply (see Figure 80 on page 146):

144

■

Replacing Power System Components

Chapter 8: Replacing Hardware Components

Ensure that the voltage across the DC power source cable leads is 0 V and that
the cable leads cannot become active during installation.

Using both hands, slide the power supply into the chassis until you feel resistance.

Firmly push the power supply into the chassis until it comes to a stop. Make sure
that the power supply faceplate is flush with any adjacent power supply faceplate.

Use a Phillips screwdriver to remove the clear plastic cover protecting the terminal
block.

Within the terminal block, remove the two center screws next to the labels
–48 VDC and RTN.
Each screw contains a captive washer to secure a power cable lug to the terminal
block.

Using one of the removed screws, secure the positive (+) DC source power cable
lug to the RTN terminal. Tighten the screw until snug. Do not overtighten. Apply
between 8 lb-in. (0.9 Nm) and 9 lb-in. (1.02 Nm) of torque to the screw.

Using the other removed screw, secure the negative (–) DC source power cable
lug to the –48 VDC terminal. Tighten the screw until snug. Do not overtighten.
Apply between 8 lb-in. (0.9 Nm) and 9 lb-in. (1.02 Nm) of torque to the screw.

NOTE: Each power supply must be connected to a dedicated DC power feed. For
information about connecting to DC power sources, see “Connecting
Power” on page 84.

Dress the power cables appropriately.

10. Replace the clear plastic cover over the terminal block.
11. Verify that the power cord does not block access to router components or drape

where people might trip on it.
12. Press and release the power button to power on the router. Verify that the POWER

LED lights steadily.

Replacing Power System Components

■

145

JUNOS Software with Enhanced Services Hardware Guide

Figure 80: Installing a DC Power Supply

Replacing Crypto Accelerator Modules on J2320 and J2350 Routers
The Crypto Accelerator Module is a processor card that enhances performance of
cryptographic algorithms used in IP security (IPSec) services. The Crypto Module is
an optional feature on J2320 and J2350 Services Routers.
Figure 81 on page 146 shows the location of the Crypto Accelerator Module on J2320
and J2350 routers.
Figure 81: Crypto Accelerator Module Location on J2320 and J2350 Routers

To remove or install a Crypto Accelerator Module, use the following procedures:

146

■

Removing a J2320 or J2350 Crypto Accelerator Module on page 147

■

Installing a J2320 or J2350 Crypto Accelerator Module on page 148

Replacing Crypto Accelerator Modules on J2320 and J2350 Routers

Chapter 8: Replacing Hardware Components

Removing a J2320 or J2350 Crypto Accelerator Module
NOTE: If you are installing a Crypto Accelerator Module into a J2320 or J2350 Services
Router for the first time, proceed directly to “Installing a J2320 or J2350 Crypto
Accelerator Module” on page 148.
To remove the Crypto Accelerator Module:
1.

Place an electrostatic bag or antistatic mat on a flat stable surface to receive the
Crypto Module.

Press and release the power button to power off the Services Router. Wait for
the POWER LED to turn off.

Unplug the power cord or cable from the power source receptacle.

Remove the chassis cover. (See “Removing and Replacing the Chassis Cover on
J2320 and J2350 Routers” on page 124.)

Locate the Crypto Module on the system board (see Figure 81 on page 146).

Using a Phillips screwdriver, remove the three screws from top of the Crypto
Accerator Module, as shown in Figure 82 on page 147.

Figure 82: Removing a J2320 or J2350 Crypto Module

Gently lift the Crypto Module to disengage it from the connector on the system
board, as shown in Figure 82 on page 147.

Place the Crypto Module on the antistatic mat or in the electrostatic bag.

Replacing Crypto Accelerator Modules on J2320 and J2350 Routers

■

147

JUNOS Software with Enhanced Services Hardware Guide

Installing a J2320 or J2350 Crypto Accelerator Module
To install a Crypto Accelerator Module:
1.

Take the following steps if you have not already done so:
a.

Attach an electrostatic discharge (ESD) grounding strap to your bare wrist
and connect the strap to the ESD point on the chassis, or to an outside ESD
point if the router is disconnected from earth ground. For more information
about ESD, see “Preventing Electrostatic Discharge Damage” on page 201.

Press and release the power button to power off the Services Router. Wait
for the POWER LED to turn off.

Unplug the power cord or cable from the power source receptacle.

Remove the chassis cover. (See “Removing and Replacing the Chassis Cover
on J2320 and J2350 Routers” on page 124.)

Locate the Crypto Module connector on the system board (see
Figure 83 on page 148).

Remove the Crypto Module from its electrostatic bag.

Align the notches in the Crypto Module with the notches in the connector on the
system board and push the Crypto Module down flat, as shown in
Figure 83 on page 148.

Figure 83: Installing a J2320 or J2350 Crypto Accelerator Module

148

■

Insert the three screws and tighten them until snug. Do not overtighten.

Replace the chassis cover. (See “Removing and Replacing the Chassis Cover on
J2320 and J2350 Routers” on page 124.)

Replace the power cord or cable.

Replacing Crypto Accelerator Modules on J2320 and J2350 Routers

Chapter 8: Replacing Hardware Components

Press and release the power button to power on the router. Verify that the POWER
LED lights steadily.

Verify that the Crypto Module is correctly installed by issuing the show chassis
hardware command, as shown in the following example:
user@host> show chassis hardware
user@host> show chassis hardware
Hardware inventory:
Item
Version Part number
Chassis
Midplane
REV 00
710-012339
System IO
REV 00
710-012315
Crypto Module
Acceleration
Routing Engine
REV 00
710-012149
FPC 0
PIC 0
Power Supply 0

Serial number
JN1086AA8ADA
NE0664
NE3564

Description
J4350
JX350 System IO
Crypto
RE-J4350-2540
FPC
4x GE Base PIC

If Crypto Module appears in the output, the Crypto Accelerator Module is installed
correctly.

Replacing Crypto Accelerator Modules on J4350 and J6350 Routers
The Crypto Accelerator Module is a processor card that enhances performance of
cryptographic algorithms used in IP security (IPSec) services. The Crypto Module is
a standard feature on J6350 Services Routers and an optional feature on the J4350
Services Routers.
Figure 84 on page 150 shows the location of the Crypto Accelerator Module.

Replacing Crypto Accelerator Modules on J4350 and J6350 Routers

■

149

JUNOS Software with Enhanced Services Hardware Guide

Figure 84: Crypto Accelerator Module Location on J4350 and J6350 Routers

To modify a Crypto Accelerator Module configuration, use the following procedures:
■

Removing a J4350 or J6350 Crypto Accelerator Module on page 150

■

Installing a J4350 or J6350 Crypto Accelerator Module on page 152

Removing a J4350 or J6350 Crypto Accelerator Module
NOTE: If you are installing a Crypto Accelerator Module into a J4350 Services Router
for the first time, proceed directly to “Installing a J4350 or J6350 Crypto Accelerator
Module” on page 152.
To remove the Crypto Accelerator Module:

150

■

Place an electrostatic bag or antistatic mat on a flat stable surface to receive the
Crypto Module.

Press and release the power button to power off the Services Router. Wait for
the POWER LED to turn off.

Unplug the power cord or cable from the power source receptacle.

Remove the screws from the sides and the top of the chassis, and slide the cover
off the chassis.

Replacing Crypto Accelerator Modules on J4350 and J6350 Routers

Chapter 8: Replacing Hardware Components

Locate the Crypto Module on the system board (see Figure 84 on page 150).

Using a Phillips screwdriver remove the screw, as shown in Figure 85 on page 151.

Figure 85: Removing a J4350 or J6350 Crypto Module Screw

Pull the white release clips on either side of the Crypto Module out to either side,
as shown in Figure 86 on page 151, to tilt the Crypto Module upward.

Figure 86: Removing and Installing a J4350 or J6350 Crypto Accelerator Module

Slide the Crypto Module out of its socket.

10. Remove the standoff washer that was under the Crypto Module.
11. Place the Crypto Module on the antistatic mat or in the electrostatic bag.

Replacing Crypto Accelerator Modules on J4350 and J6350 Routers

■

151

JUNOS Software with Enhanced Services Hardware Guide

Installing a J4350 or J6350 Crypto Accelerator Module
To install a Crypto Accelerator Module:
1.

Take the following steps if you have not already done so:
a.

Attach an electrostatic discharge (ESD) grounding strap to your bare wrist
and connect the strap to the ESD point on the chassis, or to an outside ESD
point if the router is disconnected from earth ground. For more information
about ESD, see “Preventing Electrostatic Discharge Damage” on page 201.

Press and release the power button to power off the Services Router. Wait
for the POWER LED to turn off.

Unplug the power cord or cable from the power source receptacle.

Remove the screws from the sides and the top of the chassis, and slide the
cover off the chassis.

Locate the Crypto Module socket on the system board (see Figure 84 on page 150).
The socket is tipped up at an angle when empty.

If a screw and standoff washer are already in place (see Figure 85 on page 151),
remove them.

Remove the Crypto Module from its electrostatic bag and insert it into the socket.

Push the Crypto Module down flat against the main board until the release clips
click into place, as shown in Figure 86 on page 151.

Insert the standoff washer under the Crypto Module.

Insert the screw and tighten it until snug. Do not overtighten.

Slide the cover onto the router, and replace and tighten the cover screws.

Replace the power cord or cable.

10. Press and release the power button to power on the router. Verify that the POWER

LED lights steadily.
11. Verify that the Crypto Module is correctly installed by issuing the show chassis

hardware command, as shown in the following example:
user@host> show chassis hardware
Hardware inventory:
Item
Version
Chassis
Midplane
REV 00
System IO
REV 00
Routing Engine
REV 00
Crypto Module
acceleration
FPC 0
PIC 0

Part number
710-014594
710-012315
710-012149

Serial number
JN1086A34ADA

Description
J4350
JX350 System IO
RE-J4350-2540
Crypto
FPC
4x GE Base PIC

If Crypto Module appears in the output, the Crypto Accelerator Module is installed
correctly.

152

■

Replacing Crypto Accelerator Modules on J4350 and J6350 Routers

Chapter 8: Replacing Hardware Components

Replacing Air Filters on J2350 Routers
The cooling fans on J2350 routers draw air through vents along the left side of the
chassis and exhaust it through vents on the right side of the chassis. For more
information, see “J2320 and J2350 Cooling System” on page 19.
On J2350 routers that comply with Network Equipment Building System (NEBS)
criteria, the air intake grid contains a filter. To verify that the system is a
NEBS-compliant system, run the show chassis hardware command. A NEBS-compliant
system displays the term NEBS in the output.
We recommend changing the filter every 6 months. However, the optimal filter
replacement interval can vary depending on the environment where the router is
located. If temperature alarms appear, inspect the air filter.
To replace the air filter:
1.

Loosen the filter tray thumbscrew at the rear of the J2350 chassis.

Hold the screw firmly and pull it away from the chassis until you have pulled the
attached filter tray out of the chassis (see Figure 87 on page 153).

Figure 87: Removing the Air Filter Tray

Hook-and-loop fasteners on the base of the filter tray hold the air filter inside
the tray. Grasp the air filter with your fingers and gently pull it away from the
filter tray.

Set the old air filter aside.

Place the new filter so that its edge aligns with the first hook-and-loop fastener
as shown Figure 88 on page 154.

Replacing Air Filters on J2350 Routers

■

153

JUNOS Software with Enhanced Services Hardware Guide

Figure 88: Placing the Air Filter on the Air Filter Tray

Press down on the filter until it is firmly seated against the bottom of the tray.

Hold the filter tray with the thumbscrew so that its sheet metal side faces the
power supply fan exhaust. The air filter tray is designed to prevent it from being
inserted incorrectly (see Figure 89 on page 154).

Figure 89: Inserting the Air Filter Tray on J2350 Routers

Slide the tray fully into the air filter opening.

Tighten the thumbscrew to the chassis.

Replacing Air Filters on J4350 and J6350 Routers
The front panel of J4350 and J6350 Services Routers contains an air intake grid with
a protective cover and a filter, as shown in Figure 90 on page 155.

154

■

Replacing Air Filters on J4350 and J6350 Routers

Chapter 8: Replacing Hardware Components

Figure 90: Attaching Air Filter and Filter Cover

We recommend changing the filter every 6 months. However, the optimal filter
replacement interval can vary depending on the environment where the router is
located. If temperature alarms appear, inspect the air filter.
To replace the air filter:
1.

Remove the filter cover by squeezing the plastic tabs on either side of the filter
cover.

Pull the filter cover away from the chassis.

Remove the old filter.

Place the new filter in the opening.

Replace the filter cover by pressing it until it clicks into place.

Replacing Air Filters on J4350 and J6350 Routers

■

155

JUNOS Software with Enhanced Services Hardware Guide

156

■

Replacing Air Filters on J4350 and J6350 Routers

Chapter 9

Troubleshooting a Services Router
This chapter contains the following topics:
■

Troubleshooting Hardware Components on page 157

■

Resetting the Configuration File When the Router Is Inaccessible on page 160

■

Recovering the Root Password on page 161

■

Recovering Primary Boot Devices on page 164

■

Contacting the Juniper Networks Technical Assistance Center on page 167

Troubleshooting Hardware Components
This section contains the following topics:
■

Monitoring and Correcting Chassis Alarm Conditions on page 157

■

Troubleshooting Power Management on page 159

Monitoring and Correcting Chassis Alarm Conditions
You can monitor alarms to troubleshoot hardware problems on a Services Router.
Alarms alert you to conditions on the router chassis, or in the system software that
might prevent the router from operating normally. You can monitor active alarms
from the J-Web interface or the CLI.
Services Router alarms warn you about conditions that can prevent the router from
operating normally. Chassis and system alarm conditions are preset. When the
Routing Engine detects an alarm condition, it lights the ALARM LED on the front
panel. When the condition is corrected, the light turns off.
To view a more detailed description of the alarm cause, issue the show chassis alarms
CLI command:
user@host> show chassis alarms

Table 47 on page 158 describes alarms that can occur for a chassis component such
as the Routing Engine or a Physical Interface Module (PIM).

Troubleshooting Hardware Components

■

157

JUNOS Software with Enhanced Services Hardware Guide

Table 47: Chassis Alarm Conditions and Corrective Actions
Component

Alarm Conditions

Corrective Action

Alarm Severity

Alternative boot media

The Services Router boots from
an alternative boot device.

Typically, the router boots from the
internal compact flash. If you
configured your router to boot from
an alternative boot device, ignore this
alarm condition.

Yellow (minor)

If you did not configure the router to
boot from an alternative boot device,
contact JTAC. (See “Requesting
Technical Support” on page xxii.)
PIM

A PIM has failed.

Replace the failed PIM. (See
“Replacing a PIM” on page 120)

Red (major)

Reformat the compact flash and
install a bootable image. (See the
JUNOS Software Administration Guide.)

Yellow (minor)

When a PIM fails, it attempts
to reboot. If the Routing Engine
detects that a PIM is rebooting
too often, it shuts down the
PIM.
Routing Engine

An error occurred during the
process of reading or writing
compact flash.

If this remedy fails, you must replace
the failed Routing Engine. To contact
JTAC, see “Requesting Technical
Support” on page xxii.
Routing Engine temperature is
too warm.

Routing Engine fan has failed.

158

■

Troubleshooting Hardware Components

■

Check the room temperature.
(See “Router Environmental
Tolerances” on page 66.)

■

Check the air flow. (See “General
Site Guidelines” on page 63.)

■

Check the fans. If you must
replace a fan or the Routing
Engine, contact JTAC. (See
“Requesting Technical
Support” on page xxii.)

■

If the router has an air filter,
check the filter and replace it if
it appears clogged. (See
“Replacing Air Filters on J2350
Routers” on page 153or
“Replacing Air Filters on J4350
and J6350 Routers” on page 154.)

Replace the failed fan. To contact
JTAC, see “Requesting Technical
Support” on page xxii.

Yellow (minor)

Red (major)

Chapter 9: Troubleshooting a Services Router

Troubleshooting Power Management
If one or more PIMs remain offline when you power on the chassis, the combination
of PIMs installed might exceed the power and heat capacity of the chassis. For
information about the maximum power and heat tokens permitted for each chassis,
see “Planning for Power Management” on page 72.
To bring the PIM online:
1.

Check if the PIM exceeds the power and heat tokens permitted by issuing the
show chassis fpc and show chassis power-ratings CLI commands:
user@host> show chassis fpc
Temp CPU Utilization (%)
Memory
Utilization (%)
Slot State
(C) Total Interrupt
DRAM (MB) Heap

Buffer

Online

-------------------- CPU less FPC --------------------

Online

-------------------- CPU less FPC --------------------

Online

-------------------- CPU less FPC --------------------

3 Empty
4 Empty
5 Offline

------ Hardware exceeds High Power token limits ------

In this example, J-series power management has placed the PIM in slot 5 in an
offline state to prevent damage. If brought online, the PIM would cause the
combination of PIMs to exceed the maximum limit of 83 high-power tokens for
the J2350 router.
user@host> show chassis power-ratings
Device

Low

Total Tokens
FPC 1
FPC 2
FPC 3
FPC 4
FPC 5
Tokens Used

High
Power
83
6
3
3
0
2
14

Heat
Power
83
27
27
27
0
27
108

Ratings
83
21
18
18
0
2
59

OK
OK
OK
OK
Exceeded
-

NOTE: In the show chassis power-ratings command output, the PIM slot number is
reported as an FPC number.
The offline PIM is not powered off and continues to draw minimal power.
2.

To bring the PIM online, you have the following options:

Troubleshooting Hardware Components

■

159

JUNOS Software with Enhanced Services Hardware Guide

■

Remove one or more PIMs from the chassis. This option requires that you
power off the router. For more information about removing PIMs, see
“Removing a PIM” on page 120

■

Bring the PIM online without powering off the router. To do so, use the set
chassis fpc offline command to set another PIM slot in the chassis to the
offline state. For example:
user@host# set chassis fpc 2 offline

If the power and heat tokens no longer exceed the maximum, the PIMs that
were placed offline by J-series power management are brought online
automatically.
■

Use the set chassis disable-power-management command to disable J-series
power management:
user@host# set chassis disable-power-management

CAUTION: Use extreme caution when disabling J-series power management. To
prevent equipment damage, do not install a combination of PIMs that exceeds the
power or heat capacity of your router when J-series power management is disabled.
The set chassis disable-power-management command brings the offline PIMs
online automatically.
To reenable J-series power management, remove the set chassis
disable-power-management command from the configuration. For detailed information
about the set chassis fpc offline and set chassis disable-power-management commands,
see the JUNOS System Basics Configuration Guide.

Resetting the Configuration File When the Router Is Inaccessible
You can use the router's RESET CONFIG button to restore the router's configuration
file when the current one is faulty or fails. You can also change the default behavior
of the RESET CONFIG button.

Using the RESET CONFIG Button
If a configuration fails or denies management access to the router, you can use the
RESET CONFIG button to restore the router to the factory default configuration or a
rescue configuration. For example, if someone inadvertently commits a configuration
that denies management access to a router, you can delete the invalid configuration
and replace it with a rescue configuration by pressing the RESET CONFIG button. The
button is recessed to prevent it from being pressed accidentally.

160

■

Resetting the Configuration File When the Router Is Inaccessible

Chapter 9: Troubleshooting a Services Router

The rescue configuration is a previously committed, valid configuration. You must
have previously set the rescue configuration through the J-Web interface or the CLI.
To press the RESET CONFIG button, insert a small probe (such as a straightened paper
clip) into the pinhole on the front panel (see Figure 8 on page 13 and
Figure 9 on page 13):
■

By default, pressing and quickly releasing the RESET CONFIG button loads and
commits the rescue configuration through the J-Web interface or the CLI. (For
details, see the J-Web Interface User Guide and the JUNOS CLI User Guide.)

■

By default, pressing and holding the RESET CONFIG button for 15 seconds or
more—until the STATUS LED blinks red—deletes all configurations on the router,
including the backup configurations and rescue configuration, and loads and
commits the factory configuration. (For details about the factory default settings,
see the JUNOS Software Administration Guide.)

Changing the RESET CONFIG Button Behavior
You can change the default operation of the the RESET CONFIG button by limiting
how the button resets the router:
■

To prevent the RESET CONFIG button from setting the router to the factory default
configuration and deleting all other configurations, enter the following command.
You can still press and quickly release the button to reset it to the rescue
configuration.
user@host# set chassis config-button no-clear

■

To prevent the RESET CONFIG button from setting the router to the rescue
configuration, enter the following command. You can still press and hold button
for 15 seconds or more to reset the router to the factory defaults.
user@host# set chassis config-button no-rescue

■

To disable the button and prevent the router from resetting to either configuration,
use the following command:
user@host# set chassis config-button no-clear no-rescue

The no-rescue option prevents the RESET CONFIG button from loading the rescue
configuration. The no-clear option prevents the RESET CONFIG button from deleting
all configurations on the router.
To return the function of the RESET CONFIG to its default behavior, remove the
config-button statement from the router configuration.

Recovering the Root Password
If you forget the root password for the router, you can use the password recovery
procedure to reset the root password.

Recovering the Root Password

■

161

JUNOS Software with Enhanced Services Hardware Guide

NOTE: You need console access to recover the root password.
To recover the root password:
1.

Power off the router by pressing the power button on the front panel.

Turn off the power to the management device, such as a PC or laptop computer,
that you want to use to access the CLI.

Plug one end of the Ethernet rollover cable supplied with the router into the
RJ-45 to DB-9 serial port adapter supplied with the router (see
Figure 91 on page 162).

Plug the RJ-45 to DB-9 serial port adapter into the serial port on the management
device (see Figure 91 on page 162).

Connect the other end of the Ethernet rollover cable to the console port on the
router (see Figure 91 on page 162).

Figure 91: Connecting to the Console Port on the J4350 or J6350 Services Router

162

■

Turn on the power to the management device.

On the management device, start your asynchronous terminal emulation
application (such as Microsoft Windows Hyperterminal) and select the appropriate
COM port to use (for example, COM1).

Configure the port settings as follows:
■

Bits per second: 9600

■

Data bits: 8

■

Parity: None

Recovering the Root Password

Chapter 9: Troubleshooting a Services Router

■

Stop bits: 1

■

Flow control: None

10. When the following prompt appears, press the Spacebar to access the router's

bootstrap loader command prompt:
Hit [Enter] to boot immediately, or space bar for command prompt.
Booting [kernel] in 9 seconds...

11. At the following prompt, enter boot -s to start up the system in single-user mode.
ok boot -s

12. At the following prompt, enter recovery to start the root password recovery

procedure.
Enter full pathname of shell or 'recovery' for root password recovery or
RETURN for /bin/sh: recovery

13. Enter configuration mode in the CLI.
14. Set the root password. For example:
user@host# set system root-authentication plain-text-password

For more information about configuring the root password, see the JUNOS System
Basics Configuration Guide.
15. At the following prompt, enter the new root password. For example:
New password: juniper1

Retype new password:

16. At the second prompt, reenter the new root password.
17. If you are finished configuring the network, commit the configuration.
root@host# commit
commit complete

18. Exit configuration mode in the CLI.
19. Exit operational mode in the CLI.
20. At the prompt, enter y to reboot the router.

Recovering the Root Password

■

163

JUNOS Software with Enhanced Services Hardware Guide

Reboot the system? [y/n] y

Recovering Primary Boot Devices
All Services Routers use a compact flash to store JUNOS Enhanced Services, router
configuration files, and log files. The internal compact flash is not hot-swappable and
is accessible only after you remove the cover on the back panel of the router chassis.
In addition to the internal compact flash, J2320 and J2350 Services Routers have a
slot in the front of the chassis for external flash media. All Services Routers also
support externally pluggable USB storage devices. If the primary storage medium
becomes corrupted and no secondary medium is in place, you can reload the JUNOS
recovery software package onto the corrupted compact flash card with a desktop or
laptop computer running either a UNIX, Microsoft Windows 2000, or Windows XP
operating system.
This section contains the following topics:
■

Why Compact Flash Recovery Might Be Necessary on page 164

■

Recommended Recovery Hardware and Software on page 164

■

Configuring Internal Compact Flash Recovery on page 165

Why Compact Flash Recovery Might Be Necessary
For media redundancy, we recommend that you keep a secondary storage medium
attached and updated at all times. Use the request system snapshot command to
perform the update. (For instructions, see the JUNOS Software Administration Guide.)
If the internal compact flash fails at startup, the Services Router automatically boots
itself from the external compact flash or USB storage device. When a redundant
storage medium is not available, the router is unable to boot and does not come
back online. This situation can occur if the power fails during a JUNOS Enhanced
Services upgrade and the physical or logical storage media on the router are corrupted.
If the primary storage medium becomes corrupted and no secondary medium is in
place, you can reload the JUNOS Enhanced Services image onto the corrupted compact
flash with a desktop or laptop computer running either a UNIX, Microsoft
Windows 2000, or Windows XP operating system.

CAUTION: This procedure does not recover any router configuration files. After you
reinstall JUNOS Enhanced Services, all the information on the original internal compact
flash is lost.

Recommended Recovery Hardware and Software
Before configuring compact flash recovery, assemble the equipment and software
listed in Table 48 on page 165.

164

■

Recovering Primary Boot Devices

Chapter 9: Troubleshooting a Services Router

Table 48: Recommended Recovery Hardware and Software
Recommended Hardware and Software

Examples

Recovery Hardware

Host system

Desktop or laptop PC equipped with a PCMCIA controller or USB port

Adapter appropriate for your system

■

For systems with PCMCIA controllers, a compact-flash-to-PCMCIA
adapter—for example, a Macally PCM-CF compact flash PCMCIA adapter.

■

For systems with a USB port, a USB-to-compact-flash adapter. For
example:
■

SIIG USB 2.0 Card Reader, model US2274, part number JU-CF0122

■

MediaGear USB 2.0 Combo 9-in-4, model MGTR100

■

AVP USB 8-in-1 Card Reader, model UC-28

■

Inland Multi-Plus Card Reader, part number 08310

■

HummingBird Multi Card Reader, HCR 81

Recovery Software

Software appropriate for your system

Systems running Windows require additional
software.

■

UNIX with PCMCIA drivers

■

Windows 2000, or Windows XP

■

WinZip, gzip, or a similar compression utility

■

A utility such as the following that allows you to write files to unformatted
devices:
■

Norton Ghost

■

dd utility from the Cygwin package

■

physdiskwrite utility

Configuring Internal Compact Flash Recovery
To recover an internal compact flash with a corrupt or missing operating system,
you must remove the corrupt internal compact from the J-series Services Router,
plug it into a PC with a PCMIA adapter or USB card reader, copy the JUNOS recovery
software package onto it, and reinstall on the router.
Recovery software packages are available from the same location as J-series upgrade
software packages. (See the JUNOS Software Administration Guide.)
To recover an internal compact flash:
1.

Plug the compact flash into a PCMCIA adapter or USB card reader.

Plug the PCMCIA adapter or USB card reader into the host PC and verify that the
compact flash is recognized by the operating system.

Select the appropriate recovery software package according to the size of your
compact flash. The uncompressed package must have the same size as the target
compact flash capacity: 128 MB, 256 MB, 512 MB or 1024 MB. The recovery
software package name indicates the size of the package. For information about
recovery software package names, see the JUNOS Software Administration Guide.

Recovering Primary Boot Devices

■

165

JUNOS Software with Enhanced Services Hardware Guide

Copy the software package to a temporary directory on the host PC and
uncompress it with a compression utility, such as WinZip.

Copy the uncompressed software package from the temporary directory to the
compact flash with one of the following commands:

CAUTION: You must use the correct target device name. Failure to do so might
damage other storage devices connected to the host PC.

■

On a UNIX PC, use the command dd if=filename of=/dev/device_name.
Replace filename with the name of the uncompressed image, and device_name
with the name of the unformatted PCMCIA card device. For example:
root# dd if=junos-jseries-7.0–20041028.0–export-cf128 of=/dev/hde
250368+0 records in250368+0 records out

■

On a Windows 2000 or Windows XP PC, use the Norton Ghost, dd, or
physdiskwrite utility. The following example shows the use of physdiskwrite:
C:\> physdiskwrite —u junos-jseries-7.0–20041028.0–export-cf512
physdiskwrite v0.5 by Manuel Kasper
Searching for physical drives...
Information for \\.\PhysicalDrive0:
Windows: cyl: 2432
tpc: 255
spt: 63
C/H/S: 16383/16/63
Model: HITACHI_DK23DA-20
Serial number: 123ABC
Firmware rev.: 00J2A0G0
Information for \\.\PhysicalDrive1:
Windows: cyl: 125
tpc: 255
spt: 63
Which disk do you want to write? (0..1) 1
WARNING: that disk is larger than 800 MB! Make sure you're
not accidentally overwriting your primary hard disk!
Proceeding on your own risk...
About to overwrite the contents of disk 1 with new data.
Proceed? (y/n) y
511451136/511451136 bytes written in total

NOTE: The copy process can take several minutes.
After copying the software package to the compact flash, you can use it as the internal
compact flash in any J-series Services Router.

166

■

Recovering Primary Boot Devices

Chapter 9: Troubleshooting a Services Router

Contacting the Juniper Networks Technical Assistance Center
If you need assistance while troubleshooting a Services Router, open a support case
using the Case Manager link at http://www.juniper.net/support/, or call 1-888-314-JTAC
(within the United States) or 1-408-745-9500 (from outside the United States). For
more information, see “Contacting Customer Support and Returning
Hardware” on page 169.

Contacting the Juniper Networks Technical Assistance Center

■

167

JUNOS Software with Enhanced Services Hardware Guide

168

■

Contacting the Juniper Networks Technical Assistance Center

Chapter 10

Contacting Customer Support and
Returning Hardware
This chapter describes how to return the Services Router or individual components
to Juniper Networks for repair or replacement. It contains the following topics:
■

Locating Component Serial Numbers on page 169

■

Contacting Customer Support on page 172

■

Return Procedure on page 172

■

Packing a Router or Component for Shipment on page 173

Locating Component Serial Numbers
Before contacting Juniper Networks to request a Return Materials Authorization
(RMA), you must find the serial number on the router or component. To list the router
components and their serial numbers, enter the following command-line interface
(CLI) command:
user@host> show chassis hardware
Hardware inventory:
Item
Version Part number
Chassis
Midplane
REV 00
710-012339
System IO
REV 00
710-012315
Routing Engine
REV 00
710-012151
HW crypto
FPC 0
PIC 0
PIC

Serial number
015810200500

Description
J6350
JX350 System IO

RE-J6350-3400
Crypto accelerator
FPC
4x GE Base

NOTE: In the show chassis hardware command, the PIM slot number is reported as
an FPC number and the PIM number (always 0) is reported as the PIC number.
Most components also have a serial number ID label attached to the component
body.

Locating Component Serial Numbers

■

169

JUNOS Software with Enhanced Services Hardware Guide

The following sections describe the label location on each type of component:
■

J2320 and J2350 Chassis Serial Number and Agency Labels on page 170

■

J4350 and J6350 Chassis Serial Number and Agency Labels on page 171

■

PIM Serial Number Label on page 172

■

Power Supply Serial Number Labels on page 172

J2320 and J2350 Chassis Serial Number and Agency Labels
J2320 and J2350 Services Routers have serial number ID labels located on the back
of the chassis, as shown in Figure 92 on page 170, and an agency label on the bottom
of the chassis, as shown in Figure 93 on page 170.
Figure 92: Location of the Serial Number ID Labels

Figure 93: Location of the Agency Labels

170

■

Locating Component Serial Numbers

Chapter 10: Contacting Customer Support and Returning Hardware

J4350 and J6350 Chassis Serial Number and Agency Labels
J4350 and J6350 Services Routers have serial number ID labels on the back of the
chassis, as shown in Figure 94 on page 171, and an agency label on the bottom front
corner, as shown in Figure 95 on page 171.
Figure 94: Location of Serial Number ID Labels

Figure 95: Location of the Agency Labels

Locating Component Serial Numbers

■

171

JUNOS Software with Enhanced Services Hardware Guide

PIM Serial Number Label
PIMs are field-replaceable. Each PIM has a unique serial number. The serial number
label is located on the right side of the PIM, when the PIM is horizontally oriented
(as it would be installed in the router). The exact location might be slightly different
on different PIMs, depending on the placement of components on the PIM board.

Power Supply Serial Number Labels
The power supplies installed in the J6350 Services Router are field-replaceable. Each
power supply has a unique serial number. The serial number label is located on the
top of the power supply.

Contacting Customer Support
After you have located the serial numbers of the components you need to return,
contact Juniper Networks Technical Assistance Center (JTAC) in one of the following
ways.
You can contact JTAC 24 hours a day, seven days a week.
■

On the Web, using the Case Manager link at http://www.juniper.net/support/

■

By telephone:
From the US and Canada: 1-888-314-JTAC
From all other locations: 1-408-745-9500

If contacting JTAC by telephone, enter your 11-digit case number followed by the
pound (#) key if this is an existing case, or press the star (*) key to be routed to the
next available support engineer.

Information You Might Need to Supply to JTAC
When requesting support from JTAC by telephone, be prepared to provide the
following information:
■

Your existing case number, if you have one

■

Details of the failure or problem

■

Type of activity being performed on the router when the problem occurred

■

Configuration data displayed by one or more show commands

Return Procedure
If the problem cannot be resolved by the JTAC technician a Return Materials
Authorization (RMA) number is issued. This number is used to track the returned
material at the factory and to return repaired or new components to the customer
as needed.

172

■

Contacting Customer Support

Chapter 10: Contacting Customer Support and Returning Hardware

NOTE: Do not return any component to Juniper Networks unless you have first
obtained an RMA number. Juniper Networks reserves the right to refuse shipments
that do not have an RMA. Refused shipments are returned to the customer via collect
freight.
For more information about return and repair policies, see the customer support
Web page at http://www.juniper.net/support/guidelines.html.
For product problems or technical support issues, open a support case using the Case
Manager link at http://www.juniper.net/support/, or call 1-888-314-JTAC (within the
United States) or 1-408-745-9500 (outside the United States).
When you need to return a component:
1.

Determine the part number and serial number of the component. For instructions,
see “Locating Component Serial Numbers” on page 169.

Obtain an RMA number from JTAC.

Provide the following information:
■

Part number and serial number of component

■

Your name, organization name, telephone number, fax number, and shipping
address

■

Description of the failure
The support representative validates your request and issues an RMA number
for return of the component.

Pack the router or component for shipment, as described in “Packing a Router
or Component for Shipment” on page 173.

Packing a Router or Component for Shipment
This section contains the following topics:
■

Tools and Parts Required on page 173

■

Packing the Services Router for Shipment on page 174

■

Packing Components for Shipment on page 174

Tools and Parts Required
To remove components from the router or the router from a rack, you need the
following tools and parts:
■

Blank panels to cover empty slots

■

Electrostatic bag or antistatic mat, for each component

■

Electrostatic discharge (ESD) grounding wrist strap

Packing a Router or Component for Shipment

■

173

JUNOS Software with Enhanced Services Hardware Guide

■

Flat-blade screwdriver, approximately 1/4 in. (6 mm)

■

Phillips (+) screwdrivers, numbers 1 and 2

Packing the Services Router for Shipment
To pack the router for shipment, follow this procedure:
1.

Retrieve the shipping carton and packing materials in which the router was
originally shipped. If you do not have these materials, contact your Juniper
Networks representative about approved packaging materials.

On the console or other management device connected to the master Routing
Engine, enter CLI operational mode and issue the following command to shut
down the router software.
user@host> request system halt

Wait until a message appears on the console confirming that the operating system
has halted. For more information about the command, see the JUNOS Software
Interfaces and Routing Configuration Guide.
4.

Shut down power to the router by pressing the power button on the front panel
of the router.

Disconnect power from the router. For instructions, see “Replacing AC Power
Supply Cords” on page 139.

Remove the cables that connect to all external devices. For instructions, see
“Removing PIM Cables” on page 123.

Remove all field-replaceable units (FRUs) from the router.

If the router is installed on a wall or rack, have one person support the weight
of the router, while another person unscrews and removes the mounting screws.

Place the router in the shipping carton.

10. Cover the router with an ESD bag, and place the packing foam on top of and

around the router.
11. Replace the accessory box on top of the packing foam.
12. Securely tape the box closed.
13. Write the RMA number on the exterior of the box to ensure proper tracking.

Packing Components for Shipment
To pack and ship individual components, follow these guidelines:

174

■

Packing a Router or Component for Shipment

Chapter 10: Contacting Customer Support and Returning Hardware

■

When you return components, make sure they are adequately protected with
packing materials and packed so that the pieces are prevented from moving
around inside the carton.

■

Use the original shipping materials if they are available.

■

Place individual boards in electrostatic bags.

■

Write the RMA number on the exterior of the box to ensure proper tracking.

CAUTION: Do not stack any of the router components.

Packing a Router or Component for Shipment

■

175

JUNOS Software with Enhanced Services Hardware Guide

176

■

Packing a Router or Component for Shipment

Part 4

J-series Requirements and Specifications
■

Network Cable Specifications and Connector Pinouts on page 179

■

Safety and Regulatory Compliance Information on page 197

J-series Requirements and Specifications

■

177

JUNOS Software with Enhanced Services Hardware Guide

178

■

J-series Requirements and Specifications

Chapter 11

Network Cable Specifications and
Connector Pinouts
The network interfaces supported on the router accept different kinds of network
cable.
■

Serial PIM Cable Specifications on page 179

■

Fast Ethernet RJ-45 Connector Pinout on page 189

■

Gigabit Ethernet uPIM RJ-45 Connector Pinout on page 189

■

Gigabit Ethernet ePIM RJ-45 Connector Pinout on page 190

■

Chassis Console Port Pinouts on page 190

■

E1 and T1 RJ-48 Cable Pinouts on page 191

■

E3 and T3 BNC Connector Pinout on page 194

■

ADSL and G.SHDSL RJ-11 Connector Pinout on page 194

■

ISDN RJ-45 Connector Pinout on page 195

Serial PIM Cable Specifications
The 2-port serial PIM uses the cables and connectors summarized in
Table 49 on page 179. Pinouts are detailed in Table 50 on page 180 through
Table 59 on page 188.
Table 49: 2-Port Serial PIM Cables and Connectors
End-to-End
Conductors

Pinouts

4-40 threaded
jackscrews

Table 50 on page 180

DB-25 female

4-40 threaded jacknuts

Table 51 on page 181

RS-422/449 (EIA-449)
DTE

DC-37 (DB-37) male

4-40 threaded
jackscrews

Table 52 on page 181

RS-422/449 (EIA-449)
DCE

DC-37 (DB-37) female

4-40 threaded jacknuts

Table 53 on page 183

Name

Connector

Connector Hardware

RS-232 DTE

DB-25 male

RS-232 DCE

Serial PIM Cable Specifications

■

179

JUNOS Software with Enhanced Services Hardware Guide

Table 49: 2-Port Serial PIM Cables and Connectors (continued)
End-to-End
Conductors

Pinouts

4-40 threaded
jackscrews

Table 54 on page 184

DB-25 female

4-40 threaded jacknuts

Table 55 on page 185

V.35 DTE

M/34 male

Standard (Normally
included with M/34
connector shell)

Table 56 on page 186

V.35 DCE

M/34 female

Standard (Normally
included with M/34
connector shell)

Table 57 on page 187

X.21 DTE

DB-15 male

M3 threaded jackscrews

Table 58 on page 187

X.21 DCE

DB-15 female

M3 threaded jacknuts

Table 59 on page 188

Name

Connector

Connector Hardware

EIA-530A DTE

DB-25 male

EIA-530A DCE

RS-232 DTE Cable Pinout
Table 50: RS-232 DTE Cable Pinout
LFH-60 Pin

DB-25 Pin

LFH-60 Pairing

Description

–

Frame Ground

–

Transmit Data

–

Receive Data

–

Request to Send

–

Clear to Send

–

Data Set Ready

–

Signal Ground

–

Data Carrier Detect

–

Transmit Clock

–

Receive Clock

–

Local Loopback

–

Data Terminal Ready

–

Terminal Clock

22 to 21

–

180

■

Serial PIM Cable Specifications

Chapter 11: Network Cable Specifications and Connector Pinouts

Table 50: RS-232 DTE Cable Pinout (continued)
LFH-60 Pin

DB-25 Pin

LFH-60 Pairing

Description

18 to 17

–

RS-232 DCE Cable Pinout
Table 51: RS-232 DCE Cable Pinout
LFH-60 Pin

DB-25 Pin

LFH-60 Pairing

Description

–

Frame Ground

–

Transmit Data

–

Receive Data

–

Request to Send

–

Clear to Send

–

Data Set Ready

–

Signal Ground

–

Data Carrier Detect

–

Transmit Clock

–

Receive Clock

–

Local Loopback

–

Data Terminal Ready

–

Terminal Clock

22 to 21

–

RS-422/449 (EIA-449) DTE Cable Pinout
Table 52: RS-422/449 (EIA-449) DTE Cable Pinout
LFH-60 Pin

DC-37 (DB-37) Pin

LFH-60 Pairing

Description

–

Shield Ground

Send Data (A)

Send Timing (A)

Serial PIM Cable Specifications

■

181

JUNOS Software with Enhanced Services Hardware Guide

Table 52: RS-422/449 (EIA-449) DTE Cable Pinout (continued)
LFH-60 Pin

DC-37 (DB-37) Pin

LFH-60 Pairing

Description

Receive Data (A)

Request to Send (A)

Receive Timing (A)

Clear to Send (A)

–

Local Loopback

Data Mode (A)

Terminal Ready (A)

Receive Ready (A)

Terminal Timing (A)

–

Signal Ground

–

Receive Common

Send Data (B)

Send Timing (B)

Receive Data (B)

Request to Send (B)

Receive Timing (B)

Clear to Send (B)

Data Mode (B)

Terminal Ready (B)

Receiver Ready (B)

Terminal Timing (B)

–

Send Common

26 to 25

–

18 to 17

–

182

■

Serial PIM Cable Specifications

Chapter 11: Network Cable Specifications and Connector Pinouts

RS-422/449 (EIA-449) DCE Cable Pinout
Table 53: RS-422/449 (EIA-449) DCE Cable Pinout
LFH-60 Pin

DC-37 (DB-37) Pin

LFH-60 Pairing

Description

–

Shield Ground

Send Data (A)

Send Timing (A)

Receive Data (A)

Request to Send (A)

Receive Timing (A)

Clear to Send (A)

–

Local Loopback

Data Mode (A)

Terminal Ready (A)

Receive Ready (A)

Terminal Timing (A)

–

Signal Ground

–

Receive Common

Send Data (B)

Send Timing (B)

Receive Data (B)

Request to Send (B)

Receive Timing (B)

Clear to Send (B)

Data Mode (B)

Terminal Ready (B)

Receiver Ready (B)

Terminal Timing (B)

–

Send Common

26 to 25

–

Serial PIM Cable Specifications

■

183

JUNOS Software with Enhanced Services Hardware Guide

EIA-530A DTE Cable Pinout
Table 54: EIA-530A DTE Cable Pinout
LFH-60 Pin

DB-25 Pin

LFH-60 Pairing

Description

–

Shield Ground

Transmit Data (A)

Receive Data (A)

Request to Send (A)

Clear to Send (A)

–

Data Set Ready (A)

–

Signal Ground

Received Line Signal Detector (A)

Receive Clock (B)

Received Line Signal Detector (B)

Terminal Timing (B)

Transmit Clock (B)

Clear to Send (B)

Transmit Data (B)

Transmit Clock (A)

Receive Data (B)

Receive Clock (A)

–

Local Loopback

Request to Send (B)

–

Data Terminal Ready (A)

–

Signal Ground

Terminal Timing (A)

26 to 25

–

30 to 29

–

18 to 17

–

184

■

Serial PIM Cable Specifications

Chapter 11: Network Cable Specifications and Connector Pinouts

EIA-530A DCE Cable Pinout
Table 55: EIA-530A DCE Cable Pinout
LFH-60 Pin

DB-25 Pin

LFH-60 Pairing

Description

–

Shield Ground

Transmit Data (A)

Receive Data (A)

Request to Send (A)

Clear to Send (A)

–

Data Set Ready (A)

–

Signal Ground

Received Line Signal Detector (A)

Receive Clock (B)

Received Line Signal Detector (B)

Terminal Timing (B)

Transmit Clock (B)

Clear to Send (B)

Transmit Data (B)

Transmit Clock (A)

Receive Data (B)

Receive Clock (A)

–

Local Loopback

Request to Send (B)

–

Data Terminal Ready (A)

–

Signal Ground

Terminal Timing (A)

26 to 25

–

30 to 29

–

Serial PIM Cable Specifications

■

185

JUNOS Software with Enhanced Services Hardware Guide

V.35 DTE Cable Pinout
Table 56: V.35 DTE Cable Pinout
LFH-60 Pin

M/34 Pin

LFH-60 Pairing

Description

–

Frame Ground

–

Signal Ground

–

Request to Send

–

Clear to Send

–

Data Set Ready

–

Received Line Signal Detector

–

Data Terminal Ready

–

Test Mode

Transmit Data (A)

Receive Data (A)

Transmit Data (B)

Receive Data (B)

Terminal Timing (A)

Receive Timing (A)

Terminal Timing (B)

Receive Timing (B)

Transmit Timing (A)

Transmit Timing (B)

22 to 21

–

26 to 25

–

18 to 17

–

186

■

Serial PIM Cable Specifications

Chapter 11: Network Cable Specifications and Connector Pinouts

V.35 DCE Cable Pinout
Table 57: V.35 DCE Cable Pinout
LFH-60 Pin

M/34 Pin

LFH-60 Pairing

Description

–

Frame Ground

–

Signal Ground

–

Request to Send

–

Clear to Send

–

Data Set Ready

–

Received Line Signal Detector

–

Data Terminal Ready

–

Test Mode

Transmit Data (A)

Receive Data (A)

Transmit Data (B)

Receive Data (B)

Terminal Timing (A)

Receive Timing (A)

Terminal Timing (B)

Receive Timing (B)

Transmit Timing (A)

Transmit Timing (B)

22 to 21

–

26 to 25

–

X.21 DTE Cable Pinout
Table 58: X.21 DTE Cable Pinout
LFH-60 Pin

DB-15 Pin

LFH-60 Pairing

Description

–

Shield Ground

Serial PIM Cable Specifications

■

187

JUNOS Software with Enhanced Services Hardware Guide

Table 58: X.21 DTE Cable Pinout (continued)
LFH-60 Pin

DB-15 Pin

LFH-60 Pairing

Description

Transmit Data (A)

Control (A)

Receive (A)

Indicate (A)

Signal Element Timing (A)

–

Signal Ground

Transmit Data (B)

Control (B)

Receive (B)

Indicate (B)

Signal Element Timing (B)

30 to 29

–

18 to 17

–

X.21 DCE Cable Pinout
Table 59: X.21 DCE Cable Pinout
LFH-60 Pin

DB-15 Pin

LFH-60 Pairing

Description

–

Shield Ground

Transmit Data (A)

Control (A)

Receive (A)

Indicate (A)

Signal Element Timing (A)

–

Signal Ground

Transmit Data (B)

Control (B)

Receive (B)

188

■

Serial PIM Cable Specifications

Chapter 11: Network Cable Specifications and Connector Pinouts

Table 59: X.21 DCE Cable Pinout (continued)
LFH-60 Pin

DB-15 Pin

LFH-60 Pairing

Description

Indicate (B)

Signal Element Timing (B)

30 to 29

–

Fast Ethernet RJ-45 Connector Pinout
Table 60 on page 189 describes the Fast Ethernet RJ-45 connector pinout information.

NOTE: Either a straight-through or cross-over cable can be used to connect to the
interface.

Table 60: Fast Ethernet RJ-45 Connector Pinout
Pin

Signal

TX+

TX-

RX+

Termination network

RX-

Termination network

Gigabit Ethernet uPIM RJ-45 Connector Pinout
Table 61 on page 189 describes connector pinout information for 8-port and 16-port
Gigabit Ethernet uPIM ports.
Table 61: Gigabit Ethernet uPIM RJ-45 Connector Pinout
Pin

Signal Name

Function

BI_DA+

Bidirectional pair +A

BI_DA-

Bidirectional pair -A

Fast Ethernet RJ-45 Connector Pinout

■

189

JUNOS Software with Enhanced Services Hardware Guide

Table 61: Gigabit Ethernet uPIM RJ-45 Connector Pinout (continued)
Pin

Signal Name

Function

BI_DB+

Bidirectional pair +B

BI_DC+

Bidirectional pair +C

BI_DC-

Bidirectional pair -C

BI_DB-

Bidirectional pair -B

BI_DD+

Bidirectional pair +D

BI_DD-

Bidirectional pair -D

Gigabit Ethernet ePIM RJ-45 Connector Pinout
Table 62 on page 190 describes connector pinout information for 1-port Gigabit
Ethernet ePIM ports.
Table 62: Gigabit Ethernet ePIM RJ-45
Connector Pinouts
Pin

Signal

MDI0+

MDI0-

MDI1+

MDI2+

MDI2-

MDI1-

MDI3+

MDI3-

Chassis Console Port Pinouts
The console port on a J-series Services Router chassis has an RJ-45 connector.
Table 63 on page 191 provides RJ-45 chassis console connector pinout information.
An RJ-45 cable is supplied with the router.
To connect the console port to an external management device, you need an RJ-45
to DB-9 serial port adapter, which is also supplied with the router.

190

■

Gigabit Ethernet ePIM RJ-45 Connector Pinout

Chapter 11: Network Cable Specifications and Connector Pinouts

Table 63: RJ-45 Chassis Console Connector Pinout
Pin

Signal

Description

RTS Output

Request to Send

DTR Output

Data Terminal Ready

TxD Output

Transmit Data

GND

Chassis Ground

GND

Chassis Ground

RxD Input

Receive Data

DSR Input

Data Set Ready

CTS Input

Clear to Send

Table 64 on page 191 describes the DB-9 connector pinouts.
Table 64: DB-9 Console Connector Pinout
Pin

Signal

Direction

Description

DCD

<–

Carrier Detect

RxD

<–

Receive Data

TxD

–>

Transmit Data

DTR

–>

Data Terminal Ready

Ground

—

Signal Ground

DSR

<–

Data Set Ready

RTS

–>

Request To Send

CTS

<–

Clear To Send

RING

<–

Ring Indicator

E1 and T1 RJ-48 Cable Pinouts
The E1 and T1 PIMs use an RJ-48 cable, which is not supplied with the PIM.

CAUTION: To maintain agency approvals, use only a properly constructed, shielded
cable.

E1 and T1 RJ-48 Cable Pinouts

■

191

JUNOS Software with Enhanced Services Hardware Guide

Table 65 on page 192 through Table 68 on page 193 describe the RJ-48 connector
pinouts.
Table 65: RJ-48 Connector to RJ-48 Connector (Straight) Pinout
RJ-48 Pin
RJ-48 Pin (on T1/E1 PIM)
(Data Numbering Form)

(Data Numbering
Form)

Signal

RX, Ring, –

RX, Tip, +

TX, Ring, –

TX, Tip, +

Shield/Return/Ground

No connect

Table 66: RJ-48 Connector to RJ-48 Connector (Crossover) Pinout
RJ-48 Pin
RJ-48 Pin (on T1/E1 PIM)

192

■

(Data Numbering Form)

(Data Numbering
Form)

Signal

RX/Ring/– <––>TX/Ring/–

RX/Tip/+ <––>TX/Tip/+

TX/Ring/– <––>RX/Ring/–

TX/Tip/+ <––>RX/Tip/+

Shield/Return/Ground

No connect

E1 and T1 RJ-48 Cable Pinouts

Chapter 11: Network Cable Specifications and Connector Pinouts

Table 67: RJ-48 Connector to DB-15 Connector (Straight) Pinout
DB-15 Pin
RJ-48 Pin (on T1/E1 PIM)
(Data Numbering Form)

(Data Numbering
Form)

Signal

RX/Ring/– <––>RX/Ring/–

RX/Tip/+ <––>RX/Tip/+

TX/Ring/– <––>TX/Ring/–

TX/Tip/+ <––>TX/Tip/+

Shield/Return/Ground

No connect

Table 68: RJ-48 Connector to DB-15 Connector (Crossover) Pinout
DB-15 Pin
RJ-48 Pin (on T1/E1 PIM)
(Data Numbering Form)

(Data Numbering
Form)

Signal

RX/Ring/– <––>TX/Ring/–

RX/Tip/+ <––>TX/Tip/+

TX/Ring/– <––>RX/Ring/–

TX/Tip/+ <––>RX/Tip/+

Shield/Return/Ground

E1 and T1 RJ-48 Cable Pinouts

■

193

JUNOS Software with Enhanced Services Hardware Guide

Table 68: RJ-48 Connector to DB-15 Connector (Crossover) Pinout (continued)
DB-15 Pin
RJ-48 Pin (on T1/E1 PIM)
(Data Numbering Form)

(Data Numbering
Form)

Signal

No connect

E3 and T3 BNC Connector Pinout
The E3 and T3 PIMs each use two BNC connectors—one for transmitting data (TX)
and one for receiving data (RX).

ADSL and G.SHDSL RJ-11 Connector Pinout
The 1-port ADSL 2/2+ Annex A and Annex B PIMs use an RJ-11 cable, which is not
supplied with the PIMs. The 2-port G.SHDSL Annex A and Annex B PIM also uses an
RJ-11 cable, which is not supplied with the PIM. Table 69 on page 194 describes the
RJ-11 connector pinout.
Table 69: ADSL and G.SHDSL RJ-11 Connector Pinout

194

■

Signal

No connect

RJ P –Tip

RJ N –Ring

No connect

E3 and T3 BNC Connector Pinout

Chapter 11: Network Cable Specifications and Connector Pinouts

ISDN RJ-45 Connector Pinout
The 1-port and 4-port ISDN PIMs use an RJ-45 cable, which is not supplied with the
PIMs. Table 70 on page 195 describes the RJ-45 connector pinout.
Table 70: ISDN RJ-45 Connector Pinout
Pin

Signal

No connect

RJ_SX_P

RJ_SR_P

RJ_SR_N

RJ_SX_N

No connect

Shielded

Shielded 2

ISDN RJ-45 Connector Pinout

■

195

JUNOS Software with Enhanced Services Hardware Guide

196

■

ISDN RJ-45 Connector Pinout

Chapter 12

Safety and Regulatory Compliance
Information
To install and use the Services Router safely, follow proper safety procedures. This
chapter discusses the following safety and regulatory compliance information:
■

Definition of Safety Warning Levels on page 197

■

Safety Guidelines and Warnings on page 199

■

Agency Approvals on page 232

■

Compliance Statements for Environmental Requirements on page 233

■

Compliance Statements for EMC Requirements on page 233

Definition of Safety Warning Levels
This manual uses the following three levels of safety warnings:

NOTE: You might find this information helpful in a particular situation, or might
otherwise overlook it.

CAUTION: You need to observe the specified guidelines to avoid minor injury or
discomfort to you, or severe damage to the Services Router.

WARNING: This symbol means danger. You are in a situation that could cause bodily
injury. Before you work on any equipment, be aware of the hazards involved with
electrical circuitry and be familiar with standard practices for preventing accidents.

WARNING: Waarschuwing Dit waarschuwingssymbool betekent gevaar. U verkeert
in een situatie die lichamelijk letsel kan veroorzaken. Voordat u aan enige apparatuur
gaat werken, dient u zich bewust te zijn van de bij elektrische schakelingen betrokken
risico's en dient u op de hoogte te zijn van standaard maatregelen om ongelukken
te voorkomen.

Definition of Safety Warning Levels

■

197

JUNOS Software with Enhanced Services Hardware Guide

WARNING: Varoitus Tämä varoitusmerkki merkitsee vaaraa. Olet tilanteessa, joka
voi johtaa ruumiinvammaan. Ennen kuin työskentelet minkään laitteiston parissa,
ota selvää sähkökytkentöihin liittyvistä vaaroista ja tavanomaisista onnettomuuksien
ehkäisykeinoista.

WARNING: Attention Ce symbole d'avertissement indique un danger. Vous vous
trouvez dans une situation pouvant causer des blessures ou des dommages corporels.
Avant de travailler sur un équipement, soyez conscient des dangers posés par les
circuits électriques et familiarisez-vous avec les procédures couramment utilisées
pour éviter les accidents.

WARNING: Warnung Dieses Warnsymbol bedeutet Gefahr. Sie befinden sich in einer
Situation, die zu einer Körperverletzung führen könnte. Bevor Sie mit der Arbeit an
irgendeinem Gerät beginnen, seien Sie sich der mit elektrischen Stromkreisen
verbundenen Gefahren und der Standardpraktiken zur Vermeidung von Unfällen
bewußt.

WARNING: Avvertenza Questo simbolo di avvertenza indica un pericolo. La situazione
potrebbe causare infortuni alle persone. Prima di lavorare su qualsiasi apparecchiatura,
occorre conoscere i pericoli relativi ai circuiti elettrici ed essere al corrente delle
pratiche standard per la prevenzione di incidenti.

WARNING: Advarsel Dette varselsymbolet betyr fare. Du befinner deg i en situasjon
som kan føre til personskade. Før du utfører arbeid på utstyr, må du vare oppmerksom
på de faremomentene som elektriske kretser innebærer, samt gjøre deg kjent med
vanlig praksis når det gjelder å unngå ulykker.

WARNING: Aviso Este símbolo de aviso indica perigo. Encontra-se numa situação
que lhe poderá causar danos físicos. Antes de começar a trabalhar com qualquer
equipamento, familiarize-se com os perigos relacionados com circuitos eléctricos, e
com quaisquer práticas comuns que possam prevenir possíveis acidentes.

WARNING: ¡Atención! Este símbolo de aviso significa peligro. Existe riesgo para su
integridad física. Antes de manipular cualquier equipo, considerar los riesgos que
entraña la corriente eléctrica y familiarizarse con los procedimientos estándar de
prevención de accidentes.

198

■

Definition of Safety Warning Levels

Chapter 12: Safety and Regulatory Compliance Information

WARNING: Varning! Denna varningssymbol signalerar fara. Du befinner dig i en
situation som kan leda till personskada. Innan du utför arbete på någon utrustning
måste du vara medveten om farorna med elkretsar och känna till vanligt förfarande
för att förebygga skador.

Safety Guidelines and Warnings
This section lists the following safety guidelines and warnings for installing, operating,
and maintaining a Services Router:
■

General Safety Guidelines and Warnings on page 199

■

Electrical Safety Guidelines and Warnings on page 201

■

Installation Safety Guidelines and Warnings on page 216

■

Laser and LED Safety Guidelines and Warnings on page 221

■

Maintenance and Operational Safety Guidelines and Warnings on page 225

General Safety Guidelines and Warnings
The following guidelines help ensure your safety and protect the Services Router
from damage. The list of guidelines might not address all potentially hazardous
situations in your working environment, so be alert and exercise good judgment at
all times.
■

Perform only the procedures explicitly described in this manual. Make sure that
only authorized service personnel perform other system services.

■

Keep the area around the chassis clear and free from dust before, during, and
after installation.

■

Keep tools away from areas where people could trip over them while walking.

■

Do not wear loose clothing or jewelry, such as rings, bracelets, or chains, which
could become caught in the chassis.

■

Wear safety glasses if you are working under any conditions that could be
hazardous to your eyes.

■

Do not perform any actions that create a potential hazard to people or make the
equipment unsafe.

■

Never attempt to lift an object that is too heavy for one person to handle.

■

Never install or manipulate wiring during electrical storms.

■

Never install electrical jacks in wet locations unless the jacks are specifically
designed for wet environments.

■

Operate the Services Router only when it is properly grounded.

■

The separate protective earthing terminal provided on this product shall be
permanently connected to earth.

■

Replace fuses only with fuses of the same type and rating.

Safety Guidelines and Warnings

■

199

JUNOS Software with Enhanced Services Hardware Guide

■

Do not open or remove chassis covers or sheet metal parts unless instructions
are provided in this manual. Such an action could cause severe electrical shock.

■

Do not push or force any objects through any opening in the chassis frame. Such
an action could result in electrical shock or fire.

■

Avoid spilling liquid onto the Services Router chassis or onto any Services Router
component. Such an action could cause electrical shock or damage the Services
Router.

■

Avoid touching uninsulated electrical wires or terminals that have not been
disconnected from their power source. Such an action could cause electrical
shock.

In addition, observe the warnings and guidelines in the following sections.

Qualified Personnel Warning
WARNING: Only trained and qualified personnel should install or replace the Services
Router.
Waarschuwing Installatie en reparaties mogen uitsluitend door getraind en bevoegd
personeel uitgevoerd worden.
Varoitus Ainoastaan koulutettu ja pätevä henkilökunta saa asentaa tai vaihtaa tämän
laitteen.
Attention Tout installation ou remplacement de l'appareil doit être réalisé par du
personnel qualifié et compétent.
Warnung Gerät nur von geschultem, qualifiziertem Personal installieren oder
auswechseln lassen.

WARNING: Avvertenza Solo personale addestrato e qualificato deve essere autorizzato
ad installare o sostituire questo apparecchio.
Advarsel Kun kvalifisert personell med riktig opplæring bør montere eller bytte ut
dette utstyret.
Aviso Este equipamento deverá ser instalado ou substituído apenas por pessoal
devidamente treinado e qualificado.
¡Atención! Estos equipos deben ser instalados y reemplazados exclusivamente por
personal técnico adecuadamente preparado y capacitado.
Varning! Denna utrustning ska endast installeras och bytas ut av utbildad och
kvalificerad personal.

200

■

Safety Guidelines and Warnings

Chapter 12: Safety and Regulatory Compliance Information

Preventing Electrostatic Discharge Damage
Many Services Router hardware components are sensitive to damage from static
electricity. Some components can be impaired by voltages as low as 30 V. You can
easily generate potentially damaging static voltages whenever you handle plastic or
foam packing material or if you move components across plastic or carpets. Observe
the following guidelines to minimize the potential for electrostatic discharge (ESD)
damage, which can cause intermittent or complete component failures:
■

Always use an ESD wrist strap or ankle strap, and make sure that it is in direct
contact with your skin.

CAUTION: For safety, periodically check the resistance value of the ESD strap. The
measurement should be in the range of 1 to 10 Mohms.

■

When handling any component that is removed from the chassis, make sure the
equipment end of your ESD strap is attached to one of the electrostatic discharge
points on the chassis, which are shown in Figure 1 on page 8, Figure 2 on page
9 and Figure 13 on page 22.

■

Avoid contact between the component and your clothing. ESD voltages emitted
from clothing can still damage components.

■

When removing or installing a component, always place it component-side up
on an antistatic surface, in an antistatic card rack, or in an electrostatic bag (see
Figure 96 on page 201). If you are returning a component, place it in an
electrostatic bag before packing it.

Figure 96: Place a Component into an Electrostatic Bag

Electrical Safety Guidelines and Warnings
When working on equipment powered by electricity, follow the guidelines described
in the following sections:
■

General Electrical Safety Guidelines on page 202

■

AC Power Electrical Safety Guidelines on page 203

■

DC Power Electrical Safety Guidelines on page 204

Safety Guidelines and Warnings

■

201

JUNOS Software with Enhanced Services Hardware Guide

■

Power Sources for Redundant Power Supplies on page 205

■

DC Power Disconnection Warning on page 205

■

DC Power Grounding Requirements and Warning on page 206

■

DC Power Wiring Sequence Warning on page 207

■

DC Power Wiring Terminations Warning on page 209

■

Grounded Equipment Warning on page 210

■

Warning Statement for Norway and Sweden on page 211

■

In Case of Electrical Accident on page 211

■

Multiple Power Supplies Disconnection Warning on page 211

■

Power Disconnection Warning on page 213

■

TN Power Warning on page 214

■

Telecommunication Line Cord Warning on page 215

General Electrical Safety Guidelines
WARNING: Certain ports on the router are designed for use as intrabuilding
(within-the-building) interfaces only (Type 2 or Type 4 ports as described in
GR-1089-CORE, Issue 4) and require isolation from the exposed outside plant (OSP)
cabling. To comply with NEBS requirements and protect against lightening surges
and commercial power disturbances, the intrabuilding ports must not be metallically
connected to interfaces that connect to the OSP or its wiring. The intrabuilding ports
on the router are suitable for connection to intrabuilding or unexposed wiring or
cabling only. The addition of primary protectors is not sufficient protection for
connecting these interfaces metallically to OSP wiring.

CAUTION: To comply with intrabuilding lightning and surge requirements,
intrabuilding wiring must be shielded, and the shield for the wiring must be grounded
at both ends.

CAUTION: Before removing or installing components of a router, attach an ESD strap
to an ESD point and place the other end of the strap around your bare wrist. Failure
to use an ESD strap could result in damage to the router.

■

202

■

Install the Services Router in compliance with the following local, national, or
international electrical codes:
■

United States—National Fire Protection Association (NFPA 70), United States
National Electrical Code.

■

Canada—Canadian Electrical Code, Part 1, CSA C22.1.

Safety Guidelines and Warnings

Chapter 12: Safety and Regulatory Compliance Information

■

Other countries—International Electromechanical Commission (IEC) 60364,
Part 1 through Part 7.

■

Evaluated to the TN power system.

■

Locate the emergency power-off switch for the room in which you are working
so that if an electrical accident occurs, you can quickly turn off the power.

■

Make sure that grounding surfaces are cleaned and brought to a bright finish
before grounding connections can be made.

■

Do not work alone if potentially hazardous conditions exist anywhere in your
workspace.

■

Never assume that power is disconnected from a circuit. Always check the circuit
before starting to work.

■

Carefully look for possible hazards in your work area, such as moist floors,
ungrounded power extension cords, and missing safety grounds.

■

Operate the Services Router within marked electrical ratings and product usage
instructions.

■

For the Services Router and peripheral equipment to function safely and correctly,
use the cables and connectors specified for the attached peripheral equipment,
and make certain they are in good condition.

Many Services Router components can be removed and replaced without powering
down or disconnecting power to the Services Router, as detailed in elsewhere in this
manual. Never install equipment if it appears damaged.

AC Power Electrical Safety Guidelines
CAUTION: For routers with AC power supplies, an external surge protective device
(SPD) must be used at the AC power source.
The following electrical safety guidelines apply to AC-powered routers:
■

AC-powered routers are shipped with a three-wire electrical cord with a
grounding-type plug that fits only a grounding-type power outlet. Do not
circumvent this safety feature. Equipment grounding should comply with local
and national electrical codes.

■

You must provide an external Listed circuit breaker rated minimum 15 A in the
building installation.

■

The power cord serves as the main disconnecting device. The socket outlet must
be near the router and be easily accessible.

■

The cores in the mains lead are colored in accordance with the following code
(within the United States):
■

Green and yellow—Earth

■

Blue—Neutral

■

Brown—Live

Safety Guidelines and Warnings

■

203

JUNOS Software with Enhanced Services Hardware Guide

■

When a router is equipped with two AC power supplies, both power cords (one
for each power supply) must be unplugged to completely disconnect power to
the router.

■

Note the following warnings printed on the AC power supply faceplate:
■

To completely de-energize the system disconnect maximum of 2 power
cordsets.

■

Apparaten skall anslutas till jordat uttag när den ansluts till ett nätverk.
[Swedish]

Power Cable Warning (Japanese)

WARNING: The attached power cable is only for this product. Do not use the cable
for another product.

DC Power Electrical Safety Guidelines
The following electrical safety guidelines apply to a DC-powered router:
■

A DC-powered router is equipped with a DC terminal block that is rated for the
power requirements of a maximally configured router. To supply sufficient power,
terminate the DC input wiring on a facility DC source capable of supplying at
least 8 A @ –48 VDC. Incorporate an easily accessible disconnect device into
the facility wiring. Be sure to connect the ground wire or conduit to a solid office
(earth) ground. A closed loop ring is recommended for terminating the ground
conductor at the ground stud.

■

In the United States, a restricted access area is one in accordance with Articles
110-16, 110-17, and 110-18 of the National Electrical Code ANSI/NFPA 70.

NOTE: Primary overcurrent protection is provided by the building circuit breaker.
This breaker should protect against excess currents, short circuits, and earth faults
in accordance with NEC ANSI/NFPA70.

■

204

■

Ensure that the polarity of the DC input wiring is correct. Under certain conditions,
connections with reversed polarity might trip the primary circuit breaker or
damage the equipment.

Safety Guidelines and Warnings

Chapter 12: Safety and Regulatory Compliance Information

■

For personal safety, connect the green and yellow wire to safety (earth) ground
at both the router and the supply side of the DC wiring.

■

The marked input voltage of –48 VDC for a DC-powered router is the nominal
voltage associated with the battery circuit, and any higher voltages are only to
be associated with float voltages for the charging function.

■

Because the router is a positive ground system, you must connect the positive
lead to the terminal labeled RTN, the negative lead to the terminal labeled
–48 VDC, and the earth ground to the chassis grounding points.

Power Sources for Redundant Power Supplies
If your J6350 Services Router includes an optional redundant DC power supply, make
sure that the two DC power supplies are powered by dedicated power feeds derived
from feed A and feed B. This configuration provides the commonly deployed A/B
feed redundancy for the system. Failure to do so makes the router susceptible to
total power failure if one of the power supplies fails.

DC Power Disconnection Warning
WARNING: Before performing any of the following procedures, ensure that power
is removed from the DC circuit. To ensure that all power is off, locate the circuit
breaker on the panel board that services the DC circuit, switch the circuit breaker to
the OFF position, and tape the switch handle of the circuit breaker in the OFF position.
Waarschuwing Voordat u een van de onderstaande procedures uitvoert, dient u te
controleren of de stroom naar het gelijkstroom circuit uitgeschakeld is. Om u ervan
te verzekeren dat alle stroom UIT is geschakeld, kiest u op het schakelbord de
stroomverbreker die het gelijkstroom circuit bedient, draait de stroomverbreker naar
de UIT positie en plakt de schakelaarhendel van de stroomverbreker met plakband
in de UIT positie vast.
Varoitus Varmista, että tasavirtapiirissä ei ole virtaa ennen seuraavien toimenpiteiden
suorittamista. Varmistaaksesi, että virta on KATKAISTU täysin, paikanna tasavirrasta
huolehtivassa kojetaulussa sijaitseva suojakytkin, käännä suojakytkin
KATKAISTU-asentoon ja teippaa suojakytkimen varsi niin, että se pysyy
KATKAISTU-asennossa.

WARNING: Attention Avant de pratiquer l'une quelconque des procédures ci-dessous,
vérifier que le circuit en courant continu n'est plus sous tension. Pour en être sûr,
localiser le disjoncteur situé sur le panneau de service du circuit en courant continu,

Safety Guidelines and Warnings

■

205

JUNOS Software with Enhanced Services Hardware Guide

placer le disjoncteur en position fermée (OFF) et, à l'aide d'un ruban adhésif, bloquer
la poignée du disjoncteur en position OFF.
Warnung Vor Ausführung der folgenden Vorgänge ist sicherzustellen, daß die
Gleichstromschaltung keinen Strom erhält. Um sicherzustellen, daß sämtlicher Strom
abgestellt ist, machen Sie auf der Schalttafel den Unterbrecher für die
Gleichstromschaltung ausfindig, stellen Sie den Unterbrecher auf AUS, und kleben
Sie den Schaltergriff des Unterbrechers mit Klebeband in der AUS-Stellung fest.
Avvertenza Prima di svolgere una qualsiasi delle procedure seguenti, verificare che
il circuito CC non sia alimentato. Per verificare che tutta l'alimentazione sia scollegata
(OFF), individuare l'interruttore automatico sul quadro strumenti che alimenta il
circuito CC, mettere l'interruttore in posizione OFF e fissarlo con nastro adesivo in
tale posizione.

WARNING: Advarsel Før noen av disse prosedyrene utføres, kontroller at strømmen
er frakoblet likestrømkretsen. Sørg for at all strøm er slått AV. Dette gjøres ved å
lokalisere strømbryteren på brytertavlen som betjener likestrømkretsen, slå
strømbryteren AV og teipe bryterhåndtaket på strømbryteren i AV-stilling.
Aviso Antes de executar um dos seguintes procedimentos, certifique-se que desligou
a fonte de alimentação de energia do circuito de corrente contínua. Para se assegurar
que toda a corrente foi DESLIGADA, localize o disjuntor no painel que serve o circuito
de corrente contínua e coloque-o na posição OFF (Desligado), segurando nessa
posição a manivela do interruptor do disjuntor com fita isoladora.
¡Atención! Antes de proceder con los siguientes pasos, comprobar que la alimentación
del circuito de corriente continua (CC) esté cortada (OFF). Para asegurarse de que
toda la alimentación esté cortada (OFF), localizar el interruptor automático en el
panel que alimenta al circuito de corriente continua, cambiar el interruptor automático
a la posición de Apagado (OFF), y sujetar con cinta la palanca del interruptor
automático en posición de Apagado (OFF).
Varning! Innan du utför någon av följande procedurer måste du kontrollera att
strömförsörjningen till likströmskretsen är bruten. Kontrollera att all strömförsörjning
är BRUTEN genom att slå AV det överspänningsskydd som skyddar likströmskretsen
och tejpa fast överspänningsskyddets omkopplare i FRÅN-läget.

DC Power Grounding Requirements and Warning
An insulated grounding conductor that is identical in size to the grounded and
ungrounded branch circuit supply conductors, but is identifiable by green and yellow
stripes, is installed as part of the branch circuit that supplies the unit. The grounding
conductor must be permanently connected to earth.
For further information, see “Chassis Grounding” on page 83 and “DC Power,
Connection, and Power Cable Specifications” on page 71.

206

■

Safety Guidelines and Warnings

Chapter 12: Safety and Regulatory Compliance Information

WARNING: When installing the router, the ground connection must always be made
first and disconnected last.
Waarschuwing Bij de installatie van het toestel moet de aardverbinding altijd het
eerste worden gemaakt en het laatste worden losgemaakt.
Varoitus Laitetta asennettaessa on maahan yhdistäminen aina tehtävä ensiksi ja
maadoituksen irti kytkeminen viimeiseksi.
Attention Lors de l'installation de l'appareil, la mise à la terre doit toujours être
connectée en premier et déconnectée en dernier.
Warnung Der Erdanschluß muß bei der Installation der Einheit immer zuerst
hergestellt und zuletzt abgetrennt werden.
Avvertenza In fase di installazione dell'unità, eseguire sempre per primo il
collegamento a massa e disconnetterlo per ultimo.
Advarsel Når enheten installeres, må jordledningen alltid tilkobles først og frakobles
sist.
Aviso Ao instalar a unidade, a ligação à terra deverá ser sempre a primeira a ser
ligada, e a última a ser desligada.
¡Atención! Al instalar el equipo, conectar la tierra la primera y desconectarla la última.
Varning! Vid installation av enheten måste jordledningen alltid anslutas först och
kopplas bort sist.

DC Power Wiring Sequence Warning
WARNING: Wire the DC power supply using the appropriate lugs. When connecting
power, the proper wiring sequence is ground to ground, +RTN to +RTN, then -48 V
to -48 V. When disconnecting power, the proper wiring sequence is -48 V to -48 V,
+RTN to +RTN, then ground to ground. Note that the ground wire should always
be connected first and disconnected last.

WARNING: Waarschuwing De juiste bedradingsvolgorde verbonden is aarde naar
aarde, +RTN naar +RTN, en –48 V naar – 48 V. De juiste bedradingsvolgorde
losgemaakt is en –48 V naar – 48 V, +RTN naar +RTN, aarde naar aarde.

WARNING: Varoitus Oikea yhdistettava kytkentajarjestys on maajohto maajohtoon,
+RTN varten +RTN, –48 V varten – 48 V. Oikea irrotettava kytkentajarjestys on
–48 V varten – 48 V, +RTN varten +RTN, maajohto maajohtoon.

Safety Guidelines and Warnings

■

207

JUNOS Software with Enhanced Services Hardware Guide

WARNING: Attention Câblez l'approvisionnement d'alimentation CC En utilisant les
crochets appropriés à l'extrémité de câblage. En reliant la puissance, l'ordre approprié
de câblage est rectifié pour rectifier, +RTN à +RTN, puis -48 V à -48 V. En
débranchant la puissance, l'ordre approprié de câblage est -48 V à -48 V, +RTN à
+RTN, a alors rectifié pour rectifier. Notez que le fil de masse devrait toujours être
relié d'abord et débranché pour la dernière fois. Notez que le fil de masse devrait
toujours être relié d'abord et débranché pour la dernière fois.

WARNING: Warnung Verdrahten Sie die Gleichstrom-Versorgung mit den passenden
Ansätzen am Verdrahtung Ende. Wenn man Energie anschließt, wird die korrekte
Verdrahtung. Reihenfolge gerieben, um, +RTN zu +RTN, dann -48 V bis -48 V zu
reiben. Wenn sie Energie trennt, ist die korrekte Verdrahtung Reihenfolge -48 V bis
-48 V,+RTN zu +RTN, rieb dann, um zu reiben. Beachten Sie, daß der Erdungsdraht
immer zuerst angeschlossen werden und zuletzt getrennt werden sollte.

WARNING: Avvertenza Mostra la morsettiera dell alimentatore CC. Cablare
l'alimentatore CC usando i connettori adatti all'estremità del cablaggio, come illustrato.
La corretta sequenza di cablaggio è da massa a massa, da positivo a positivo (da
linea ad L) e da negativo a negativo (da neutro a N). Tenere presente che il filo di
massa deve sempre venire collegato per primo e scollegato per ultimo.

WARNING: Advarsel Riktig tilkoples tilkoplingssekvens er jord til jord, +RTN til
+RTN, –48 V til – 48 V. Riktig frakoples tilkoplingssekvens er –48 V til – 48 V, +RTN
til +RTN, jord til jord.

WARNING: Aviso Ate con alambre la fuente de potencia cc Usando los terminales
apropiados en el extremo del cableado. Al conectar potencia, la secuencia apropiada
del cableado se muele para moler, +RTN a +RTN, entonces -48 V a -48 V. Al
desconectar potencia, la secuencia apropiada del cableado es -48 V a -48 V, +RTN
a +RTN, entonces molió para moler. Observe que el alambre de tierra se debe
conectar siempre primero y desconectar por último. Observe que el alambre de tierra
se debe conectar siempre primero y desconectar por último.

WARNING: ¡Atención! Wire a fonte de alimentação de DC Usando os talões
apropriados na extremidade da fiação. Ao conectar a potência, a seqüência apropriada
da fiação é moída para moer, +RTN a +RTN, então -48 V a -48 V. Ao desconectar
a potência, a seqüência apropriada da fiação é -48 V a -48 V, +RTN a +RTN, moeu
então para moer. Anote que o fio à terra deve sempre ser conectado primeiramente
e desconectado por último. Anote que o fio à terra deve sempre ser conectado
primeiramente e desconectado por último.

208

■

Safety Guidelines and Warnings

Chapter 12: Safety and Regulatory Compliance Information

Varning! Korrekt kopplingssekvens ar jord till jord, +RTN till +RTN, –48 V till – 48
V. Korrekt kopplas kopplingssekvens ar –48 V till – 48 V, +RTN till +RTN, jord till
jord.

DC Power Wiring Terminations Warning
WARNING: When stranded wiring is required, use approved wiring terminations,
such as closed-loop or spade-type with upturned lugs. These terminations should be
the appropriate size for the wires and should clamp both the insulation and conductor.

WARNING: Waarschuwing Wanneer geslagen bedrading vereist is, dient u bedrading
te gebruiken die voorzien is van goedgekeurde aansluitingspunten, zoals het
gesloten-lus type of het grijperschop type waarbij de aansluitpunten omhoog wijzen.
Deze aansluitpunten dienen de juiste maat voor de draden te hebben en dienen
zowel de isolatie als de geleider vast te klemmen.

WARNING: Varoitus Jos säikeellinen johdin on tarpeen, käytä hyväksyttyä
johdinliitäntää, esimerkiksi suljettua silmukkaa tai kourumaista liitäntää, jossa on
ylöspäin käännetyt kiinnityskorvat. Tällaisten liitäntöjen tulee olla kooltaan johtimiin
sopivia ja niiden tulee puristaa yhteen sekä eristeen että johdinosan.

WARNING: Attention Quand des fils torsadés sont nécessaires, utiliser des douilles
terminales homologuées telles que celles à circuit fermé ou du type à plage ouverte
avec cosses rebroussées. Ces douilles terminales doivent être de la taille qui convient
aux fils et doivent être refermées sur la gaine isolante et sur le conducteur.

WARNING: Warnung Wenn Litzenverdrahtung erforderlich ist, sind zugelassene
Verdrahtungsabschlüsse, z.B. für einen geschlossenen Regelkreis oder gabelförmig,
mit nach oben gerichteten Kabelschuhen zu verwenden. Diese Abschlüsse sollten
die angemessene Größe für die Drähte haben und sowohl die Isolierung als auch den
Leiter festklemmen.

WARNING: Avvertenza Quando occorre usare trecce, usare connettori omologati,
come quelli a occhiello o a forcella con linguette rivolte verso l'alto. I connettori
devono avere la misura adatta per il cablaggio e devono serrare sia l'isolante che il
conduttore.

Safety Guidelines and Warnings

■

209

JUNOS Software with Enhanced Services Hardware Guide

WARNING: Advarsel Hvis det er nødvendig med flertrådede ledninger, brukes
godkjente ledningsavslutninger, som for eksempel lukket sløyfe eller spadetype med
oppoverbøyde kabelsko. Disse avslutningene skal ha riktig størrelse i forhold til
ledningene, og skal klemme sammen både isolasjonen og lederen.

WARNING: Aviso Quando forem requeridas montagens de instalação eléctrica de
cabo torcido, use terminações de cabo aprovadas, tais como, terminações de cabo
em circuito fechado e planas com terminais de orelha voltados para cima. Estas
terminações de cabo deverão ser do tamanho apropriado para os respectivos cabos,
e deverão prender simultaneamente o isolamento e o fio condutor.

WARNING: ¡Atención! Cuando se necesite hilo trenzado, utilizar terminales para
cables homologados, tales como las de tipo "bucle cerrado" o "espada", con las
lengüetas de conexión vueltas hacia arriba. Estos terminales deberán ser del tamaño
apropiado para los cables que se utilicen, y tendrán que sujetar tanto el aislante como
el conductor.

WARNING: Varning! När flertrådiga ledningar krävs måste godkända
ledningskontakter användas, t.ex. kabelsko av sluten eller öppen typ med uppåtvänd
tapp. Storleken på dessa kontakter måste vara avpassad till ledningarna och måste
kunna hålla både isoleringen och ledaren fastklämda.

Grounded Equipment Warning
WARNING: The router is intended to be grounded. Ensure that the router is connected
to earth ground during normal use.
Waarschuwing Deze apparatuur hoort geaard te worden Zorg dat de host-computer
tijdens normaal gebruik met aarde is verbonden.
Varoitus Tämä laitteisto on tarkoitettu maadoitettavaksi. Varmista, että isäntälaite
on yhdistetty maahan normaalikäytön aikana.
Attention Cet équipement doit être relié à la terre. S'assurer que l'appareil hôte est
relié à la terre lors de l'utilisation normale.
Warnung Dieses Gerät muß geerdet werden. Stellen Sie sicher, daß das Host-Gerät
während des normalen Betriebs an Erde gelegt ist.

210

■

Safety Guidelines and Warnings

Chapter 12: Safety and Regulatory Compliance Information

WARNING: Avvertenza Questa apparecchiatura deve essere collegata a massa.
Accertarsi che il dispositivo host sia collegato alla massa di terra durante il normale
utilizzo.
Advarsel Dette utstyret skal jordes. Forviss deg om vertsterminalen er jordet ved
normalt bruk.
Aviso Este equipamento deverá estar ligado à terra. Certifique-se que o host se
encontra ligado à terra durante a sua utilização normal.
¡Atención! Este equipo debe conectarse a tierra. Asegurarse de que el equipo principal
esté conectado a tierra durante el uso normal.
Varning! Denna utrustning är avsedd att jordas. Se till att värdenheten är jordad vid
normal användning.

Warning Statement for Norway and Sweden
WARNING: The equipment must be connected to an earthed mains socket-outlet.
Advarsel Apparatet skal kobles til en jordet stikkontakt.
Varning! Apparaten skall anslutas till jordat nätuttag.

In Case of Electrical Accident
If an electrical accident results in an injury, take the following actions in this order:
1.

Use caution. Be aware of potentially hazardous conditions that could cause further
injury.

Disconnect power from the Services Router.

If possible, send another person to get medical aid. Otherwise, assess the
condition of the victim, then call for help.

Multiple Power Supplies Disconnection Warning
WARNING: The J6350 Services Router has more than one power supply connection.
All connections must be removed completely to remove power from the unit
completely.

Safety Guidelines and Warnings

■

211

JUNOS Software with Enhanced Services Hardware Guide

WARNING: Waarschuwing Deze J6350 eenheid heeft meer dan één
stroomtoevoerverbinding; alle verbindingen moeten volledig worden verwijderd om
de stroom van deze eenheid volledig te verwijderen.

WARNING: Varoitus Tässä laitteessa on useampia virtalähdekytkentöjä. Kaikki
kytkennät on irrotettava kokonaan, jotta virta poistettaisiin täysin laitteesta.

WARNING: Attention Cette J6350 unité est équipée de plusieurs raccordements
d'alimentation. Pour supprimer tout courant électrique de l'unité, tous les cordons
d'alimentation doivent être débranchés.

WARNING: Warnung Diese J6350 Einheit verfügt über mehr als einen Stromanschluß;
um Strom gänzlich von der Einheit fernzuhalten, müssen alle Stromzufuhren
abgetrennt sein.

WARNING: Avvertenza Questa J6350 unità ha più di una connessione per
alimentatore elettrico; tutte le connessioni devono essere completamente rimosse
per togliere l'elettricità dall'unità.

WARNING: Advarsel Denne J6350 enheten har mer enn én strømtilkobling. Alle
tilkoblinger må kobles helt fra for å eliminere strøm fra enheten.

WARNING: Aviso Este J6350 dispositivo possui mais do que uma conexão de fonte
de alimentação de energia; para poder remover a fonte de alimentação de energia,
deverão ser desconectadas todas as conexões existentes.

WARNING: ¡Atención! Esta J6350 unidad tiene más de una conexión de suministros
de alimentación; para eliminar la alimentación por completo, deben desconectarse
completamente todas las conexiones.

WARNING: Varning! Denna J6350 enhet har mer än en strömförsörjningsanslutning;
alla anslutningar måste vara helt avlägsnade innan strömtillförseln till enheten är
fullständigt bruten.

212

■

Safety Guidelines and Warnings

Chapter 12: Safety and Regulatory Compliance Information

Power Disconnection Warning
WARNING: Before working on the router or near power supplies, unplug the power
cord from an AC router.

WARNING: Waarschuwing Voordat u aan een frame of in de nabijheid van voedingen
werkt, dient u bij wisselstroom toestellen de stekker van het netsnoer uit het
stopcontact te halen.

WARNING: Varoitus Kytke irti vaihtovirtalaitteiden virtajohto, ennen kuin teet mitään
asennuspohjalle tai työskentelet virtalähteiden läheisyydessä.

WARNING: Attention Avant de travailler sur un châssis ou à proximité d'une
alimentation électrique, débrancher le cordon d'alimentation des unités en courant
alternatif.

WARNING: Warnung Bevor Sie an einem Chassis oder in der Nähe von Netzgeräten
arbeiten, ziehen Sie bei Wechselstromeinheiten das Netzkabel ab bzw.

WARNING: Avvertenza Prima di lavorare su un telaio o intorno ad alimentatori,
scollegare il cavo di alimentazione sulle unità CA.

WARNING: Advarsel Før det utføres arbeid på kabinettet eller det arbeides i nærheten
av strømforsyningsenheter, skal strømledningen trekkes ut på vekselstrømsenheter.

WARNING: Aviso Antes de trabalhar num chassis, ou antes de trabalhar perto de
unidades de fornecimento de energia, desligue o cabo de alimentação nas unidades
de corrente alternada.

WARNING: ¡Atención! Antes de manipular el chasis de un equipo o trabajar cerca
de una fuente de alimentación, desenchufar el cable de alimentación en los equipos
de corriente alterna (CA).

Safety Guidelines and Warnings

■

213

JUNOS Software with Enhanced Services Hardware Guide

WARNING: Varning! Innan du arbetar med ett chassi eller nära
strömförsörjningsenheter skall du för växelströmsenheter dra ur nätsladden.

TN Power Warning
WARNING: The router is designed to work with a TN power system.

WARNING: Waarschuwing Het apparaat is ontworpen om te functioneren met TN
energiesystemen.

WARNING: Varoitus Koje on suunniteltu toimimaan TN-sähkövoimajärjestelmien
yhteydessä.

WARNING: Attention Ce dispositif a été conçu pour fonctionner avec des systèmes
d'alimentation TN.

WARNING: Warnung Das Gerät ist für die Verwendung mit TN-Stromsystemen
ausgelegt.

WARNING: Avvertenza Il dispositivo è stato progettato per l'uso con sistemi di
alimentazione TN.

WARNING: Advarsel Utstyret er utfomet til bruk med TN-strømsystemer.

WARNING: Aviso O dispositivo foi criado para operar com sistemas de corrente TN.

WARNING: ¡Atención! El equipo está diseñado para trabajar con sistemas de
alimentación tipo TN.

214

■

Safety Guidelines and Warnings

Chapter 12: Safety and Regulatory Compliance Information

WARNING: Varning! Enheten är konstruerad för användning tillsammans med
elkraftssystem av TN-typ.

Telecommunication Line Cord Warning
WARNING: To reduce the risk of fire, use only No. 26 AWG or larger UL-listed or
CSA-certified telecommunication line cord.

WARNING: Waarschuwing Om brandgevaar te reduceren, dient slechts
telecommunicatielijnsnoer nr. 26 AWG of groter gebruikt te worden.

WARNING: Varoitus Tulipalovaaran vähentämiseksi käytä ainoastaan nro 26 AWGtai paksumpaa tietoliikennejohdinta.

WARNING: Attention Pour réduire les risques d'incendie, n'utiliser que des cordons
de lignes de télécommunications de type AWG nº 26 ou plus larges.

WARNING: Warnung Zur Reduzierung der Feuergefahr eine Fernmeldeleitungsschnur
der Größe 26 AWG oder größer verwenden.

WARNING: Avvertenza Per ridurre il rischio di incendio, usare solo un cavo per linea
di telecomunicazioni di sezione 0,12 mm2 (26 AWG) o maggiore.

WARNING: Advarsel Bruk kun AWG nr. 26 eller telekommunikasjonsledninger med
større dimensjon for å redusere faren for brann.

WARNING: Aviso Para reduzir o risco de incêndio, utilize apenas terminais de fio
de telecomunicações Nº. 26 AWG ou superiores.

WARNING: ¡Atención! Para reducir el riesgo de incendios, usar sólo líneas de
telecomunicaciones de calibre No. 26 AWG o más gruesas.

Safety Guidelines and Warnings

■

215

JUNOS Software with Enhanced Services Hardware Guide

WARNING: Varning! För att minska brandrisken skall endast Nr. 26 AWG eller större
telekommunikationsledning användas.

Installation Safety Guidelines and Warnings
Observe the following guidelines and warnings before and during Services Router
installation:
■

Chassis Lifting Guidelines on page 216

■

Installation Instructions Warning on page 216

■

Rack-Mounting Requirements and Warnings on page 217

■

Ramp Warning on page 221

Chassis Lifting Guidelines
The weight of a fully populated chassis is approximately 25.3 lbs (11.5 kg) for a J4350
Services Router, and 30.7 lb (13.9 kg) for a J6350 Services Router. Observe the
following guidelines for lifting and moving a Services Router:
■

Before moving the Services Router, read the guidelines in “Preparing for Router
Installation” on page 63 to verify that the intended site meets the specified
power, environmental, and clearance requirements.

■

Before lifting or moving the Services Router, disconnect all external cables.

■

As when lifting any heavy object, lift most of the weight with your legs rather
than your back. Keep your knees bent and your back relatively straight and avoid
twisting your body as you lift. Balance the load evenly and be sure that your
footing is solid.

Installation Instructions Warning
WARNING: Read the installation instructions before you connect the router to a
power source.
Waarschuwing Raadpleeg de installatie-aanwijzingen voordat u het systeem met de
voeding verbindt.
Varoitus Lue asennusohjeet ennen järjestelmän yhdistämistä virtalähteeseen.
Attention Avant de brancher le système sur la source d'alimentation, consulter les
directives d'installation.
Warnung Lesen Sie die Installationsanweisungen, bevor Sie das System an die
Stromquelle anschließen.

216

■

Safety Guidelines and Warnings

Chapter 12: Safety and Regulatory Compliance Information

WARNING: Avvertenza Consultare le istruzioni di installazione prima di collegare il
sistema all'alimentatore.
Advarsel Les installasjonsinstruksjonene før systemet kobles til strømkilden.
Aviso Leia as instruções de instalação antes de ligar o sistema à sua fonte de energia.
¡Atención! Ver las instrucciones de instalación antes de conectar el sistema a la red
de alimentación.
Varning! Läs installationsanvisningarna innan du kopplar systemet till dess
strömförsörjningsenhet.

Rack-Mounting Requirements and Warnings
Ensure that the equipment rack into which the Services Router is installed is evenly
and securely supported, to avoid the hazardous condition that could result from
uneven mechanical loading.

WARNING: To prevent bodily injury when mounting or servicing the router in a rack,
take the following precautions to ensure that the system remains stable. The following
directives help maintain your safety:
■

The router must be installed into a rack that is secured to the building structure.

■

The router should be mounted at the bottom of the rack if it is the only unit in
the rack.

■

When mounting the router in a partially filled rack, load the rack from the bottom
to the top with the heaviest component at the bottom of the rack.

■

If the rack is provided with stabilizing devices, install the stabilizers before
mounting or servicing the router in the rack.

WARNING: Waarschuwing Om lichamelijk letsel te voorkomen wanneer u dit toestel
in een rek monteert of het daar een servicebeurt geeft, moet u speciale
voorzorgsmaatregelen nemen om ervoor te zorgen dat het toestel stabiel blijft. De
onderstaande richtlijnen worden verstrekt om uw veiligheid te verzekeren:
■

De Juniper Networks router moet in een stellage worden geïnstalleerd die aan
een bouwsel is verankerd.

■

Dit toestel dient onderaan in het rek gemonteerd te worden als het toestel het
enige in het rek is.

Safety Guidelines and Warnings

■

217

JUNOS Software with Enhanced Services Hardware Guide

■

Wanneer u dit toestel in een gedeeltelijk gevuld rek monteert, dient u het rek
van onderen naar boven te laden met het zwaarste onderdeel onderaan in het
rek.

■

Als het rek voorzien is van stabiliseringshulpmiddelen, dient u de stabilisatoren
te monteren voordat u het toestel in het rek monteert of het daar een servicebeurt
geeft.

WARNING: Varoitus Kun laite asetetaan telineeseen tai huolletaan sen ollessa
telineessä, on noudatettava erityisiä varotoimia järjestelmän vakavuuden
säilyttämiseksi, jotta vältytään loukkaantumiselta. Noudata seuraavia
turvallisuusohjeita:
■

Juniper Networks router on asennettava telineeseen, joka on kiinnitetty
rakennukseen.

■

Jos telineessä ei ole muita laitteita, aseta laite telineen alaosaan.

■

Jos laite asetetaan osaksi täytettyyn telineeseen, aloita kuormittaminen sen
alaosasta kaikkein raskaimmalla esineellä ja siirry sitten sen yläosaan.

■

Jos telinettä varten on vakaimet, asenna ne ennen laitteen asettamista telineeseen
tai sen huoltamista siinä.

WARNING: Attention Pour éviter toute blessure corporelle pendant les opérations
de montage ou de réparation de cette unité en casier, il convient de prendre des
précautions spéciales afin de maintenir la stabilité du système. Les directives
ci-dessous sont destinées à assurer la protection du personnel:
■

Le rack sur lequel est monté le Juniper Networks router doit être fixé à la structure
du bâtiment.

■

Si cette unité constitue la seule unité montée en casier, elle doit être placée dans
le bas.

■

Si cette unité est montée dans un casier partiellement rempli, charger le casier
de bas en haut en plaçant l'élément le plus lourd dans le bas.

■

Si le casier est équipé de dispositifs stabilisateurs, installer les stabilisateurs avant
de monter ou de réparer l'unité en casier.

WARNING: Warnung Zur Vermeidung von Körperverletzung beim Anbringen oder
Warten dieser Einheit in einem Gestell müssen Sie besondere Vorkehrungen treffen,

218

■

Safety Guidelines and Warnings

Chapter 12: Safety and Regulatory Compliance Information

um sicherzustellen, daß das System stabil bleibt. Die folgenden Richtlinien sollen zur
Gewährleistung Ihrer Sicherheit dienen:
■

Der Juniper Networks router muß in einem Gestell installiert werden, das in der
Gebäudestruktur verankert ist.

■

Wenn diese Einheit die einzige im Gestell ist, sollte sie unten im Gestell
angebracht werden.

■

Bei Anbringung dieser Einheit in einem zum Teil gefüllten Gestell ist das Gestell
von unten nach oben zu laden, wobei das schwerste Bauteil unten im Gestell
anzubringen ist.

■

Wird das Gestell mit Stabilisierungszubehör geliefert, sind zuerst die Stabilisatoren
zu installieren, bevor Sie die Einheit im Gestell anbringen oder sie warten.

WARNING: Avvertenza Per evitare infortuni fisici durante il montaggio o la
manutenzione di questa unità in un supporto, occorre osservare speciali precauzioni
per garantire che il sistema rimanga stabile. Le seguenti direttive vengono fornite
per garantire la sicurezza personale:
■

Il Juniper Networks router deve essere installato in un telaio, il quale deve essere
fissato alla struttura dell'edificio.

■

Questa unità deve venire montata sul fondo del supporto, se si tratta dell'unica
unità da montare nel supporto.

■

Quando questa unità viene montata in un supporto parzialmente pieno, caricare
il supporto dal basso all'alto, con il componente più pesante sistemato sul fondo
del supporto.

■

Se il supporto è dotato di dispositivi stabilizzanti, installare tali dispositivi prima
di montare o di procedere alla manutenzione dell'unità nel supporto.

WARNING: Advarsel Unngå fysiske skader under montering eller reparasjonsarbeid
på denne enheten når den befinner seg i et kabinett. Vær nøye med at systemet er
stabilt. Følgende retningslinjer er gitt for å verne om sikkerheten:
■

Juniper Networks router må installeres i et stativ som er forankret til
bygningsstrukturen.

■

Denne enheten bør monteres nederst i kabinettet hvis dette er den eneste enheten
i kabinettet.

■

Ved montering av denne enheten i et kabinett som er delvis fylt, skal kabinettet
lastes fra bunnen og opp med den tyngste komponenten nederst i kabinettet.

■

Hvis kabinettet er utstyrt med stabiliseringsutstyr, skal stabilisatorene installeres
før montering eller utføring av reparasjonsarbeid på enheten i kabinettet.

Safety Guidelines and Warnings

■

219

JUNOS Software with Enhanced Services Hardware Guide

WARNING: Aviso Para se prevenir contra danos corporais ao montar ou reparar esta
unidade numa estante, deverá tomar precauções especiais para se certificar de que
o sistema possui um suporte estável. As seguintes directrizes ajudá-lo-ão a efectuar
o seu trabalho com segurança:
■

O Juniper Networks router deverá ser instalado numa prateleira fixa à estrutura
do edificio.

■

Esta unidade deverá ser montada na parte inferior da estante, caso seja esta a
única unidade a ser montada.

■

Ao montar esta unidade numa estante parcialmente ocupada, coloque os itens
mais pesados na parte inferior da estante, arrumando-os de baixo para cima.

■

Se a estante possuir um dispositivo de estabilização, instale-o antes de montar
ou reparar a unidade.

WARNING: ¡Atención! Para evitar lesiones durante el montaje de este equipo sobre
un bastidor, o posteriormente durante su mantenimiento, se debe poner mucho
cuidado en que el sistema quede bien estable. Para garantizar su seguridad, proceda
según las siguientes instrucciones:
■

El Juniper Networks router debe instalarse en un bastidor fijado a la estructura
del edificio.

■

Colocar el equipo en la parte inferior del bastidor, cuando sea la única unidad
en el mismo.

■

Cuando este equipo se vaya a instalar en un bastidor parcialmente ocupado,
comenzar la instalación desde la parte inferior hacia la superior colocando el
equipo más pesado en la parte inferior.

■

Si el bastidor dispone de dispositivos estabilizadores, instalar éstos antes de
montar o proceder al mantenimiento del equipo instalado en el bastidor.

WARNING: Varning! För att undvika kroppsskada när du installerar eller utför
underhållsarbete på denna enhet på en ställning måste du vidta särskilda
försiktighetsåtgärder för att försäkra dig om att systemet står stadigt. Följande riktlinjer
ges för att trygga din säkerhet:

220

■

Juniper Networks router måste installeras i en ställning som är förankrad i
byggnadens struktur.

■

Om denna enhet är den enda enheten på ställningen skall den installeras längst
ned på ställningen.

Safety Guidelines and Warnings

Chapter 12: Safety and Regulatory Compliance Information

■

Om denna enhet installeras på en delvis fylld ställning skall ställningen fyllas
nedifrån och upp, med de tyngsta enheterna längst ned på ställningen.

■

Om ställningen är försedd med stabiliseringsdon skall dessa monteras fast innan
enheten installeras eller underhålls på ställningen.

Ramp Warning
WARNING: When installing the router, do not use a ramp inclined at more than 10
degrees.
Waarschuwing Gebruik een oprijplaat niet onder een hoek van meer dan 10 graden.
Varoitus Älä käytä sellaista kaltevaa pintaa, jonka kaltevuus ylittää 10 astetta.
Attention Ne pas utiliser une rampe dont l'inclinaison est supérieure à 10 degrés.
Warnung Keine Rampen mit einer Neigung von mehr als 10 Grad verwenden.

WARNING: Avvertenza Non usare una rampa con pendenza superiore a 10 gradi.
Advarsel Bruk aldri en rampe som heller mer enn 10 grader.
Aviso Não utilize uma rampa com uma inclinação superior a 10 graus.
¡Atención! No usar una rampa inclinada más de 10 grados
Varning! Använd inte ramp med en lutning på mer än 10 grader.

Laser and LED Safety Guidelines and Warnings
Single-mode Physical Interface Modules (PIMs) are equipped with laser transmitters,
which are considered a Class 1 Laser Product by the U.S. Food and Drug
Administration, and are evaluated as a Class 1 Laser Product per EN 60825–1
requirements.
Observe the following guidelines and warnings:
■

General Laser Safety Guidelines on page 222

■

Class 1 Laser Product Warning on page 222

■

Class 1 LED Product Warning on page 222

■

Laser Beam Warning on page 223

■

Radiation from Open Port Apertures Warning on page 224

Safety Guidelines and Warnings

■

221

JUNOS Software with Enhanced Services Hardware Guide

General Laser Safety Guidelines
When working around PIMs, observe the following safety guidelines to prevent eye
injury:
■

Do not look into unterminated ports or at fibers that connect to unknown sources.

■

Do not examine unterminated optical ports with optical instruments.

■

Avoid direct exposure to the beam.

WARNING: Unterminated optical connectors can emit invisible laser radiation. The
lens in the human eye focuses all the laser power on the retina, so focusing the eye
directly on a laser source—even a low-power laser—could permanently damage the
eye.

Class 1 Laser Product Warning

WARNING: Class 1 laser product.
Waarschuwing Klasse-1 laser produkt.
Varoitus Luokan 1 lasertuote.
Attention Produit laser de classe I.
Warnung Laserprodukt der Klasse 1.

WARNING: Avvertenza Prodotto laser di Classe 1.
Advarsel Laserprodukt av klasse 1.
Aviso Produto laser de classe 1.
¡Atención! Producto láser Clase I.
Varning! Laserprodukt av klass 1.

Class 1 LED Product Warning

WARNING: Class 1 LED product.

222

■

Safety Guidelines and Warnings

Chapter 12: Safety and Regulatory Compliance Information

Waarschuwing Klasse 1 LED-product.
Varoitus Luokan 1 valodiodituote.
Attention Alarme de produit LED Class I.
Warnung Class 1 LED-Produktwarnung.

WARNING: Avvertenza Avvertenza prodotto LED di Classe 1.
Advarsel LED-produkt i klasse 1.
Aviso Produto de classe 1 com LED.
¡Atención! Aviso sobre producto LED de Clase 1.
Varning! Lysdiodprodukt av klass 1.

Laser Beam Warning
WARNING: Do not stare into the laser beam or view it directly with optical
instruments.

WARNING: Waarschuwing Niet in de straal staren of hem rechtstreeks bekijken met
optische instrumenten.

WARNING: Varoitus Älä katso säteeseen äläkä tarkastele sitä suoraan optisen laitteen
avulla.

WARNING: Attention Ne pas fixer le faisceau des yeux, ni l'observer directement à
l'aide d'instruments optiques.

WARNING: Warnung Nicht direkt in den Strahl blicken und ihn nicht direkt mit
optischen Geräten prüfen.

Safety Guidelines and Warnings

■

223

JUNOS Software with Enhanced Services Hardware Guide

WARNING: Avvertenza Non fissare il raggio con gli occhi né usare strumenti ottici
per osservarlo direttamente.

WARNING: Advarsel Stirr eller se ikke direkte p strlen med optiske instrumenter.

WARNING: Aviso Não olhe fixamente para o raio, nem olhe para ele directamente
com instrumentos ópticos.

WARNING: ¡Atención! No mirar fijamente el haz ni observarlo directamente con
instrumentos ópticos.

WARNING: Varning! Rikta inte blicken in mot strålen och titta inte direkt på den
genom optiska instrument.

Radiation from Open Port Apertures Warning
WARNING: Because invisible radiation may be emitted from the aperture of the port
when no fiber cable is connected, avoid exposure to radiation and do not stare into
open apertures.

WARNING: Waarschuwing Aangezien onzichtbare straling vanuit de opening van
de poort kan komen als er geen fiberkabel aangesloten is, dient blootstelling aan
straling en het kijken in open openingen vermeden te worden.

WARNING: Varoitus Koska portin aukosta voi emittoitua näkymätöntä säteilyä, kun
kuitukaapelia ei ole kytkettynä, vältä säteilylle altistumista äläkä katso avoimiin
aukkoihin.

WARNING: Attention Des radiations invisibles à l'il nu pouvant traverser l'ouverture
du port lorsqu'aucun câble en fibre optique n'y est connecté, il est recommandé de
ne pas regarder fixement l'intérieur de ces ouvertures.

224

■

Safety Guidelines and Warnings

Chapter 12: Safety and Regulatory Compliance Information

WARNING: Warnung Aus der Port-Öffnung können unsichtbare Strahlen emittieren,
wenn kein Glasfaserkabel angeschlossen ist. Vermeiden Sie es, sich den Strahlungen
auszusetzen, und starren Sie nicht in die Öffnungen!

WARNING: Avvertenza Quando i cavi in fibra non sono inseriti, radiazioni invisibili
possono essere emesse attraverso l'apertura della porta. Evitate di esporvi alle
radiazioni e non guardate direttamente nelle aperture.

WARNING: Advarsel Unngå utsettelse for stråling, og stirr ikke inn i åpninger som
er åpne, fordi usynlig stråling kan emiteres fra portens åpning når det ikke er tilkoblet
en fiberkabel.

WARNING: Aviso Dada a possibilidade de emissão de radiação invisível através do
orifício da via de acesso, quando esta não tiver nenhum cabo de fibra conectado,
deverá evitar a exposição à radiação e não deverá olhar fixamente para orifícios que
se encontrarem a descoberto.

WARNING: ¡Atención! Debido a que la apertura del puerto puede emitir radiación
invisible cuando no existe un cable de fibra conectado, evite mirar directamente a
las aperturas para no exponerse a la radiación.

WARNING: Varning! Osynlig strålning kan avges från en portöppning utan ansluten
fiberkabel och du bör därför undvika att bli utsatt för strålning genom att inte stirra
in i oskyddade öppningar.

Maintenance and Operational Safety Guidelines and Warnings
As you maintain the Services Router, observe the following guidelines and warnings:
■

Battery Handling Warning on page 226

■

Jewelry Removal Warning on page 227

■

Lightning Activity Warning on page 228

■

Operating Temperature Warning on page 229

■

Product Disposal Warning on page 231

Safety Guidelines and Warnings

■

225

JUNOS Software with Enhanced Services Hardware Guide

Battery Handling Warning
WARNING: Replacing the battery incorrectly might result in an explosion. Replace
the battery only with the same or equivalent type recommended by the manufacturer.
Dispose of used batteries according to the manufacturer's instructions.

WARNING: Waarschuwing Er is ontploffingsgevaar als de batterij verkeerd vervangen
wordt. Vervang de batterij slechts met hetzelfde of een equivalent type dat door de
fabrikant aanbevolen is. Gebruikte batterijen dienen overeenkomstig
fabrieksvoorschriften weggeworpen te worden.

WARNING: Varoitus Räjähdyksen vaara, jos akku on vaihdettu väärään akkuun.
Käytä vaihtamiseen ainoastaan saman- tai vastaavantyyppistä akkua, joka on
valmistajan suosittelema. Hävitä käytetyt akut valmistajan ohjeiden mukaan.

WARNING: Attention Danger d'explosion si la pile n'est pas remplacée correctement.
Ne la remplacer que par une pile de type semblable ou équivalent, recommandée
par le fabricant. Jeter les piles usagées conformément aux instructions du fabricant.

WARNING: Warnung Bei Einsetzen einer falschen Batterie besteht Explosionsgefahr.
Ersetzen Sie die Batterie nur durch den gleichen oder vom Hersteller empfohlenen
Batterietyp. Entsorgen Sie die benutzten Batterien nach den Anweisungen des
Herstellers.

WARNING: Advarsel Det kan være fare for eksplosjon hvis batteriet skiftes på feil
måte. Skift kun med samme eller tilsvarende type som er anbefalt av produsenten.
Kasser brukte batterier i henhold til produsentens instruksjoner.

WARNING: Avvertenza Pericolo di esplosione se la batteria non è installata
correttamente. Sostituire solo con una di tipo uguale o equivalente, consigliata dal
produttore. Eliminare le batterie usate secondo le istruzioni del produttore.

WARNING: Aviso Existe perigo de explosão se a bateria for substituída
incorrectamente. Substitua a bateria por uma bateria igual ou de um tipo equivalente
recomendado pelo fabricante. Destrua as baterias usadas conforme as instruções do
fabricante.

226

■

Safety Guidelines and Warnings

Chapter 12: Safety and Regulatory Compliance Information

WARNING: ¡Atención! Existe peligro de explosión si la batería se reemplaza de
manera incorrecta. Reemplazar la batería exclusivamente con el mismo tipo o el
equivalente recomendado por el fabricante. Desechar las baterías gastadas según
las instrucciones del fabricante.

WARNING: Varning! Explosionsfara vid felaktigt batteribyte. Ersätt endast batteriet
med samma batterityp som rekommenderas av tillverkaren eller motsvarande. Följ
tillverkarens anvisningar vid kassering av använda batterier.

Jewelry Removal Warning
WARNING: Before working on equipment that is connected to power lines, remove
jewelry, including rings, necklaces, and watches. Metal objects heat up when
connected to power and ground and can cause serious burns or weld the metal object
to the terminals.

WARNING: Waarschuwing Alvorens aan apparatuur te werken die met elektrische
leidingen is verbonden, sieraden (inclusief ringen, kettingen en horloges) verwijderen.
Metalen voorwerpen worden warm wanneer ze met stroom en aarde zijn verbonden,
en kunnen ernstige brandwonden veroorzaken of het metalen voorwerp aan de
aansluitklemmen lassen.

WARNING: Varoitus Ennen kuin työskentelet voimavirtajohtoihin kytkettyjen
laitteiden parissa, ota pois kaikki korut (sormukset, kaulakorut ja kellot mukaan
lukien). Metalliesineet kuumenevat, kun ne ovat yhteydessä sähkövirran ja maan
kanssa, ja ne voivat aiheuttaa vakavia palovammoja tai hitsata metalliesineet kiinni
liitäntänapoihin.

WARNING: Attention Avant d'accéder à cet équipement connecté aux lignes
électriques, ôter tout bijou (anneaux, colliers et montres compris). Lorsqu'ils sont
branchés à l'alimentation et reliés à la terre, les objets métalliques chauffent, ce qui
peut provoquer des blessures graves ou souder l'objet métallique aux bornes.

WARNING: Warnung Vor der Arbeit an Geräten, die an das Netz angeschlossen sind,
jeglichen Schmuck (einschließlich Ringe, Ketten und Uhren) abnehmen.
Metallgegenstände erhitzen sich, wenn sie an das Netz und die Erde angeschlossen
werden, und können schwere Verbrennungen verursachen oder an die
Anschlußklemmen angeschweißt werden.

Safety Guidelines and Warnings

■

227

JUNOS Software with Enhanced Services Hardware Guide

WARNING: Avvertenza Prima di intervenire su apparecchiature collegate alle linee
di alimentazione, togliersi qualsiasi monile (inclusi anelli, collane, braccialetti ed
orologi). Gli oggetti metallici si riscaldano quando sono collegati tra punti di
alimentazione e massa: possono causare ustioni gravi oppure il metallo può saldarsi
ai terminali.

WARNING: Advarsel Fjern alle smykker (inkludert ringer, halskjeder og klokker) før
du skal arbeide på utstyr som er koblet til kraftledninger. Metallgjenstander som er
koblet til kraftledninger og jord blir svært varme og kan forårsake alvorlige
brannskader eller smelte fast til polene.

WARNING: Aviso Antes de trabalhar em equipamento que esteja ligado a linhas de
corrente, retire todas as jóias que estiver a usar (incluindo anéis, fios e relógios). Os
objectos metálicos aquecerão em contacto com a corrente e em contacto com a
ligação à terra, podendo causar queimaduras graves ou ficarem soldados aos
terminais.

WARNING: ¡Atención! Antes de operar sobre equipos conectados a líneas de
alimentación, quitarse las joyas (incluidos anillos, collares y relojes). Los objetos de
metal se calientan cuando se conectan a la alimentación y a tierra, lo que puede
ocasionar quemaduras graves o que los objetos metálicos queden soldados a los
bornes.

WARNING: Varning! Tag av alla smycken (inklusive ringar, halsband och armbandsur)
innan du arbetar på utrustning som är kopplad till kraftledningar. Metallobjekt hettas
upp när de kopplas ihop med ström och jord och kan förorsaka allvarliga brännskador;
metallobjekt kan också sammansvetsas med kontakterna.

Lightning Activity Warning
WARNING: Do not work on the system or connect or disconnect cables during periods
of lightning activity.

WARNING: Waarschuwing Tijdens onweer dat gepaard gaat met bliksem, dient u
niet aan het systeem te werken of kabels aan te sluiten of te ontkoppelen.

228

■

Safety Guidelines and Warnings

Chapter 12: Safety and Regulatory Compliance Information

WARNING: Varoitus Älä työskentele järjestelmän parissa äläkä yhdistä tai irrota
kaapeleita ukkosilmalla.

WARNING: Attention Ne pas travailler sur le système ni brancher ou débrancher les
câbles pendant un orage.

WARNING: Warnung Arbeiten Sie nicht am System und schließen Sie keine Kabel
an bzw. trennen Sie keine ab, wenn es gewittert.

WARNING: Avvertenza Non lavorare sul sistema o collegare oppure scollegare i cavi
durante un temporale con fulmini.

WARNING: Advarsel Utfør aldri arbeid på systemet, eller koble kabler til eller fra
systemet når det tordner eller lyner.

WARNING: Aviso Não trabalhe no sistema ou ligue e desligue cabos durante períodos
de mau tempo (trovoada).

WARNING: ¡Atención! No operar el sistema ni conectar o desconectar cables durante
el transcurso de descargas eléctricas en la atmósfera.

WARNING: Varning! Vid åska skall du aldrig utföra arbete på systemet eller ansluta
eller koppla loss kablar.

Operating Temperature Warning
WARNING: To prevent the router from overheating, do not operate it in an area that
exceeds the maximum recommended ambient temperature of 104οF (40οC). To
prevent airflow restriction, allow at least 6 inches (15.2 cm) of clearance around the
ventilation openings.

WARNING: Waarschuwing Om te voorkomen dat welke router van de Juniper
Networks router dan ook oververhit raakt, dient u deze niet te bedienen op een plaats

Safety Guidelines and Warnings

■

229

JUNOS Software with Enhanced Services Hardware Guide

waar de maximale aanbevolen omgevingstemperatuur van 40οC wordt overschreden.
Om te voorkomen dat de luchtstroom wordt beperkt, dient er minstens 15,2 cm
speling rond de ventilatie-openingen te zijn.

WARNING: Varoitus Ettei Juniper Networks router-sarjan reititin ylikuumentuisi, sitä
ei saa käyttää tilassa, jonka lämpötila ylittää korkeimman suositellun
ympäristölämpötilan 40οC. Ettei ilmanvaihto estyisi, tuuletusaukkojen ympärille on
jätettävä ainakin 15,2 cm tilaa.

WARNING: Attention Pour éviter toute surchauffe des routeurs de la gamme Juniper
Networks router, ne l'utilisez pas dans une zone où la température ambiante est
supérieure à 40οC. Pour permettre un flot d'air constant, dégagez un espace d'au
moins 15,2 cm autour des ouvertures de ventilations.

WARNING: Warnung Um einen Router der router vor Überhitzung zu schützen, darf
dieser nicht in einer Gegend betrieben werden, in der die Umgebungstemperatur
das empfohlene Maximum von 40οC überschreitet. Um Lüftungsverschluß zu
verhindern, achten Sie darauf, daß mindestens 15,2 cm lichter Raum um die
Lüftungsöffnungen herum frei bleibt.

WARNING: Avvertenza Per evitare il surriscaldamento dei router, non adoperateli
in un locale che ecceda la temperatura ambientale massima di 40οC. Per evitare che
la circolazione dell'aria sia impedita, lasciate uno spazio di almeno 15.2 cm di fronte
alle aperture delle ventole.

WARNING: Advarsel Unngå overoppheting av eventuelle rutere i Juniper Networks
router Disse skal ikke brukes på steder der den anbefalte maksimale
omgivelsestemperaturen overstiger 40οC (104οF). Sørg for at klaringen rundt
lufteåpningene er minst 15,2 cm (6 tommer) for å forhindre nedsatt luftsirkulasjon.

WARNING: Aviso Para evitar o sobreaquecimento do encaminhador Juniper Networks
router, não utilize este equipamento numa área que exceda a temperatura máxima
recomendada de 40οC. Para evitar a restrição à circulação de ar, deixe pelo menos
um espaço de 15,2 cm à volta das aberturas de ventilação.

WARNING: ¡Atención! Para impedir que un encaminador de la serie Juniper Networks
router se recaliente, no lo haga funcionar en un área en la que se supere la

230

■

Safety Guidelines and Warnings

Chapter 12: Safety and Regulatory Compliance Information

temperatura ambiente máxima recomendada de 40οC. Para impedir la restricción
de la entrada de aire, deje un espacio mínimo de 15,2 cm alrededor de las aperturas
para ventilación.

WARNING: Varning! Förhindra att en Juniper Networks router överhettas genom att
inte använda den i ett område där den maximalt rekommenderade
omgivningstemperaturen på 40οC överskrids. Förhindra att luftcirkulationen inskränks
genom att se till att det finns fritt utrymme på minst 15,2 cm omkring
ventilationsöppningarna.

Product Disposal Warning
WARNING: Disposal of this product must be handled according to all national laws
and regulations.

WARNING: Waarschuwing Dit produkt dient volgens alle landelijke wetten en
voorschriften te worden afgedankt.

WARNING: Varoitus Tämän tuotteen lopullisesta hävittämisestä tulee huolehtia
kaikkia valtakunnallisia lakeja ja säännöksiä noudattaen.

WARNING: Attention La mise au rebut définitive de ce produit doit être effectuée
conformément à toutes les lois et réglementations en vigueur.

WARNING: Warnung Dieses Produkt muß den geltenden Gesetzen und Vorschriften
entsprechend entsorgt werden.

WARNING: Avvertenza L'eliminazione finale di questo prodotto deve essere eseguita
osservando le normative italiane vigenti in materia

WARNING: Advarsel Endelig disponering av dette produktet må skje i henhold til
nasjonale lover og forskrifter.

Safety Guidelines and Warnings

■

231

JUNOS Software with Enhanced Services Hardware Guide

WARNING: Aviso A descartagem final deste produto deverá ser efectuada de acordo
com os regulamentos e a legislação nacional.

WARNING: ¡Atención! El desecho final de este producto debe realizarse según todas
las leyes y regulaciones nacionales

WARNING: Varning! Slutlig kassering av denna produkt bör skötas i enlighet med
landets alla lagar och föreskrifter.

Agency Approvals
The Services Router complies with the following standards:
■

■

232

■

Agency Approvals

Safety
■

CAN/CSA-22.2 No. 60950–1–03–UL 60950–1 Safety of Information
Technology Equipment

■

EN 60950–1 Safety of Information Technology Equipment

■

EN 60825-1 Safety of Laser Products - Part 1: Equipment Classification,
Requirements and User's Guide

EMC (J2320 and J2350)
■

AS/NZS 3548 Class A (Australia/New Zealand)

■

EN 55022 Class A Emissions (Europe)

■

FCC Part 15 Class A (USA)

■

VCCI Class A (Japan)

■

FCC Part 68

■

Industry Canada CS-03

EMC (J4320 and J6350)
■

AS/NZS 3548 Class B (Australia/New Zealand)

■

EN 55022 Class B Emissions (Europe)

■

FCC Part 15 Class B (USA)

■

VCCI Class B (Japan)

■

FCC Part 68

■

Industry Canada CS-03

Immunity

Chapter 12: Safety and Regulatory Compliance Information

■

EN 61000-3-2 Power Line Harmonics

■

EN 61000-3-3 Voltage Fluctuations and Flicker

■

EN 61000-4-2 ESD

■

EN 61000-4-3 Radiated Immunity

■

EN 61000-4-4 EFT

■

EN 61000-4-5 Surge

■

EN 61000-4-6 Low Frequency Common Immunity

■

EN 61000-4-11 Voltage Dips and Sags

ETSI
■

ETSI EN-300386-2 Telecommunication Network Equipment. Electromagnetic
Compatibility Requirements

Compliance Statements for Environmental Requirements
Lithium Battery
Batteries in this product are not based on mercury, lead, or cadmium substances.
The batteries used in this product are in compliance with EU Directives 91/157/EEC,
93/86/EEC, and 98/101/EEC. The product documentation includes instructional
information about the proper method of reclamation and recycling.

Compliance Statements for EMC Requirements
■

Canada on page 233

■

European Community on page 235

■

Japan on page 236

■

United States on page 237

Canada
This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003.
Cet appareil numérique de la classe B est conforme à la norme NMB-003 du Canada.
The Industry Canada label identifies certified equipment. This certification means
that the equipment meets certain telecommunications network protective, operational,
and safety requirements. Industry Canada does not guarantee the equipment will
operate to the users’ satisfaction.
Before installing this equipment, users should ensure that it is permissible to be
connected to the facilities of the local telecommunications company. The equipment
must also be installed using an acceptable method of connection. In some cases, the

Compliance Statements for Environmental Requirements

■

233

JUNOS Software with Enhanced Services Hardware Guide

inside wiring associated with a single line individual service may be extended by
means of a certified connector assembly. The customer should be aware that
compliance with the above conditions may not prevent degradation of service in
some situations.
Repairs to certified equipment should be made by an authorized Canadian
maintenance facility designated by the supplier. Any repairs or alterations made by
the user to this equipment, or equipment malfunctions, may give the
telecommunications company cause to request the user to disconnect the equipment.

CAUTION: Users should not attempt to make electrical ground connections by
themselves, but should contact the appropriate inspection authority or an electrician,
as appropriate.
Users should ensure for their own protection that the electrical ground connections
of the power utility, telephone lines, and internal metallic water pipe system, if
present, are connected together. This precaution may be particularly important in
rural areas.

234

■

Compliance Statements for EMC Requirements

Chapter 12: Safety and Regulatory Compliance Information

European Community

Compliance Statements for EMC Requirements

■

235

JUNOS Software with Enhanced Services Hardware Guide

Japan

The preceding translates as follows:
This is a Class B product based on the standard of the Voluntary Control Council for
Interference by Information Technology Equipment (VCCI). If this product is used
near a radio or television receiver in a domestic environment, it may cause radio
interference. Install and use the equipment according to the instruction manual.

236

■

Compliance Statements for EMC Requirements

Chapter 12: Safety and Regulatory Compliance Information

United States
The Services Router has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class
B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to
provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is
operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can
radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the
instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications.
Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference
in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense.

FCC Part 15 Statement
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B
digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to
provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation.
This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not
installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference
to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not
occur in a particular installation.
If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception,
which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged
to try and correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:
■

Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.

■

Increase the separation between the equipment and the receiver.

■

Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which
the receiver is connected.

■

Consult the dealer or an experienced radio or TV technician for help.

FCC Part 68 Statement
This equipment complies with Part 68 of the Federal Communications Commission
(FCC) rules. On the product is a label that contains the FCC registration number for
this device. If requested, this information must be provided to the telephone company.
This equipment is designed to be connected to the telephone network or premises
wiring using a compatible modular jack which is Part 68 compliant. See installation
instructions for details.
If this device causes harm to the telephone network, the telephone company will
notify you in advance that temporary discontinuance of service may be required.
The telephone company may request that you disconnect the equipment until the
problem is resolved. The telephone company may make changes in its facilities,
equipment, operations or procedures that could affect the operation of this equipment.
If this happens, the telephone company will provide advance notice in order for you
to make necessary modifications to maintain uninterrupted service.

Compliance Statements for EMC Requirements

■

237

JUNOS Software with Enhanced Services Hardware Guide

If trouble is experienced with this equipment or for repair or warranty information,
please follow the applicable procedures explained in the “Technical Support” section
of this manual.

238

■

FCC Registration Number—See label on product.

■

Required Connector (USOC)—RJ-48C

■

Service Order Code (SOC)—6.ON

Compliance Statements for EMC Requirements

Part 5

Index
■

Index on page 241

Index

■

239

JUNOS Software with Enhanced Services Hardware Guide

240

■

Index

Index
Symbols
#, comments in configuration statements...................xix
( ), in syntax descriptions............................................xix
4-Port Fast Ethernet ePIM............................................54
4-Port ISDN BRI S/T PIM
description............................................................55
PIM ONLINE LED..................................................56
4-Port ISDN BRI U PIM
description............................................................55
PIM ONLINE LED..................................................56
< >, in syntax descriptions.......................................xix
[ ], in configuration statements...................................xix
{ }, in configuration statements..................................xix
| (pipe), in syntax descriptions....................................xix

A
AC plug types...............................................................70
AC power
connecting power.................................................84
cords See AC power cords
dedicated AC power feed requirement................142
electrical specifications.........................................69
grounding the router.............................................84
installing a J6350 power supply..........................141
J2320 system........................................................18
J2350 system........................................................18
J4350 system........................................................30
J6350 system........................................................31
removing a J6350 power supply.........................140
requirements........................................................69
safety guidelines.................................................203
AC power cords
electrical specifications.........................................70
physical requirements...........................................69
plug types.............................................................70
replacing.............................................................139
accident, steps to take................................................211
ACTIVITY LED (Dual-Port Fast Ethernet PIM)...............53
adapter, console port
chassis..........................................................99, 102
adapters, for compact flash recovery.........................165

addresses
ge-0/0/0 for autoinstallation..................................94
loopback...............................................................94
management interface..........................................94
ADSL PIM
description............................................................56
PIM ONLINE LED..................................................57
ADSL ports
description............................................................56
LED states.............................................................57
RJ-11 connector pinouts......................................194
agency approvals.......................................................232
air filter
description......................................................19, 32
location...............................................................155
replacing.............................................................154
airflow
description............................................................33
space requirement................................................63
ALARM LED
description......................................................15, 28
indications..........................................................157
alarms
conditions, in chassis components......................158
LED.................................................................15, 28
alternative boot media See boot devices; USB
altitude requirement....................................................66
Annex A; Annex B See ADSL; SHDSL
antistatic mat.............................................................201
approvals, agency......................................................232
asymmetric digital subscriber line See ADSL
AT modem command........................................101, 102
AT&D1 modem command.........................................101
AT&K0 modem command.........................................101
AT&W modem command..........................................101
ATDT modem command...........................................103
ATS0=1 modem command.......................................101
AUX port................................................................17, 30
auxiliary console port.............................................17, 30

B
backup compact flash, removing...............................132
backup router
defining (configuration editor)............................113
description............................................................94

Index

■

241

JUNOS Software with Enhanced Services Hardware Guide

basic connectivity
CLI configuration editor......................................110
establishing...........................................................91
J-Web configuration editor..................................110
Quick Configuration............................................103
requirements........................................................95
sample configuration..........................................114
verifying.............................................................113
battery
environmental compliance.................................233
handling..............................................................226
lithium................................................................233
blank panel
for PIM slots..........................................................38
for power supply (J6350).....................................139
blinking
Fast Ethernet port ACTIVITY LED state (dual-port
PIM)..................................................................53
Fast Ethernet port link activity LED state (4-port
ePIM).................................................................55
Gigabit Ethernet port LED ....................................44
Gigabit Ethernet port TX/RX LED
state......................................................17, 29, 46
ISDN BRI ONLINE LED state.................................56
POWER LED state...........................................14, 27
STATUS (router) LED state..............................15, 28
boot devices...........................................................12, 25
external compact flash..........................................18
boot process, backup router for...................................94
boot sequence........................................................12, 25
braces, in configuration statements.............................xix
brackets
angle, in syntax descriptions................................xix
square, in configuration statements.....................xix
BTUs per hour..............................................................66
built-in Ethernet ports See Gigabit Ethernet ports
buttons
power.............................................................14, 27
RESET CONFIG...................................................160

C
cables
AC power See AC power cords
ADSL RJ-11 pinouts.............................................194
arranging for safety.............................................123
chassis console port, DB-9 connector
pinouts............................................................191
chassis console port, RJ-45 connector
pinouts............................................................190
connecting to network media...............................83
console port cable (chassis), connecting........99, 102
console port cable (chassis), replacing................120
console port, connecting.....................................162
DC cables See DC power cables
disconnecting PIM cables....................................123

242

■

Index

E1 RJ-48 pinouts.................................................191
Ethernet cable, connecting......................97, 99, 102
Ethernet rollover, connecting..............................162
Fast Ethernet RJ-45 connector pinout.................189
Gigabit Ethernet RJ-45 connector pinouts
(ePIM).............................................................190
Gigabit Ethernet RJ-45 connector pinouts
(uPIMs)............................................................189
grounding.............................................................83
ISDN RJ-45 pinouts.............................................195
PIM, installing.....................................................123
PIM, removing....................................................123
reducing radio frequency interference (RFI)..........68
serial EIA-530A DCE pinouts...............................185
serial EIA-530A DTE pinouts...............................184
serial PIM specifications......................................179
serial RS-232 DCE pinouts..................................181
serial RS-232 DTE pinouts...................................180
serial RS-422/449 (EIA-449) DCE pinouts............183
serial RS-422/449 (EIA-449) DTE pinouts............181
serial V.35 DCE pinouts......................................187
serial V.35 DTE pinouts.......................................186
serial X.21 DCE pinouts......................................188
serial X.21 DTE pinouts......................................187
SHDSL RJ-11 pinouts...........................................194
T1 RJ-48 pinouts.................................................191
Canada, compliance statement..................................233
case number, for JTAC...............................................172
channelized E1 PIM.....................................................49
channelized E1 ports
description............................................................49
LED states.............................................................51
RJ-48 cable pinouts.............................................191
channelized T1 PIM......................................................49
channelized T1 ports
description............................................................49
LED states.............................................................51
RJ-48 cable pinouts.............................................191
chassis
alarm conditions and remedies...........................158
component serial number labels.................169, 170
cover, replacing (J2320 and J2350).....................124
dimensions.....................................................11, 24
environmental tolerances.....................................66
grounding.............................................................83
heat dissipation.....................................................72
J2320......................................................................8
J2350......................................................................8
J4350....................................................................21
J6350....................................................................21
lifting guidelines..................................................216
PIM slot numbers............................................14, 26
power consumption..............................................72
power management, planning..............................72
power management, troubleshooting.................159

Index

rack requirements.................................................64
weight.............................................................11, 24
checklist, for site preparation.......................................75
clear operation, RESET CONFIG button......................160
clear-text access...........................................................95
clearance.....................................................................63
CLI configuration editor
basic settings......................................................110
initial configuration.............................................110
comments, in configuration statements......................xix
committed configuration
root password requirement...................................92
compact flash
backup, replacing................................................132
description......................................................12, 25
external, description.............................................18
external, J2320 and J2350....................................18
external, replacing..............................................132
inserting.............................................................131
internal, recovering.............................................164
location (horizontal)............................................130
location (vertical)................................................129
minor (yellow) alarm..........................................158
recovering...........................................................164
See also compact flash recovery
removing............................................................131
replacing.....................................................126, 129
replacing, rotating fans warning.................127, 130
compact flash recovery
adapter for..........................................................165
copying the JUNOS image...................................165
reasons for..........................................................164
requirements......................................................164
compliance
EMC requirements..............................................233
general standards...............................................232
lithium battery....................................................226
components
packing for shipment..........................................174
replacing.............................................................119
serial number label.....................................169, 170
troubleshooting...................................................157
See also LEDs
configuration
clearing with RESET CONFIG button...................160
factory, resetting with RESET CONFIG
button.............................................................160
root password requirement...................................92
configuration editor See CLI configuration editor; J-Web
configuration editor
connection
AC power..............................................................84
DC power..............................................................86
for management...................................................91
network cables......................................................83
to Services Router.................................................96

connectivity
basic See basic connectivity
hardware..............................................................77
modem (remote) connection..............................100
regaining lost DHCP lease after initial
configuration...................................................104
through J-Web.......................................................97
through the CLI locally..........................................98
through the CLI remotely....................................100
console port
adapter...............................................................162
adapter (chassis)...........................................99, 102
auxiliary console port......................................17, 30
connecting through the CLI locally........................98
connecting through the CLI remotely..................100
description......................................................17, 30
on chassis, DB-9 connector pinouts....................191
on chassis, RJ-45 connector pinouts....................190
replacing the cable..............................................120
settings for local CLI connection...........................99
settings for modem connection at router for
remote CLI access...........................................101
settings for modem connection for remote CLI
access.............................................................102
conventions
notice icons........................................................xviii
text and syntax..................................................xviii
cooling system
airflow requirement..............................................63
description......................................................19, 32
Copper Gigabit Ethernet ePIMs
overview...............................................................44
pinouts................................................................190
Copper Gigabit Ethernet uPIMs
overview...............................................................41
pinouts................................................................189
cords See AC power cords; cables; DC power cables
cover, replacing (J2320 and J2350)............................124
Crypto Accelerator Module
description......................................................12, 25
installing.....................................................148, 152
location.......................................................146, 149
removing....................................................147, 150
curly braces, in configuration statements....................xix
customer support.......................................................xxii
contacting JTAC...................................................xxii
contacting JTAC for hardware return...................172
information required for hardware return...........172
Cygwin, for compact flash recovery...........................165

D
datasheets URL............................................................35
DB-9 connector pinouts
chassis console port............................................191
DB-9 to DB-25 serial port adapter..............................102

Index

■

243

JUNOS Software with Enhanced Services Hardware Guide

DC power
cables See DC power cables
connecting power.................................................86
dedicated DC power feed requirement...............145
electrical specifications.........................................69
grounding requirements and warning.................206
grounding the router.............................................87
installing a J6350 power supply..........................144
J2320 system........................................................18
J2350 system........................................................18
J4350 system........................................................30
J6350 system........................................................31
power disconnection warning.............................205
removing a J6350 power supply.........................143
requirements........................................................69
safety guidelines (general)...................................204
safety guidelines, power sources for redundant
power supplies................................................205
wiring sequence warning....................................207
wiring terminations warning...............................209
DC power cables
electrical specifications.........................................71
physical requirements...........................................71
replacing.............................................................142
usage warning.....................................................204
dd utility, for compact flash recovery.........................165
Declaration of Conformity..........................................235
default gateway
defining (Quick Configuration)............................105
description............................................................93
DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol)..............94
DHCP server
after initial configuration.......................................94
before initial configuration....................................94
regaining lost lease after initial
configuration...................................................104
diagnosis
chassis................................................................158
hardware............................................................158
dial-up modem connection See modem connection to
router console port
digital certificate See SSL certificates
digital subscriber line See ADSL; SHDSL
DIMMs (dual inline memory modules) See DRAM
modules
DNS (Domain Name System).......................................93
DNS server
defining (configuration editor)............................112
defining (Quick Configuration)............................105
function................................................................93
documentation set
comments on.......................................................xxi
list of.....................................................................xx

244

■

Index

domain name..............................................................92
defining (configuration editor)............................111
defining (Quick Configuration)............................104
See also DNS server
Domain Name System.................................................93
domain search
defining (configuration editor)............................112
defining (Quick Configuration)............................105
DRAM modules
installing.............................................................138
location...............................................................136
removing............................................................137
dry chemical fire extinguishers, prohibited..................67
DS1 ports See E1 ports; T1 ports
DS3 ports See E3 ports; T3 ports
DSL See ADSL; SHDSL
dual inline memory modules See DRAM modules
Dual-Port Channelized T1/E1/ISDN PRI PIM.................49
Dual-Port E1 PIM..........................................................48
Dual-Port E3 PIM .........................................................51
Dual-Port Fast Ethernet PIM.........................................53
Dual-Port Serial PIM.....................................................47
Dual-Port T1 PIM..........................................................48
Dual-Port T3 PIM .........................................................51

E
E1 ports
description............................................................48
See also channelized E1 ports
LED states.............................................................49
RJ-48 cable pinouts.............................................191
E3 ports
BNC connector pinouts.......................................194
description............................................................51
LED states.............................................................52
earth ground See grounding
earthquakes
rack-mount requirements.....................................65
seismic requirements............................................66
EIA-530A DCE cable pinouts......................................185
EIA-530A DTE cable pinouts......................................184
electrical specifications................................................69
electricity
safety warnings...................................................201
wiring guidelines...................................................68
electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) See EMC
electromagnetic interference (EMI) See See EMI
electrostatic bag, for storing components...................201
electrostatic discharge, preventing.............................201
EMC (electromagnetic compatibility)
compliance with requirements............................233
preventing problems with.....................................68
standards............................................................232

Index

EMI (electromagnetic interference)
compliance with requirements............................233
standards............................................................232
suppressing...........................................................68
encrypted access
through SSH..........................................................95
environmental requirements for operation..................66
ePIMs
4-Port Fast Ethernet..............................................54
Copper Gigabit Ethernet........................................44
SFP Gigabit Ethernet.............................................44
slot locations.........................................................27
EPROM..................................................................12, 25
ESD (electrostatic discharge), preventing...................201
ESD wrist strap
verifying resistance, for safety............................201
wearing during installation....................................21
Ethernet cable
chassis console DB-9 connector pinouts..............191
chassis console, RJ-45 connector pinouts............190
connecting the Services Router to a management
device.........................................................97, 99
connecting the Services Router to a modem.......102
replacing.............................................................120
Ethernet ports See Fast Ethernet ports See Gigabit
Ethernet ports
Ethernet rollover cable, connecting the router to a
management device...............................................162
European Union, compliance statement....................235
external compact flash See compact flash

F
failures
compact flash, USB for....................................17, 30
PIM, troubleshooting...........................................158
Routing Engine fan, troubleshooting...................158
fans
description......................................................19, 32
See also air filter
See also cooling system
failure, troubleshooting.......................................158
Fast Ethernet ports
4-Port Fast Ethernet ePIM.....................................54
ACTIVITY status (dual-port PIM)............................53
Dual-Port Fast Ethernet PIM..................................53
LED states (4-port ePIM).......................................55
LED states (dual-port PIM).....................................53
link activity (4-port ePIM)......................................55
link status (4-port ePIM)........................................55
LINK/ SPEED status (dual-port PIM).......................53
RJ-45 connector pinout.......................................189
FCC Part 15 compliance statement............................237
FCC Part 68 compliance statement............................237
field-replaceable units, replacing................................119
filter cover See air filter

filter, air See air filter
fire extinguishers
prohibited.............................................................67
required................................................................67
fire safety requirements...............................................66
fire suppression
equipment required..............................................67
shutdown requirement.........................................66
font conventions........................................................xviii
FPC, PIM slot number in command
displays..........................................................124, 169
front panel.............................................................13, 26
FRUs (field-replaceable units), replacing.....................119

G
G.SHDSL PIM
description............................................................58
PIM ONLINE LED..................................................59
G.SHDSL ports See SHDSL ports
gateway, default...........................................................93
ge-0/0/0
connecting through J-Web.....................................97
defining address (configuration editor)...............113
defining address (Quick Configuration)...............105
for autoinstallation................................................94
management interface..........................................94
Gigabit Ethernet ePIMs
alarms...................................................................46
description............................................................44
high-speed slot locations.......................................46
installation............................................................46
LEDs.....................................................................46
limitations.............................................................46
link speeds and transmission modes ...................45
SFP, optical interface support...............................46
Gigabit Ethernet ports
built-in............................................................17, 29
copper..................................................................44
LED states...........................................17, 29, 44, 46
port 0....................................................................94
RJ-45 connector pinouts (ePIM)...........................190
RJ-45 connector pinouts (uPIMs).........................189
SFP (optical)....................................................43, 45
Gigabit Ethernet uPIMs
alarms...................................................................44
description............................................................41
installation............................................................43
LEDs.....................................................................44
limitations.............................................................43
link speeds and transmission modes ...................43
SFP, optical interface support...............................44
glossary
basic connectivity.................................................91
PIMs.....................................................................35
graceful shutdown........................................................89

Index

■

245

JUNOS Software with Enhanced Services Hardware Guide

grounding
cable.....................................................................83
chassis..................................................................83
DC power requirements and warning.................206
equipment warning.............................................210
grounding lug
connecting......................................................85, 87
gzip utility, for compact flash recovery......................165

H
HA (high availability) LED
description......................................................16, 29
hardware
alarm conditions and remedies...........................158
installation and connection...................................77
maintenance.......................................................119
PIM overview........................................................35
product overview....................................................3
recommended for compact flash recovery..........164
replacing components.........................................119
returning.............................................................169
supported platforms.............................................xvi
troubleshooting components..............................157
See also LEDs
hardware features
components..........................................................24
front panel......................................................13, 26
PIMs.....................................................................35
product overview....................................................3
Hayes-compatible modem See modem connection to
router console port
heat dissipation, PIMs
managing..............................................................72
troubleshooting...................................................159
high-speed interfaces See ePIMs
high-speed slots for ePIMs, location.............................27
hostname.....................................................................92
defining (configuration editor)............................111
defining (configuration wizard)...........................107
defining (Quick Configuration)............................104
overview...............................................................92
See also DNS server
humidity requirement..................................................66
Hyperterminal, for terminal emulation
local CLI connection..............................................99
modem connection at router for remote CLI
access.............................................................101
modem connection for remote CLI access..........102

I
immunity standards...................................................232
initial configuration requirements................................95
injury, steps to take....................................................211

246

■

Index

installation
AC power supplies (J6350)..................................141
air filter...............................................................154
compact flash.............................................126, 129
console port cable (chassis).................................120
Crypto Accelerator Module..........................148, 152
DC power supplies (J6350)..................................144
DRAM modules...................................................138
initial....................................................................77
PIM cables..........................................................123
PIMs...................................................................122
preparation...........................................................63
requirements........................................................77
restricted access, J2350........................................79
restricted access, J4350 and
J6350..............................................19, 31, 32, 80
safety guidelines and warnings...........................216
site checklist.........................................................75
site guidelines.......................................................63
USB storage device.............................................135
Integrated Services Digital Network See ISDN
interfaces
J2320 overview.......................................................4
J2320 types supported..........................................38
J2350 overview.......................................................4
J2350 types supported..........................................38
J4350 overview.......................................................5
J4350 types supported..........................................39
J6350 overview.......................................................6
J6350 types supported..........................................39
ISDN BRI ports
BRI S/T..................................................................55
BRI U....................................................................55
LED states.............................................................56
provisioning..........................................................74
RJ-45 connector pinouts......................................195
ISDN PRI PIM...............................................................49
ISDN provisioning........................................................74
See also ISDN BRI ports

J
J-series
establishing software connectivity........................91
hardware replacement........................................119
hardware return..................................................169
installation and connection...................................77
models available.....................................................3
network cables and connectors...........................179
PIMs.....................................................................35
safety and compliance........................................197
site preparation.....................................................63
J-Web configuration editor
basic settings......................................................110
initial configuration.............................................110

Index

J-Web interface
configuration editor See J-Web configuration editor
connecting............................................................97
Quick Configuration See Quick Configuration
regaining lost DHCP lease after initial
configuration...................................................104
J-Web Quick Configuration See Quick Configuration
J2320
boot devices..........................................................12
boot sequence......................................................12
chassis....................................................................8
chassis cover, replacing......................................124
compact flash location........................................127
compact flash, replacing.....................................127
cooling system......................................................19
electrical specifications.........................................69
external compact flash..........................................18
fans.......................................................................19
front panel............................................................13
hardware..........................................................7, 20
installation............................................................79
interfaces supported.............................................38
mounting brackets................................................79
overview.................................................................3
physical specifications..........................................11
PIMs supported.....................................................38
ports supported....................................................38
power management..............................................72
Routing Engine, hardware.....................................12
USB port...............................................................17
J2350
air filter, replacing...............................................153
boot devices..........................................................12
boot sequence......................................................12
chassis....................................................................8
chassis cover, replacing......................................124
compact flash location........................................127
compact flash, replacing.....................................127
cooling system......................................................19
electrical specifications.........................................69
external compact flash..........................................18
fans.......................................................................19
front panel............................................................13
hardware..........................................................7, 20
installation............................................................79
interfaces supported.............................................38
mounting brackets................................................79
overview.................................................................4
physical specifications..........................................11
PIMs supported.....................................................38
ports supported....................................................38
power management..............................................72
power system.......................................................18
restricted access installation.................................79
Routing Engine, hardware.....................................12
USB port...............................................................17

J4350
4-Port Fast Ethernet ePIM.....................................54
4-Port ISDN BRI S/T PIM.......................................55
4-Port ISDN BRI U PIM..........................................55
ADSL PIM..............................................................56
air filter, replacing...............................................154
boot devices..........................................................25
boot sequence......................................................25
chassis..................................................................21
cooling system......................................................32
Dual-Port Channelized T1/E1/ISDN PRI PIM..........49
Dual-Port E1 PIM..................................................48
Dual-Port Fast Ethernet PIM..................................53
Dual-Port Serial PIM..............................................47
Dual-Port T1 PIM..................................................48
electrical specifications.........................................69
fans.......................................................................32
front panel............................................................26
FRUs, replacing...................................................119
G.SHDSL PIM........................................................58
Gigabit Ethernet ePIM...........................................44
Gigabit Ethernet uPIMs.........................................41
hardware..............................................................20
hardware components..........................................24
hardware, replacing............................................119
installation............................................................80
interfaces supported.............................................39
mounting brackets, installing................................81
overview.................................................................5
physical specifications..........................................24
PIM overview........................................................38
PIMs supported.....................................................39
ports supported....................................................39
power management..............................................72
power system.......................................................30
restricted access installation...............19, 31, 32, 80
Routing Engine, hardware.....................................25
USB port...............................................................30
J6350
4-Port Fast Ethernet ePIM.....................................54
4-Port ISDN BRI S/T PIM.......................................55
4-Port ISDN BRI U PIM..........................................55
ADSL PIM..............................................................56
air filter, replacing...............................................154
boot devices....................................................12, 25
boot sequence......................................................25
chassis..................................................................21
cooling system......................................................32
Dual-Port Channelized T1/E1/ISDN PRI PIM..........49
Dual-Port E1 PIM..................................................48
Dual-Port Fast Ethernet PIM..................................53
Dual-Port Serial PIM..............................................47
Dual-Port T1 PIM..................................................48
E3 PIM..................................................................51
electrical specifications.........................................69
fans.......................................................................32

Index

■

247

JUNOS Software with Enhanced Services Hardware Guide

front panel............................................................26
FRUs, replacing...................................................119
G.SHDSL PIM........................................................58
Gigabit Ethernet ePIM...........................................44
Gigabit Ethernet uPIMs.........................................41
hardware..............................................................20
hardware components..........................................24
hardware, replacing............................................119
installation............................................................80
interfaces supported.............................................39
mounting brackets, installing................................81
overview.................................................................6
physical specifications..........................................24
PIM overview........................................................38
PIMs supported.....................................................39
ports supported....................................................39
power management..............................................72
power supplies See power supplies, J6350
restricted access installation...............19, 31, 32, 80
Routing Engine, hardware.....................................25
T3 PIM..................................................................51
USB port...............................................................30
Japan, compliance statement.....................................236
JTAC (Juniper Networks Technical Assistance Center)
contacting...........................................................167
contacting for hardware return...........................172
information required for hardware return...........172
Juniper Networks Technical Assistance Center See JTAC
JUNOS CLI
connecting locally.................................................98
connecting remotely...........................................100
JUNOS Enhanced Services software
documentation......................................................xx
JUNOS software
establishing connectivity.......................................91
JUNOS software with enhanced services
release notes, URL.................................................xv
JUNOScript API
defining access (Quick Configuration).................106
management access.............................................95

L
labels, serial number..........................................169, 170
laptop See management device
lasers
beam warning.....................................................223
Class 1 product warning.....................................222
open aperture warning.......................................224
safety guidelines.................................................222
LEDs
ACTIVITY status (dual-port PIM)............................53
ADSL PIM status...................................................57
ADSL port status...................................................57
ALARM............................................................15, 28
channelized E1 ports............................................51

248

■

Index

channelized T1 ports.............................................51
Class 1 product warning.....................................222
E1 port status........................................................49
E3 port status........................................................52
Fast Ethernet port status (4-port ePIM)..................55
Fast Ethernet port status (dual-port PIM)...............53
G.SHDSL PIM status..............................................59
Gigabit Ethernet port status......................17, 29, 46
HA..................................................................16, 29
ISDN PIM status....................................................56
ISDN port status....................................................56
J4350 power supply..............................................31
J6350 power supply..............................................31
LAN port status...............................................17, 29
LINK.........................................................17, 29, 46
link activity (4-Port Fast Ethernet ePIM)................55
link status (4-port ePIM)........................................55
LINK/ SPEED status (Dual-Port Fast Ethernet
PIM)..................................................................53
ONLINE status (ADSL PIM)....................................57
ONLINE status (G.SHDSL PIM)..............................59
ONLINE status (ISDN BRI PIMs)............................56
POWER...........................................................14, 27
safety warnings...................................................221
serial port status...................................................48
SHDSL port status.................................................59
STATUS (router)..............................................15, 28
T1 port status........................................................49
T3 port status........................................................52
TX/RX.......................................................17, 29, 46
lifting guidelines.........................................................216
lightening activity warning.........................................228
limitations
compact flash recovery does not recover
configuration files............................................164
link activity LED (4-Port Fast Ethernet ePIM)................55
LINK LED.........................................................17, 29, 46
link status LED (4-Port Fast Ethernet ePIM)..................55
LINK/ SPEED LED (Dual-Port Fast Ethernet PIM)..........53
lithium battery compliance........................................233
lo0.0............................................................................94
local connection to the router console port..................98
loopback address
defining (configuration editor)............................113
defining (Quick Configuration)............................105
overview...............................................................94
LX transceiver
Gigabit Ethernet ePIM...........................................46
Gigabit Ethernet uPIM...........................................44

M
maintenance
AC power cord, replacing....................................139
air filter...............................................................154
console port cable (chassis).................................120

Index

Crypto Accelerator Module..........................146, 149
DC power cable, replacing..................................142
DRAM modules...................................................136
external compact flash........................................132
internal compact flash................................126, 129
PIM cables..........................................................123
PIMs...................................................................120
power system.....................................................139
tools and parts required......................................119
USB storage device.............................................134
warnings.............................................................225
major (red) alarms
PIMs...................................................................158
Routing Engine...................................................158
management access.....................................................95
management device
connecting through the CLI.........................100, 162
connecting to console port..................................162
connecting to J-Web........................................97, 98
recovering root password from...........................161
management interface address
after initial configuration.......................................94
before initial configuration....................................94
defining (configuration editor)............................113
defining (Quick Configuration)............................105
during initial configuration....................................94
loopback...............................................................94
management interfaces...............................................94
management ports.................................................17, 29
See also management interface address;
management interfaces
manuals
comments on.......................................................xxi
list of ....................................................................xx
memory See compact flash; DRAM modules; USB
midplane................................................................12, 25
minor (yellow) alarms
alternative boot device........................................158
internal compact flash........................................158
Routing Engine...................................................158
modem commands
at remote end.....................................................102
at router end.......................................................101
modem connection to router console port
configuring modem at router end.......................101
configuring modem at user end..........................102
connecting modem to router..............................102
overview.............................................................100
monoammonium phosphate........................................67
mounting brackets
installing on J4350 and J6350...............................83
on J2320 and J2350..............................................79
multiple routers
safe rack order................................................79, 81

N
NEBS (Network Equipment Building System)
identifying NEBS-compliant routers......................32
shutdown temperature for NEBS-compliant
routers........................................................19, 32
network cable pinouts................................................179
Network Equipment Building System See NEBS
Network Time Protocol (NTP) server See NTP server
Norton Ghost utility, for compact flash recovery........165
notice icons...............................................................xviii
NT1 device, provisioning information..........................74
NTP server
defining (configuration editor)............................112
defining (Quick Configuration)............................105
overview...............................................................93

O
ONLINE LEDs
ADSL PIM status...................................................57
channelized E1 ports............................................51
channelized T1 ports.............................................51
G.SHDSL PIM status..............................................59
ISDN BRI PIM status..............................................56
overview
J2320......................................................................3
J2350......................................................................4
J4350......................................................................5
J6350......................................................................6

P
packing materials
packing a Services Router for shipment..............174
packing components for shipment......................174
saving...................................................................78
parentheses, in syntax descriptions.............................xix
password See root password
passwords
root password, recovering..................................161
PC See management device
personnel warning.....................................................200
physdiskwrite utility, for compact flash recovery.......165
PIC See PIMs
PIM number, always 0...............................................124
PIMs (Physical Interface Modules)
4-Port Fast Ethernet..............................................54
4-Port ISDN BRI....................................................55
ADSL.....................................................................56
cables and connectors........................................179
Dual-Port Channelized T1/E1/ISDN PRI PIM..........49
Dual-Port E1.........................................................48
Dual-Port Fast Ethernet.........................................53
Dual-Port Serial.....................................................47
Dual-Port T1.........................................................48
E3 ........................................................................51

Index

■

249

JUNOS Software with Enhanced Services Hardware Guide

failure.................................................................158
field-replaceable PIMs...........................................38
G.SHDSL ..............................................................58
Gigabit Ethernet ePIMs..........................................44
Gigabit Ethernet uPIMs.........................................41
heat dissipation.....................................................72
installing.............................................................122
installing cables..................................................123
LEDs See LEDs
major (red) alarm................................................158
midplane to Routing Engine............................12, 25
non-hot-swappability............................35, 121, 122
offline, troubleshooting.......................................159
overview...............................................................35
PIM number, always 0................................124, 169
power consumption..............................................72
power management, planning..............................72
power management, troubleshooting.................159
removing............................................................120
replacing cables..................................................123
serial number label.............................................172
slot numbering, J2320 and J2350..........................14
slot numbering, J4350 and J6350..........................26
T3 ........................................................................51
pinouts
ADSL RJ-11 connector.........................................194
chassis console DB-9 connector..........................191
chassis console port............................................190
EIA-530A DCE serial cable..................................185
EIA-530A DTE serial cable..................................184
Fast Ethernet connector......................................189
Gigabit Ethernet connector (ePIM)......................190
Gigabit Ethernet connector (uPIMs).....................189
ISDN RJ-45 connector.........................................195
RJ-45 chassis console connector.........................190
RJ-48 connector to DB-15 connector
(crossover).......................................................193
RJ-48 connector to DB-15 connector
(straight)..........................................................193
RJ-48 connector to RJ-48 connector
(crossover).......................................................192
RJ-48 connector to RJ-48 connector
(straight)..........................................................192
RS-232 DCE serial cable......................................181
RS-232 DTE serial cable......................................180
RS-422/449 (EIA-449) DCE serial cable...............183
RS-422/449 (EIA-449) DTE serial cable...............181
SHDSL RJ-11 connector.......................................194
V.35 DCE serial cable..........................................187
V.35 DTE serial cable..........................................186
X.21 DCE serial cable..........................................188
X.21 DTE serial cable..........................................187
plug types, AC..............................................................70
ports
0...........................................................................94
ADSL See ADSL ports

250

■

Index

AUX................................................................17, 30
cables, PIM, installing.........................................123
cables, WAN, removing......................................123
channelized See channelized E1 ports; channelized
T1 ports
console (chassis).............................................17, 30
See also console port
DS1 See E1 ports; T1 ports
DS3 See E3 ports; T3 ports
E1 See E1 ports
E3 See E3 ports
G.SHDSL See SHDSL ports
interface naming.................................................124
ISDN See ISDN BRI ports
J2320 types supported..........................................38
J2350 types supported..........................................38
J4350 types supported..........................................39
J6350 types supported..........................................39
lo0.0.....................................................................94
serial See serial ports
SHDSL See SHDSL ports
T1 See T1 ports
T3 See T3 ports
USB.................................................................17, 30
power
AC power See AC power
applying................................................................89
button.............................................................14, 27
connecting............................................................84
consumption, PIMs...............................................72
DC power See DC power
grounding requirement.........................................83
LED.................................................................14, 27
managing..............................................................72
power cables See DC power cables
power cords See AC power cords
power supplies See power supplies
power system See power system
removing..............................................................89
requirements........................................................69
troubleshooting...................................................159
power button.........................................................14, 27
power cables See DC power cables
power cords See AC power cords
POWER LED..........................................................14, 27
power management
planning...............................................................72
troubleshooting...................................................159
power supplies
J2320....................................................................18
J2350....................................................................18
J4350....................................................................30
J6350 See power supplies, J6350
LED states.............................................................31

Index

power supplies, J6350
blank panel required in empty slot.....................139
dedicated AC power feed requirement................142
dedicated DC power feed requirement...............145
description............................................................31
installing AC........................................................141
installing DC.......................................................144
LED states.............................................................31
redundancy...........................................................31
removing AC.......................................................140
removing DC.......................................................143
serial number label.............................................172
power system
connecting......................................................85, 86
fan..................................................................19, 32
J2320....................................................................18
J4350....................................................................30
J6350....................................................................31
power supply LED.................................................31
preparing for installation..............................................63
product disposal.........................................................231
product overview...........................................................3
provisioning an ISDN line.............................................74

Q
Quick Configuration
basic settings......................................................103
initial configuration.............................................103
Set Up page........................................................104

R
rack installation
general requirements............................................64
lifting guidelines..................................................216
mounting brackets................................................83
order of multiple routers.................................79, 81
procedure.......................................................79, 80
safety guidelines and warnings...........................217
securing rack to building.......................................65
size requirements...........................................64, 65
support for front-mount rack..........................64, 65
ventilation requirement..................................64, 65
radio frequency interference (RFI), reducing................68
ramp angle requirement............................................221
read or write error, Routing Engine............................158
recovering compact flash See compact flash recovery
red alarms See major alarms
redundant J6350 power supplies
description............................................................31
safety guidelines for power sources....................205
regulatory compliance................................................197
release notes, URL........................................................xv

remote connection to router console port
configuring modem at router end.......................101
configuring modem at user end..........................102
connecting modem to router..............................102
overview.............................................................100
replacement
AC power cord....................................................139
air filter...............................................................154
console port cable (chassis).................................120
Crypto Accelerator Module..........................146, 149
DC power cable..................................................142
DRAM modules...................................................136
external compact flash........................................132
internal compact flash................................126, 129
PIM cables..........................................................123
PIMs...................................................................120
power system (J6350).........................................139
tools and parts required......................................119
USB storage device.............................................134
request chassis pic fpc-slot command........................123
reset
power button for restart..................................14, 27
RESET CONFIG button for factory
configuration...................................................160
RESET CONFIG button
for factory configuration.....................................160
Return Materials Authorization See RMA
returning hardware....................................................169
packing a Services Router for shipment..............174
packing components for shipment......................174
procedure...........................................................172
tools and parts required......................................173
RJ-45 connector pinouts
chassis console port............................................190
Fast Ethernet port...............................................189
Gigabit Ethernet port (ePIM)................................190
Gigabit Ethernet port (uPIMs)..............................189
RJ-45 to DB-9 serial port adapter................................162
chassis console port......................................99, 102
RJ-48 connector to DB-15 connector (crossover)
pinouts...................................................................193
RJ-48 connector to DB-15 connector (straight)
pinouts...................................................................193
RJ-48 connector to RJ-48 connector (crossover)
pinouts...................................................................192
RJ-48 connector to RJ-48 connector (straight)
pinouts...................................................................192
RMA (Return Materials Authorization)........................169
number...............................................................173
packing a Services Router for shipment..............174
packing components for shipment......................174
procedure...........................................................172
tools and parts required......................................173
rollover cable, connecting the console port................162

Index

■

251

JUNOS Software with Enhanced Services Hardware Guide

root password
at initial local connection (none)...........................99
at initial remote connection (none).....................103
characteristics.......................................................92
defining (cli wizard)............................................107
defining (configuration editor)............................112
defining (Quick Configuration)............................104
required to commit a configuration......................92
root password recovery..............................................161
router See Services Router
Routing Engine
fan..................................................................19, 32
fan failure...........................................................158
J2320 functions and components.........................12
J2350 functions and components.........................12
J4350 functions and components.........................25
J6350 functions and components.........................25
major (red) alarm................................................158
midplane to PIMs............................................12, 25
minor (yellow) alarm..........................................158
read or write error..............................................158
too warm............................................................158
RS-232 DCE cable pinouts..........................................181
RS-232 DTE cable pinouts..........................................180
RS-422/449 (EIA-449) DCE cable pinouts...................183
RS-422/449 (EIA-449) DTE cable pinouts...................181

S
S/T port See ISDN BRI ports
safety guidelines and warnings
AC power............................................................203
battery handling.................................................226
DC power (general).............................................204
DC power disconnection.....................................205
DC power wiring sequence warning...................207
DC power wiring terminations warning..............209
DC power, grounding requirements and
warning...........................................................206
DC power, redundant power supplies.................205
electrical.............................................................202
general................................................................199
grounded equipment..........................................210
in case of electrical accident...............................211
installation..........................................................216
jewelry removal..................................................227
lasers and LEDs..................................................221
levels..................................................................197
lightening activity...............................................228
maintenance and operation................................225
multiple power supplies .....................................211
operating temperature........................................229
power disconnection...........................................213
product disposal.................................................231
rack-mounting....................................................217
ramps.................................................................221

252

■

Index

read installation instructions...............................216
telecommunications cord....................................215
TN power system................................................214
safety standards.........................................................232
fire safety..............................................................66
sample configuration
for basic connectivity..........................................114
serial number
chassis components, label..........................169, 170
PIMs...................................................................172
power supply......................................................172
serial ports
cables and connectors........................................179
Dual-Port Serial PIM..............................................47
EIA-530A DCE pinouts........................................185
EIA-530A DTE pinouts........................................184
LED states.............................................................48
RS-232 DCE pinouts............................................181
RS-232 DTE pinouts............................................180
RS-422/449 (EIA-449) DCE pinouts.....................183
RS-422/449 (EIA-449) DTE pinouts.....................181
V.35 DCE pinouts................................................187
V.35 DTE pinouts................................................186
X.21 DCE pinouts...............................................188
X.21 DTE pinouts................................................187
service provider, contacting for ISDN provisioning.......74
Services Router
backup..................................................................94
clearance..............................................................63
connecting............................................................96
establishing software connectivity........................91
grounding a DC-powered model...........................87
grounding an AC-powered model..........................84
hardware replacement........................................119
hardware return..................................................169
installation and connection...................................77
network cables and connectors...........................179
operating environment.........................................66
overview.................................................................3
packing for shipment..........................................174
PIM overview........................................................35
powering on and off.............................................89
preparation checklist.............................................75
safety and compliance........................................197
site preparation.....................................................63
unpacking.............................................................78
Set Up page
description..........................................................103
field summary....................................................104
setup
configuration editor............................................110
Quick Configuration............................................103
requirements........................................................95

Index

SFP Gigabit Ethernet ePIMs
optical interface support.......................................46
overview...............................................................44
SFPs supported.....................................................45
SFP Gigabit Ethernet uPIMs
optical interface support.......................................44
overview...............................................................41
SHDSL ports
description............................................................58
LED states on a G.SHDSL PIM...............................59
RJ-11 connector pinouts......................................194
shipping carton
packing a Services Router for shipment..............174
packing components for shipment......................174
saving...................................................................78
show chassis alarms command..................................157
show chassis fpc pic-status command........................124
show chassis hardware command
identifying NEBS-compliant routers......................32
locating component serial numbers....................169
verifying Crypto Accelerator Module
installation..............................................149, 152
show chassis power-ratings command.......................159
show chassis routing-engine command
checking CPU temperature.............................19, 32
checking DRAM amount.................................12, 25
verifying DRAM installation and
configuration...................................................139
shutdown
graceful.................................................................89
immediate............................................................89
temperature See shutdown temperature
shutdown temperature
NEBS-compliant routers..................................19, 32
non-NEBS-compliant routers.................................32
signaling limitations.....................................................68
site preparation
checklist................................................................75
electrical wiring guidelines....................................68
fire safety..............................................................66
for rack installation...............................................64
guidelines.............................................................63
operating environment.........................................66
power requirements.............................................69
size
J2320....................................................................11
J2350....................................................................11
J4350....................................................................24
J6350....................................................................24
requirements for rack installation...................64, 65
slot numbers, PIM
chassis diagram..............................................14, 26
displayed as FPC number in command
output.............................................................124
small form-factor pluggable transceivers See SFP

SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol), no
Gigabit Ethernet support.....................................43, 46
specifications
AC electrical connection........................................69
AC power cords....................................................70
DC electrical connection.......................................71
DC power cables...................................................71
electrical...............................................................69
environmental......................................................66
grounding cable....................................................83
J2320 hardware....................................................11
J2350 hardware....................................................11
J4350 hardware....................................................24
J6350 hardware....................................................24
serial PIM cables and connectors........................179
SFP Gigabit Ethernet ePIM....................................46
SFP Gigabit Ethernet uPIMs...................................44
SSH
defining (configuration editor)............................112
defining access (Quick Configuration).................106
management access.............................................95
standards compliance................................................232
startup
Services Router.....................................................89
standby power......................................................89
status
router..............................................................15, 28
See also STATUS LEDs
STATUS LEDs
ADSL ports............................................................57
channelized E1 ports............................................51
channelized T1 ports.............................................51
E1 ports................................................................49
E3 ports................................................................52
ISDN ports............................................................56
router status....................................................15, 27
serial ports............................................................48
SHDSL ports..........................................................59
T1 ports................................................................49
T3 ports................................................................52
storage media
recovering internal compact flash.......................164
replacing the external compact flash..................132
replacing the internal compact flash...........126, 129
replacing the USB storage device........................134
support, technical See technical support
SX transceiver
Gigabit Ethernet ePIM...........................................46
Gigabit Ethernet uPIM...........................................44
symmetric high-speed digital subscriber line See SHDSL
syntax conventions....................................................xviii
system time
defining (Quick Configuration)............................105
overview...............................................................93
synchronizing (configuration editor)...................112
synchronizing (Quick Configuration)...................105

Index

■

253

JUNOS Software with Enhanced Services Hardware Guide

T
T1 ports
description............................................................48
See also channelized T1 ports
LED states.............................................................49
RJ-48 cable pinouts.............................................191
T3 ports
BNC connector pinouts.......................................194
description............................................................51
LED states.............................................................52
technical publications list.............................................xx
technical support
contacting JTAC...................................................xxii
contacting JTAC for hardware return...................172
information required for hardware return...........172
telecommunications line wire gauge..........................215
Telnet
defining access (Quick Configuration).................106
management access.............................................95
temperature
required for operation...........................................66
Routing Engine, too warm..................................158
shutdown, NEBS-compliant routers.................19, 32
shutdown, non-NEBS-compliant routers................32
warning..............................................................229
temperature alarm, air filter replacement for.............154
terminology
basic connectivity.................................................91
PIMs.....................................................................35
thermal output.............................................................66
time See system time
time zone.....................................................................93
defining (configuration editor)............................112
defining (Quick Configuration)............................105
TN power system.......................................................214
tolerances, environmental............................................66
tools and equipment
for component replacement...............................119
for hardware return............................................173
troubleshooting
root password recovery......................................161
troubleshooting a Services Router, hardware
components
chassis alarm conditions.....................................158
offline PIMs.........................................................159
power management............................................159
turning on a Services Router........................................89
TX/RX LED.......................................................17, 29, 46
Type C fire extinguishers..............................................67

U
U port See ISDN BRI ports
United States, compliance statements........................237
universal serial bus See USB
unpacking the router....................................................78

254

■

Index

uPIMs, Gigabit Ethernet See Gigabit Ethernet uPIMs
URLs
datasheets.............................................................35
PIM information and datasheets...........................35
release notes.........................................................xv
return and repair policies....................................173
support...............................................................167
USB (universal serial bus)
storage device, installing.....................................135
storage device, removing....................................134
storage device, replacing.....................................134
USB port.........................................................17, 30
utilities, for compact flash recovery...........................165

V
V.35 DCE cable pinouts..............................................187
V.35 DTE cable pinouts..............................................186
ventilation requirement................................................63
verification
basic connectivity...............................................113

W
warnings
battery handling.................................................226
DC power cables.................................................204
DC power disconnection.....................................205
DC power plant and chassis ground......................71
DC wiring sequence............................................207
DC wiring terminations.......................................209
DC-powered J4350 and J6350 routers, restricted
access installation only .....................................68
earthed mains socket (Norway and Sweden
only)................................................................211
electrical.............................................................201
ESD strap to prevent router damage.....................21
follow lifting guidelines...................................79, 81
general................................................................199
grounded equipment..........................................210
installation..........................................................216
jewelry removal..................................................227
laser and LED.....................................................221
levels defined......................................................197
lightening activity...............................................228
maintenance and operational.............................225
multiple power supply disconnection..................211
operating temperature........................................229
personnel............................................................200
power disconnection...........................................213
product disposal.................................................231
rack-mounting requirements...............................217
ramp angle.........................................................221
read installation instructions...............................216
restricted access location for DC-powered
routers......................................19, 31, 32, 79, 80

Index

rotating fans, compact flash
replacement............................................127, 130
safe rack order for multiple routers.................79, 81
telecommunications lines...................................215
TN power system................................................214
weight
J2320....................................................................11
J2350....................................................................11
J4350....................................................................24
J6350....................................................................24
rack-mount requirements...............................64, 65
WinZip utility, for compact flash recovery..................165
wire gauge
for grounding cables.............................................83
for telecommunications lines..............................215
wiring guidelines
DC wiring sequence warning..............................207
DC wiring terminations warning.........................209
radio frequency interference (RFI)........................68
signaling limitations..............................................68
suppressing electromagnetic interference
(EMI).................................................................68

X
X.21 DCE cable pinouts.............................................188
X.21 DTE cable pinouts..............................................187

Index

■

255

JUNOS Software with Enhanced Services Hardware Guide

256

■

Index

Source Exif Data:

File Type                       : PDF
File Type Extension             : pdf
MIME Type                       : application/pdf
PDF Version                     : 1.4
Linearized                      : No
Title                           : 
Creator                         : Juniper Networks Stylesheets
Author                          : Unknown
Producer                        : XEP 4.6 build 20060515
Trapped                         : False
Create Date                     : 2008:07:24 15:28:53
Modify Date                     : 2008:07:24 15:28:53
Page Count                      : 280
Page Mode                       : UseOutlines

EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools

Juniper Networks J Series Services Router J2350 Users Manual

J2350 to the manual a3e66ee0-736d-4a72-8ccd-8b7a6979ae24

Navigation menu

Versions of this User Manual:

Views

Navigation